Gas LDC

Revision: 0
Gas LDC Operating Guidelines

Issued: Nov-1999
Review Due: Nov-2000
Volume V
Table of Contents Doc. # TOC-500
• Philosophy
• Management Standards
• Administrative Guidelines
− Accounting
− Purchasing
− Inventory Control
− Crisis Management
− Quality
− Security
− Training
• Maintenance Guidelines
− Maintenance Systems
− Equipment Maintenance Procedure Guidelines
• Operations Guidelines
− Administration
− Communication
− Compressor/Plant
− Corrosion
− Measurement
− Miscellaneous Facilities
− Pipeline
− Quality Control
− Transportation/Work Equipment
− Valves
− Joining of Pipe
• Exceptions/Revisions
Global Asset Operations Page 1 of 6

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Volume V
Philosophy
Global Asset Operations Philosophy
Management Standards
Environmental, Health and Safety .......................................................................................... MGS-001
Process Safety Management.................................................................................................... MGS-002
Crisis Management.................................................................................................................. MGS-003
International Security .............................................................................................................. MGS-004
Quality Management System (ISO) ........................................................................................ MGS-005
Human Resources.................................................................................................................... MGS-006
Administrative......................................................................................................................... MGS-007
Third-Party Management ........................................................................................................ MGS-008
Maintenance ............................................................................................................................ MGS-009
Operations ............................................................................................................................... MGS-010
“Positive Impact” Program...................................................................................................... MGS-011
Management Standards and Guideline Auditing .................................................................... MGS-012
Administrative Guidelines
Accounting
Facility Organization Structure and Contact List............................................................... OSC-001
Requisitions........................................................................................................................REQ-001
Capital Budgets and Expenditures ..................................................................................... CBE-001
Work Orders/Authority for Expenditure .......................................................................... WKO-001
Invoice Processing................................................................................................................INP-001
Petty Cash Disbursement ................................................................................................... PCD-001
Business Expense and Travel Reimbursement................................................................... BER-001
Purchasing
Ethics.................................................................................................................................. PUR-001
Blanket Purchase Order...................................................................................................... PUR-002
Standard Purchase Order.................................................................................................... PUR-003
Emergency Purchase Order................................................................................................ PUR-004
Material Expediting............................................................................................................ PUR-005
Bidding ............................................................................................................................... PUR-006
Purchase Request................................................................................................................ PUR-007
Request for Quotation ........................................................................................................ PUR-008
Instructions to Bidders ....................................................................................................... PUR-009
Cost/Bid Summary Analysis .............................................................................................. PUR-010
Purchase Order/Receiving Record ..................................................................................... PUR-011
Purchase Agreement........................................................................................................... PUR-012
Purchasing Department Files ............................................................................................. PUR-013
Purchase Cut-Off ............................................................................................................... PUR-014
Inventory Control
Accounting Treatment for Inventory................................................................................... INC-001
Receiving............................................................................................................................. INC-002
Declaration of Surplus/Junk ................................................................................................ INC-003
Disposal of Surplus ............................................................................................................. INC-004
Disposal of Junk.................................................................................................................. INC-005
Receiving of Freight............................................................................................................ INC-006
Physical Inventory Count .................................................................................................... INC-007
Crisis Management
Crisis Management Planning ............................................................................................. CRP-001
Emergency Action Plan...................................................................................................... CRP-002

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Volume V
Administrative Guidelines (Continued)

Quality
Quality System Selection ....................................................................................................QSS-001
Quality Manual Structure ....................................................................................................QSS-002
ISO 9000 Implementation Process......................................................................................QSS-003
Security
Facility Perimeter Barriers ..................................................................................................SEC-001
Security Lighting.................................................................................................................SEC-002
Access Control ....................................................................................................................SEC-003
Information Security ...........................................................................................................SEC-004
Training
Procedure Guideline...........................................................................................................TRG-097
Operations and Maintenance Training ...............................................................................TRG-098
Procedure Development Guideline ....................................................................................TRG-099
Maintenance Guidelines
Maintenance Systems
Maintenance Philosophy ................................................................................................... MSO-001
Selection and Implementation of a Computerized Maintenance
Management System (CMMS) ................................................................................... MSO-002
Maintenance Work Order System ..................................................................................... MSO-003
Equipment Criticality Assessment .................................................................................... MSO-004
Maintenance Work Planning and Scheduling ................................................................... MSO-005
Maintenance History Capture and Review........................................................................ MSO-006
Equipment Spare Parts Review and Selection .................................................................. MSO-007
Equipment Maintenance Procedure Guidelines
Centrifugal Compressor Maintenance................................................................................EMP-001
Reciprocating Compressor Maintenance ...........................................................................EMP-002
Rotary Compressor Maintenance .......................................................................................EMP-003
Centrifugal Pump Maintenance..........................................................................................EMP-004
Positive Displacement Pump Maintenance ........................................................................EMP-005
Pressure Vessel Maintenance .............................................................................................EMP-006
Tower Maintenance............................................................................................................EMP-007
Storage Tank Maintenance.................................................................................................EMP-008
Heat Exchanger Maintenance.............................................................................................EMP-009
Gas Turbine Maintenance ..................................................................................................EMP-010
Steam Turbine Maintenance...............................................................................................EMP-011
Turbo-Expander Maintenance............................................................................................EMP-012
Electric Motor Maintenance...............................................................................................EMP-013
Generator Maintenance ......................................................................................................EMP-014
Manual Valve Maintenance ...............................................................................................EMP-015
Motor Operated Valve Maintenance ..................................................................................EMP-016
Relief Valve Maintenance..................................................................................................EMP-017
Shutdown Valve Maintenance ...........................................................................................EMP-018
Instruments and Control Maintenance ...............................................................................EMP-019
Fire and Gas Detection System Maintenance ....................................................................EMP-020
Reciprocating Engine Maintenance ...................................................................................EMP-021
Gearbox Maintenance ........................................................................................................EMP-022
Aerial Cooler Maintenance ................................................................................................EMP-023
Piping Maintenance............................................................................................................EMP-024
Maintenance Welding ........................................................................................................EMP-025

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Volume V
Operations Guidelines
Administration
Operation and Maintenance Plans..................................................................................ADM-100D
Reporting and Investigation of Incidents .......................................................................ADM-101D
Investigation of Accidents and Failures .........................................................................ADM-103D
Reporting of Safety Related Conditions.........................................................................ADM-104D
Marking and Documentation of Materials .....................................................................ADM-105D
Procedure Review Requirements ...................................................................................ADM-108D
Recordkeeping and Retention ........................................................................................ADM-109D
Operator Training...........................................................................................................ADM-201D
Customer Notification ....................................................................................................ADM-301D
Annual Reporting ...........................................................................................................ADM-302D
Property Damage to Company Facilities .......................................................................ADM-801D
Property Losses, Fraud and Theft ..................................................................................ADM-802D
Communication
Radio Equipment Operation and Maintenance ..............................................................COM-201D
Telephone System Answering Services .........................................................................COM-301D
Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition Systems Inspection and Testing.................COM-401D
Microwave Systems Inspection and Testing..................................................................COM-501D
Compressor/Plant
Control Instrumentation Testing and Calibrations ............................................................. CS-101D
Control Instrumentation Testing and Calibration – Appendix A..................................... CS-101aD
Compressor Operating Instructions.................................................................................... CS-201D
Remote Control Shutdown Device Inspection, Maintenance and Calibration................... CS-301D
Testing of Compressor Building Personnel Warning Systems .......................................... CS-302D
Emergency Shutdown Installation and Modification......................................................... CS-401D
Emergency Shutdown System Training, Operation and Testing ....................................... CS-402D
Corrosion
Examination of Aboveground Facilities .........................................................................COR-101D
Examination of Buried Pipelines.....................................................................................COR-102D
External Protective Coating and Cathodic Protection.....................................................COR-103D
Internal Corrosion, Onshore Gathering Facilities outside Incorporated Areas...............COR-104D
Internal Corrosion, Offshore and within Incorporated Areas .........................................COR-105D
External Corrosion Control .............................................................................................COR-106D
Corrosion Specialist Responsibilities..............................................................................COR-201D
Electrical Isolation...........................................................................................................COR-202D
Impressed Current Power Source Inspection ..................................................................COR-203D
Metal Storage Tanks........................................................................................................COR-204D
Record Maps ...................................................................................................................COR-301D
Measurement
Bellow Meter Tests ........................................................................................................ MTR-101D
Rotary Meter Tests ......................................................................................................... MTR-102D
Orifice Meter Tests......................................................................................................... MTR-201D
Orifice Meter Tube Inspection ....................................................................................... MTR-202D
Ultrasonic Meters ........................................................................................................... MTR-203D
Turbine Meter Tests ....................................................................................................... MTR-401D
Testing of Positive Displacement Meters....................................................................... MTR-402D
Installation of Household Meters ................................................................................... MTR-403D

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Volume V
Operations Guidelines (Continued)

Miscellaneous Facilities
Protection of Aboveground Pipe ................................................................................... MISC-101D
Vaults Maintenance....................................................................................................... MISC-301D
Pipeline
Class Location .................................................................................................................. PPL-101D
Damage Prevention Program ........................................................................................... PPL-102D
Crossing of Company Pipeline by Other Operators......................................................... PPL-103D
Repair Procedures ............................................................................................................ PPL-201D
Operating Pressures and Limits Criteria .......................................................................... PPL-202D
Tapping Pipelines............................................................................................................. PPL-203D
Repair and Maintenance – Plastic Pipe ............................................................................ PPL-204D
Acetylene or Dresser Coupled Pipelines.......................................................................... PPL-205D
Marking Pipelines ............................................................................................................ PPL-301D
Establishing Maximum Allowable Pressure .................................................................... PPL-401D
Odorizing Gas .................................................................................................................. PPL-402D
Emergency Plans .............................................................................................................. PPL-403D
Public Education Program................................................................................................ PPL-405D
Continuing Surveillance................................................................................................... PPL-406D
Gas Leak Detection Survey.............................................................................................. PPL-407D
Abandoning Facilities ...................................................................................................... PPL-408D
Blowdown and Purging Safety......................................................................................... PPL-409D
Air Movers ....................................................................................................................... PPL-410D
Uprating Maximum Allowable Operating Pressure......................................................... PPL-411D
Abnormal Operations ....................................................................................................... PPL-413D
Pipeline Startup and Shutdown ........................................................................................ PPL-414D
Reinstatement of Service.................................................................................................. PPL-415D
Patrol Program.................................................................................................................. PPL-501D
Waterway Crossings......................................................................................................... PPL-502D
Testing Requirements – Pipe Steel................................................................................... PPL-701D
Testing Requirements – Plastic Pipe................................................................................ PPL-702D
Cast Iron and Ductile Iron Pipelines ................................................................................ PPL-703D
Caulked Bell and Spigot Joints ........................................................................................ PPL-704D
Pigging Program............................................................................................................... PPL-801D
Quality Control
Gas Moisture Analysis and Monitor Calibration .............................................................. QC-101D
Gas Sample Collection ...................................................................................................... QC-102D
Continuous Sampling ........................................................................................................ QC-201D
Gas Chromatographs ......................................................................................................... QC-202D
Hydrogen Sulfide and Total Sulfur Analyzers .................................................................. QC-204D
Specific Gravity and Heating Value Determinations........................................................ QC-401D
Transportation/Work Equipment
Vehicle Operating Standards, Permits and Licenses....................................................... TRN-101D
Volume Bottles................................................................................................................ TRN-301D
Valves
Emergency Valve Maintenance ......................................................................................VLV-101D
Pressure Limiting and Relief Devices .............................................................................VLV-102D
Valve Security.................................................................................................................VLV-103D

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Volume V
Operations Guidelines (Continued)

Joining of Pipe
Welding and Welder Qualifications............................................................................... WLD-101D
Weld Inspection and Testing.......................................................................................... WLD-102D
Welding Repair and Removal of Defects....................................................................... WLD-103D
Joining of Pipelines ........................................................................................................ WLD-104D
Joining of Plastic Pipe .................................................................................................... WLD-105D
Qualifying Joining Methods........................................................................................... WLD-106D
Qualification of Personnel Performing Plastic Pipe Fusion........................................... WLD-107D
Qualification for Joint Inspectors................................................................................... WLD-108D
Exceptions/Revisions
Exception Process ....................................................................................................................EXC-001
Revision Process ...................................................................................................................... REV-001

Revision: 0
Issued: 20-Nov-1999
Environmental, Health and Safety
Doc. # MGS-001
1. Management Standard
Environmental, Health and Safety (EHS) programs shall be developed, implemented and
maintained for all operating assets. The EHS programs shall, at a minimum, address applicable
areas found in Table 1 (Safety) and Table 2 (Environmental), as appropriate.
2. Scope
This management standard applies to all “Company” operated facilities, its employees and its
contractors except where superseded by more stringent local standards.
3. Corporate Resource Commitment

Enron Corp business units shall provide human, physical and financial resources essential to
developing the required EHS programs.
4. References
4.1 Enron Corp Environmental, Health and Safety Management Procedures,

January 1998
4.2 Enron Global Asset Operations Safety and Health Guidelines
4.3 Enron Global Asset Operations Environmental Guidelines

Revision: 0
Issued: 20-Nov-1999
Doc. # MGS-001
Table 1 - Safety
1. Accident and Injury Reporting and Investigation 28. Flammable and Combustibles-Handling and Storage
2. Abrasive Blasting 29. Fuel Management
3. Animal, Insect and Plant Hazards 30. Gas Testing
4. Asbestos 31. Hazard Communication and MSDS
5. Bloodborne Pathogens Control 32. Hearing Conservation
6. Buried Lines 33. Hot and Cold Work Permits
7. Diving 34. Housekeeping and Office Safety
8. Compressed Gas Cylinders 35. Laboratory Safety and Hygiene
9. Confined Space Entry 36. Ladders
10. Crane Safety 37. Powered Lift Truck Operations
11. Diesel Engine Safety 38. Lock-Out/Tag-Out Safeguards
12. Electrical Safety - Basic 39. Material Handling
13. Electrical Safety – General Substation Rules 40. Naturally Occurring Radioactive Material (NORM)
Safeguards
14. Electrical Safety – Work On or Near Energized 41. Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)
Equipment
15. Electrical Safety – Overhead Lines 42. Process Safety Management
16. Electrical Safety – Underground Installations 43. Respiratory Protection
17. Electrical Safety – Engineering Testing 44. Safety Meetings
18. Electrical Safety – Communications Facilities 45. Safety Teams
19. Emergency Action Plans 46. Scaffolds
20. Equipment and Tool Safety 47. Signs and Tags
21. Excavation 48. Spray Painting
22. Facility Safety Inspection 49. Stairways
23. Fall Protection 50. Walking and Working Surfaces
24. Fire Brigades 51. Working Over Water
25. Fire Extinguishers (Portable) 52. Work Zone Traffic Control and Flagging
26. Fire Extinguishing Systems 53. Employee Orientation
27. First Aid

Revision: 0
Issued: 20-Nov-1999
Doc. # MGS-001
Table 2 - Environmental
1. General-Statement of Enron Corp EHS Principles 41. Waste-Waste Paint and Solvents
2. General-Environmental Guideline 42. Waste-New Product Review and Storage
3. General-Personnel/Designation of Responsibilities 43. Waste-Waste Minimization
4. General-Definitions 44. Waste-Personnel Training and Emergency Actions
5. General-Reserved 45. Waste-Reserved
6. General-Facilities Inspections 46. Waste-Reserved
7. General-Agency Communications 47. Waste-Storage and Inspection
8. General-Reserved 48. Waste-Treatment Guideline
9. General-Community Relations and Communication 49. Waste-On-Site Waste Management
10. General-Reserved 50. Waste-Reserved
11. General-Guideline for Environmental Records 51. Waste-Selecting T & D Services
12. General-Monthly Reports 52. Waste-Documenting T & D Services
13. General-Annual EHS Report 53. Waste-Reserved
14. General-Reserved 54. Water-Definition and General Guidance
15. Spills & Releases-Spill Response Actions 55. Water-Containment Area Discharges
16. Spills & Releases-Spill Cleanup Guidelines 56. Water-Discharge Limits and Monitoring Guidelines
17. Spills & Releases-Reserved 57. Water-Reserved
18. Spills & Releases-General Guidance 58. Water-Domestic Sewage
19. Spills & Releases-Loading and Unloading 59. Water-Hydrostatic Test Water Discharge
20. Spills & Releases-Container Handling and Storage 60. Water-Aquatic Monitoring
21. Spills & Releases-AST Design and Specifications 61. Water-Reserved
22. Spills & Releases-Facility Inspections 62. Air-Greenhouse Gas Emissions
23. Spills & Releases-Reserved 63. Air-Stack Emissions, Controls, and Monitoring
24. Spills & Releases-Spill Plans 64. Air-Ambient Air Quality Monitoring
25. Spills & Releases-Personnel Training 65. Air-Reserved
26. Spills & Releases-Spill Drills 66. Asbestos-Policy and Definitions
27. Spills & Releases-Reserved 67. Asbestos-Notice to Perform Work
28. Waste-Compliance with Local Laws & Regulations 68. Asbestos-Storage and Disposal
29. Waste-Waste Characterization 69. Asbestos-Reserved
30. Waste-Unclassified Materials 70. Storage Tank-Underground Storage Tanks
31. Waste-Used Aerosol Cans 71. Storage Tank-Aboveground Storage Tanks
32. Waste-Used Drums and Containers 72. Storage Tank-Reserved
33. Waste-Used Fluorescent Bulbs 73. PCB-Notification Guideline
34. Waste-Used Glycol and Oil Filters 74. PCB-Labeling Guideline
35. Waste-Molecular Sieves and Activated Carbon 75. PCB-Inventory Guideline
36. Waste-Used Oil 76. PCB-Storage and Inspection Guideline
37. Waste-Pesticides, Herbicides and Insecticides 77. PCB-Guideline for Disposal of PCB Waste
38. Waste-Sandblasting Materials 78. PCB-Recordkeeping and Personnel Training
39. Waste-Used Tires and Batteries 79. PCB-Reserved
40. Waste-Waste Acids and Caustics 80. Potable Water-Quality Monitoring

Revision: 0
Issued: 20-Nov-1999
Process Safety Management
Doc. # MGS-002
A Process Safety Management (PSM) program shall be developed, implemented and maintained
for all operating assets that store, transfer, use and/or process hazardous materials (i.e., gas
processing and LNG plants). The PSM program shall, at a minimum, address the following
elements.
• Employee Participation • Mechanical Integrity

• Process Safety Information • Non-routine Work Authorizations
• Process Hazard Analysis • Management of Change
• Operating Procedures and Practices • Incident Investigation
• Training • Emergency Planning and Response
• Contractors Requirements • Compliance Audits
• Pre-Startup Safety Review
U.S. sites shall follow the OSHA PSM program. European sites shall follow the appropriate
European PSM program. Other sites shall follow the OSHA PSM program and/or their
respective country PSM standard whichever is more stringent.
2. Scope
This management standard applies to all “Company” operated facilities, its employees and

Enron Corp business units shall provide the resources needed to set-up and maintain a basic PSM
program. Available resources include PSM training and process hazard analysis facilitation when
required.
4. References
4.1 U.S. OSHA PSM Web Sites
• PSM Resources – www.osha-slc.gov/SLTC/processsafetymanagement/index.html

• PSM Guidelines – www.osha-slc.gov/OshStd_data/1910_0119_APP_C.html
4.2 AICHE/CCPS, Guidelines for Implementing Process Safety Management

Systems, 1994
4.3 Appropriate European Standards

Revision: 0
Issued: 20-Nov-1999
Crisis Management
Doc. # MGS-003
All operating asset locations and commercial offices shall develop, implement and maintain
Crisis Management and Emergency Action Plans. Maintenance of the above plans shall include,
at a minimum, a desktop training exercise. Crisis Management Simulations should be conducted
every other year. Emergency Action Plan drills should be conducted annually.
2. Scope

Crisis Management and Emergency Action Plans with associated training exercises should
already exist for all operating assets and commercial offices. If not, then regional management
must direct the necessary resources to establish the plans as quickly as possible. These plans
should be reviewed and, if necessary, should be revised annually.
4. References
4.1 Enron Global Asset Operations Crisis Response Planning Manual
4.2 Enron Global Asset Operations Crisis Management Guidelines

Revision: 0
Issued: 20-Nov-1999
International Security
Doc. # MGS-004
All operating assets shall develop a comprehensive Security Program that addresses security for
both the personnel and the assets at each office and facility. The program shall be based on an
accurate threat analysis and on a clear understanding of legal commitments such as:
• The presence and “modus operandi” of terrorist and/or criminal attacks, whether they are
against people or property
• Political factors that could affect the facility such as actual hostility toward the facility and/or
pending relevant legislation
• A summary or extracts of the contractual agreements relevant to security responsibilities
• Information relevant to the project or asset that may influence attitudes toward the company,
facilities or office and personnel
• Potential for acts of god, earthquakes, hurricanes, etc.
The minimum security measures to be provided include:

• Facility perimeter barriers
• Access control (visitor log, ID tags, etc.)
• Security lighting
• Information security
2. Scope

Enron Corp business units shall provide the resources necessary for installation of minimum-
security measures. In addition, resources shall be provided for additional security measures
when identified through audits or when required by other security risk evaluations (refer to
Attachment 1). Corporate Security shall provide assistance in assessing security requirements
through review and/or audit of the security plan. Corporate security also has access to external
resources such as Protection of Assets by Merrit Publishing (see Attachment 1 for the Table of
Contents).
4. References
4.1 Enron Security Guidelines
4.2 Enron Global Asset Operations Crisis Management Guidelines

Revision: 0
Issued: 20-Nov-1999
International Security
Doc. # MGS-004
Attachment 1
Protection of Assets (Merritt Publishing)
Table of Contents
Vol. Topic Vol. Topic

I 1.0 Introduction III 21.0 Security and Civil Law
2.0 Vulnerability 22.0 Security & Labor Relations
3.0 Barriers 23.0 Organization & Management
4.0 Locking 24.0 Human Relations
5.0 Alarm Sensors 25.0 Ethics
6.0 Sensor Integration IV 26.0 Bombs and Bomb Threats
7.0 Communications 27.0 Alcohol & Drug Abuse Control
8.0 Identification 28.0 Dogs for Protection
9.0 Guard Operation 29.0 Security Aspects of OSHA
10.0 Disaster Control 30.0 Vandalism
II 11.0 Theft & Fraud 31.0 Detection of Deception
12.0 Data Processing 32.0 Personnel Screening with
Psychological Tests
13.0 Strikes & Labor Disturbances 33.0 Training
14.0 Parking & Traffic Control 34.0 Security Awareness
15.0 Proprietary Data 35.0 Accounting and Financial
Controls
16.0 Investigations 36.0 Aviation Facilities
17.0 Insurance 37.0 Consultants
III 18.0 Kidnapping, Extortion, & 38.0 Television in Security
Terrorism
19.0 Physical Security Planning 39.0 Security & the Disabled
20.0 Security and Criminal Law 40.0 Workplace Violence

Revision: 0
Issued: 20-Nov-1999
Quality Management System (ISO)
Doc. # MGS-005
All operating assets shall develop, implement, certify and maintain the appropriate ISO Quality
Management System (MS). The Quality MS shall address the following elements:
• Management Responsibility • Process Control

• Quality System • Inspection and Test Status
• Contract Review • Control of Nonconforming Products
• Design Control • Corrective and Preventive Action
• Document and Data Control • Inspection and Testing
• Purchasing • Control of Quality Audits
• Control of Customer Supplied Products • Training
• Product Identification and Traceability • Servicing
• Control of Inspection, Measuring and Test • Handling, Storage, Packaging,
Equipment Preservation and Delivery
• Statistical Techniques
2. Scope

Enron Corp business units shall provide the resources required for developing and implementing
an ISO Quality System for each operating asset.
4. References
4.1 Enron Global Asset Operation Quality Management Guidelines
4.2 International Organization for Standardization (ISO)

Revision: 0
Issued: 20-Nov-1999
Human Resources
Doc. # MGS-006
A human resource (HR) program shall be developed, implemented and maintained for each
country in which the Company has operating assets. The HR program shall, at a minimum,
address the following elements:
• Equal Employment Philosophy • Overtime Pay and Expense Reimbursement

• Fair Treatment • Severance Pay (Related Plan)
• Harassment Prevention • Approved Time Off and Leaves of Absence
• Employee Selection and Job Posting • Smoking
• Employment of Relatives or Household • Relocation
Members
• Performance Management • Workplace Violence Prevention
• Educational Assistance • Probation
• Corrective Discipline • Benefits
• Work Hours, Holidays and Vacations • Termination and Resignation
2. Scope

Enron Corp business units shall provide the resources needed to set-up and maintain a basic
human resource program. Resources that address additional elements will need to be justified
with regional management. The Human Resource Department is prepared to help the operating
asset in developing the HR program through review of new, existing or enhanced plans. HR
personnel are also willing to participate in local and/or corporate audits.
4. References
4.1 Enron Human Resources Guidelines
4.2 Enron Corp Code of Conduct
4.3 United States Foreign Corrupt Practices Act

Revision: 0
Issued: 20-Nov-1999
Administrative
Doc. # MGS-007
1. Management Standards
All operating assets shall develop, implement, and maintain country specific Administrative
Procedures where operating assets are located. The Administrative Procedures shall cover, at
minimum, the following areas:
• Facility Organization Structure and Contact List

• Accounting
• Purchasing
• Inventory Control
Administrative guidelines are available for each of the above areas.
2. Scope

Enron Corp business units shall provide the resources required for developing and implementing
a country specific administrative program where operating assets are located.
4. References
4.1 Enron Global Asset Operations Administrative Guidelines

Revision: 0
Issued: 20-Nov-1999
Third-Party Management
Doc. # MGS-008
All operating asset locations shall ensure that all contractors and other third parties engaged in
operations by the Company are held accountable for and have both the resources and information
needed to conduct their activities in accordance with Management Standards and associated
guidelines.
2. Scope

Local operations management will assess third party capability for meeting the Company’s
operating standards and will direct third parties to take actions needed to ensure that they
consistently comply with these standards.
4. References
4.1 Enron Global Asset Operations Management Standards
4.2 Enron Global Asset Operations Operating Guidelines
4.3 Enron Corp Code of Conduct
4.4 United States Foreign Corrupt Practices Act

Revision: 0
Issued: 20-Nov-1999
Maintenance
Doc. # MGS-009
All operating asset locations shall develop, implement and update maintenance systems and
programs consistent with the asset size, complexity, utilization and workforce capabilities. The
following components will be considered:
• Equipment Criticality Analysis and Ranking
• Work Order System
• Work Prioritization System
• Work Planning & Scheduling Processes
• Predictive Maintenance Program
• Preventive Maintenance Program
• Corrective Maintenance Procedures
• Maintenance History Capture and Review
• Computerized Maintenance Management System
• Spare Parts/Inventory Management System
2. Scope

Local management should periodically review maintenance systems and results to identify
necessary improvements. Audit of these systems will be performed by Global Asset Operations
on a two-year schedule. Enron Corp business units shall provide the resources for developing,
implementing and maintaining maintenance systems commensurate with specific asset
requirements.
4. References
4.1 Enron Global Asset Operations Maintenance Guidelines

Revision: 0
Issued: 20-Nov-1999
Operations
Doc. # MGS-010
All operating assets shall develop, implement and maintain systems and programs to ensure
operations consistent with Enron’s Operating Philosophy and Management Standards, legal and
regulatory requirements and local requirements. At a minimum, the following components must
be addressed:
• Reporting for Safety-Related Conditions
• Reporting for Environmental Conditions
• Reporting for Incidents and Emergencies
• Corrosion Control Systems
• Operating Procedures for Routine Operations
• Operating Procedures for Nonroutine Operations
• Management Reporting
• Incident Investigation (Lessons Learned)
• Record Keeping and Retention
• Procedure Review System
• Material Balance and Measurement Systems
• Operating Monitoring and Control Systems
2. Scope

Local management should periodically review operations systems and performance results to
identify necessary improvements. Audit of these systems shall be performed by Global Asset
Operations on a two-year schedule. Enron Corp business units shall provide the necessary
resources for developing, implementing and maintaining these systems commensurate with
specific asset requirements.
4. References

Revision: 0
Issued: 20-Nov-1999
“Positive Impact” Program
Doc. # MGS-011
Global Asset Operations has developed and implemented and supports a “Positive Impact”
(Continuous Improvement) Program for those assets operated by Enron. The “Positive Impact”
program encompasses knowledge-based management using validated knowledge and experience
from operations and maintenance activities. The program does not grade success or failure but
instead focuses on weaknesses to improve and strengths to sustain. Personnel from all operating
assets actively participate in and sustain the process. Asset Operations with the assistance from
Global Development and Learning, provides training and oversight of the program to ensure the
longevity.
The “Positive Impact” (Continuous Improvement) Program is an internal, “learning from

experience” program that collects, analyzes and disseminates information from experiences into
lessons learned. The process is a self-discovery initiative that in the end state results in shared
knowledge, organizational learning, organizational change, improved performance and profit
improvement. It is designed to allow the operating facility team to evaluate projects using a
“critical path approach” to determine the successfulness of the project and the potential for
improvements. The results will generate “best practices” that will be shared across all assets.
2. Scope

Enron Corp business units shall provide the resource required to build and maintain a “Positive
Impact” (Continuous Improvement) Program. The program will build on existing
programs/information systems, such as the Intranet and the auditing process, to actively
disseminate best practices and achieve continuous improvement.
4. References
4.1 Management Standards and Guideline Auditing (MGS-012)

Revision: 0
Issued: 20-Nov-1999
Management Standards and Guideline Auditing
Doc. # MGS-012
Global Asset Operations shall audit against the following management standards along with
related guidelines for each Company operated asset.
• Environmental, Health and Safety • Administrative

• Process Safety Management • Third-Party Management
• Crisis Management • Maintenance
• International Security • Operations
• Quality Management System • “Positive Impact” Program
• Human Resources
The audit program shall follow a two-year cycle and shall be quantitative as well as qualitative
so that the results can be considered in:
• Identification of improvements and corrective actions

• Assessment of operating risk and asset performance
• Performance management feedback process to operating management
• Identify and disseminate “best practices”
2. Scope

Global Asset Operations is responsible for developing, executing and maintaining the audit
program. Local management is responsible for providing necessary resources and information to
support the audits and for managing corrective actions to completion.
4. References
4.1 Enron Global Asset Operations Audit Protocol
4.3 Enron Global Asset Operations Philosophy

Revision: 0
Accounting Guidelines
Issued: Nov-1999
Facility Organization Structure and Contact List
Doc. # OSC-001
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for the development of written instructions to be
followed by all entities involved in the operation and maintenance of Company operating
facilities when submitting a formal organizational structure and contact list.
2. Scope
This guideline applies to all “Company” operated facilities, its employees and its contractors,
except where superseded by more stringent local standards.
3. Guideline
3.1 General
The organizational structure and contact list shall provide all applicable Company
representatives and field personnel with a channel for conducting business. The shared
information and resources from this guideline will allow facilities to maximize their
operational efficiency.
3.2 Considerations
The lines of communication and responsibilities needed for establishing the
organizational structure and contact list shall be established within a two-month period
following construction of the facility. The following shall be considered when
establishing this list:
• The list shall include details on all management personnel and their respective
functions and levels of authorization relating to initiation of facility transactions
• Due to an ever-changing environment, this information shall be updated every six
months.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Requisitions
Doc. # REQ-001
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements to be followed for the development of instructions
for requisitioning goods and services.
2. Scope
This guideline applies to all “Company” operated facilities, its employees and its contractors
3. Guideline
3.1 General
The user or a qualified individual shall make the determination of a facility's need for
goods or services in the facility where the specified product is to be ordered.
3.2 Considerations
The following requirements shall be maintained when submitting requisitions:
Warehouse Check
Before making a requisition, the user or qualified individual shall first check the
warehouse to ascertain if the required part or material is in stock.
• If the item in stock and is not set aside for another current job, a materials or parts
request shall be required to remove the inventoried item.
• If the warehouse check proves unsuccessful, a requisition order and work order shall
then be prepared.
Vendor Catalog
Plant personnel requesting goods or services shall have access to a vendor catalog,
product directory or technical manual to assist them in the selection of parts or services
that meet the work order specifications in order to eliminate uncertainties about the items
being requested from the facility buyer.
Authorization
The proper level of authorization required for the requisition form shall be obtained prior
to procurement of parts or services through authorized purchasing department personnel.
Work Order
The following requirements for the preparation of work order shall be followed:
• The facility that needs the requisitioned part or service shall prepare a work order (or
equivalent) that shall have a control job number (i.e., a pre-numbered job order slip or
an assigned control number from a maintenance log) and the proper approval
documented on it.
• The work order number (or equivalent) shall serve as a cross reference to the
requisition order that will be used as supporting documentation to generate the
purchase order (P.O.) by the facility buyer.
• Most importantly, the work order (or equivalent) shall include detailed specifications
regarding what is required. (i.e., measurements or parts, quantity, date required, etc.).
Submittal
The supervisor will review all requests to make sure they contain all the required
information, as follows:
• Requisitions submitted to the facility buyer shall be properly approved and shall
include the work order (or equivalent) as supporting documentation.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Requisitions
Doc. # REQ-001
3.2 Considerations (Continued)

• Requisitions shall also include the job control number documented on the requisition
form and all relevant information relating to the requisitioned item detailed (i.e., date
required, on-arrival notification, product specifications, etc.).
Fixed Assets Additions
Requisitions for fixed assets additions shall be initiated in accordance with the capital
budgeting process and all of the joint venture (JV) agreements. Procedures for
processing fixed assets additions shall be consistent with all requisitioning, purchasing
and payment procedures as well as with the applicable level of transaction authorizations.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Capital Budgets and Expenditures
Doc. # CBE-001
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for the development of written instructions for the
preparation and processing of capital budgets and individual capital projects.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
This guideline outlines terminology and responsibilities and reviews basic principles for
the development of procedures and instructions to ensure efficiency when preparing and
processing capital budgets.
3.2 Considerations
Definitions:
The following definitions are used to explain the capital budget process and to outline
organizational responsibilities:
Commercial Company: A legal entity primarily engaged in production.
Service Company: An entity primarily engaged in providing construction, pipeline
operations, gas control, gas supply or other services to a commercial company.
Spending Unit: The entity having direct responsibility for the spending of monies on
approved capital projects.
Sponsor: The organization (either service company or commercial company) that
identifies the need for or the benefit from making a capital expenditure. The sponsor
initiates the project.
3.3 Expectations/Requirements
The following requirements shall be maintained when submitting requests for capital
expenditures:
Capital Budgeting Process
The commercial companies are responsible for determining the necessity of capital
expenditures since they will ultimately have ownership of the capital assets. Therefore,
capital budgets will be prepared, approved and maintained for each individual
commercial company. Preparation of the capital budget begins with corporate targets
regarding capital expenditure levels being communicated to the commercial companies.
Following are procedures to be followed in the capital budgeting process:
• The commercial and service companies shall jointly identify specific capital funding
requirements and develop proposed capital budgets.
• The proposed budgets shall be approved according to the Company’s established
levels of authority. The Company shall have a time frame in place for accomplishing
this process.
• Proposed budgets shall be categorized by major types of expenditures (i.e., payroll,
chemicals, equipment maintenance, maintenance reserve, etc.). Management will
provide the categories each year during the budgeting process.
• Proposed budgets must also provide a breakdown by the sponsoring unit.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Capital Budgets and Expenditures
Doc. # CBE-001
3.3 Expectations/Requirements (Continued)

Capital Project Approvals
Specific individual capital projects are not typically approved as part of the capital
budgeting process. Formal approval comes later through the work order approval
process. The approval process for individual projects starts with the project sponsor, who
is responsible for presenting the project to the commercial company and for developing
the initial economic justification. The commercial company is responsible for evaluating
and approving the proposal.
Management of the commercial company maintains the responsibility for evaluating and
obtaining approvals for the proposed project. This responsibility includes but is not
limited to the following:
• Reviewing the economic, priority level or other justification of all projects proposed
for the commercial company
• Ensuring that necessary approvals have been obtained prior to authorization of the
work order
• Ensuring that necessary communications occur between the commercial company and
Corporate Financial Planning
• Monitoring the capital expenditures of joint ventures in which the Company is not the
operator
• Notifying the appropriate parties of significant cost overruns
Once the project is approved, the spending unit is responsible for completing the assigned
project on time and within budget. The spending unit is also responsible for providing
current estimates and other information needed by the commercial company’s
management to project net cash flow and financing requirements.
No actual expenditures or commitments of capital funds shall be made without first
obtaining the appropriate level of approval by using the Work Order (WO) form or the
Authorization for Expenditure (AFE) form. (Refer to WKO-001.) In those rare cases
where expenditures are necessary before the corresponding form is processed, evidence
that the appropriate level of approval has been obtained must be documented and
available. Prompt follow-up processing of the WO/AFE is required.
The appropriate Company authority shall ensure compliance with this guideline.
Management shall be kept informed on the status of capital projects, changes in estimates
and other information necessary to administer the capital budgets. Quarterly budget
reviews shall be conducted.
Lease Project Approvals
The provisions of this guideline also apply to all leases. Lease economics, lease/buy
analyses and other needed analyses must be approved by the appropriate Company
authority. The designated authority has the same responsibilities for leases as for capital
projects.
4. References
4.1 WKO-001, Work Orders/Authority for Expenditure

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Work Orders/Authority for Expenditures
Doc. # WKO-001
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for development of written instructions for work
orders and the steps necessary to complete and obtain approval of work order requests.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
the development of procedures and instructions to ensure efficiency when preparing and
processing work orders (WO) and authorizations for expenditures (AFE).
3.2 Considerations
Work Orders
Work orders are divided into routine maintenance work orders (WOs) and preventive
maintenance work orders (PMs) and are described as follows:
• Work Orders are initiated by plant staff at the time a specific routine maintenance
task is recognized. The nature of a work order task is corrective rather than
preventive.
• Preventive Maintenance Work Orders are initiated for repetitive tasks, which are
preventive in nature, that must be performed on a periodic basis to maintain the
integrity of the equipment
Work orders fall within the scope of each plant’s annual Operating and Maintenance
(O&M) budget and do not require any approvals higher than the Plant Manager. PM and
WO costs are tracked by the plant’s maintenance system, not by the accounting system.
Authority for Expenditure
An Authority for Expenditure (AFE) may be used at the Plant Manager’s discretion any
time a work order is required. An AFE must be prepared for the following:
• Capital items not approved in the annual budget
• Extraordinary items not approved in the annual O&M budget
• Any plant project initiated by Operations at the corporate level
• Tasks requiring the use of the accounting system to track the cost
The AFE form shall include the following data:
• Project name
• Project description
• Project dates
• Project benefit/reason
• Project contact person
If beginning and end dates are not known, an estimation of a quarter within a year shall
be adequate. If the requestor is uncertain about the AFE type or whether the project is
budgeted, Accounting shall be contacted for assistance prior to obtaining approvals.
The project contact person shall be held accountable for all aspects of the project from a
thorough analysis of the economic justification to completion of the project and analysis
of the variances between the projected and actual costs.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Work Orders/Authority for Expenditures
Doc. # WKO-001
Authority for Expenditure Approval Process
The following steps shall be followed for approval of AFEs:
• The completed AFE form shall be submitted to Accounting for review.
• Accounting shall route the request to the various departments for review and approval
before any funds are appropriated.
• Upon physical completion of the project, the contact person shall notify Accounting
of the completion date via an AFE Completion Report (or equivalent).
• When cost data is available, Accounting shall insert the “Total Costs” amounts and
return the form to the contact person.
• The contact person shall prepare the comment section of the AFE Completion Report
(or equivalent) and explain any variances.
• The original form is returned to Accounting, where the AFE file shall be maintained.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Invoice Processing
Doc. # INP-001
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for the development of written instructions for
processing invoices.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
This guideline outlines the responsibilities and reviews basic principles for the
development of written procedures to ensure prompt processing and payment of invoices.
3.2 Considerations
The payment process for invoices shall be handled in an expeditious manner in order to
facilitate prompt payment to vendors and to take advantage of discounts. Thorough
documentation shall accompany each invoice. Management shall authorize payment of
all invoices.
Processing of Invoices
Vendors shall be instructed to mail invoices directly to the Accounts Payable Department
(or the designated individual in smaller environments). However, if the Company prefers,
the invoices may first be sent to the Purchasing Department for verification. Payment for
goods will only be made on original invoices.
Upon receiving an invoice, the Accounts Payable (A/P) Clerk shall review the vendor
history file to ascertain whether payment has already been made. If not, the clerk shall
commence preparation of the voucher package, which shall include the following:
• Vendor invoice
• Purchase order
• Packing slip
• Requisition
• Receiving report
• Authorization of acceptance of goods or services
The Plant Controller or designee shall review all information in the completed voucher
package; i.e., calculations of the invoice, extensions, quantities, etc. as well as the general
ledger account distribution documented on the voucher sheet. Purchase orders shall
contain the related work order number (or equivalent). The work order number shall be
listed on the A/P voucher sheet so that purchases can be charged to the appropriate
job/expense. The completed voucher packages shall be input into the A/P computer
system. The A/P system will assign a voucher number to the package.
At the end of each accounting period, reconciliations from the A/P subsidiary ledgers to
the A/P ledger account shall be made. All differences shall be investigated and reviewed
by the Controller’s designee.
A distribution report containing all invoices due for the week shall be reviewed in order
to schedule payments by due date, allow for better utilization of funds and assist in
weekly cash flow projections. In addition, the review shall assist in scheduling timely
check runs and minimize the time and costs associated with the disbursements cycle.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Invoice Processing
Doc. # INP-001

The selected invoices for payment shall be forwarded to the authorized signer for final
approval and payment.
The Plant Controller shall immediately handle the resolution of any financial disputes
with vendors.
Processing of Freight Bills for Goods and Services

Bills of lading shall be routed to the Purchasing Department employee responsible for
arranging the shipping terms. When the invoice for freight is received, it shall be
matched with the bill of lading and a copy of the related purchase order (P.O.).
The P.O. shall contain the following information concerning shipping terms:
• Party responsible for paying the freight
• Type of transportation
• Carrier, if known
• Cost
Freight costs relating to materials and services shall become part of the cost of production
and shall be assigned to the appropriate expense or inventory account.
Processing of Emergencies (Payment by Wire)
Invoice processing requirements shall be waived under a bona fide emergency situation.
Emergencies requiring payment by wire are defined as those where:
• The immediate payment of any good or service is needed to repair or replace
materials that have failed or are about to fail.
• Life, property or service to customers is endangered.
• Significant loss of revenue will result.
• All attempts to make payment arrangements in the local country have failed.
Requests for wire transfers shall be directed to the designated Company representative
along with an explanation of the nature of the emergency, materials required, estimated
cost and the possible vendor, if known. The supporting invoice and P.O. shall be faxed to
the representative.
Within 24 hours of receiving the emergency funds, the requester of the funds shall obtain
the original invoice and submit it to the Plant Controller. The Accounting Department
shall then prepare the journal voucher using the bank advance for funds received to
record the receipt of funds and the original invoice to record the wire transfer.
Management shall ensure that the supporting documentation for the payment of goods
received is forwarded to the Plant Controller. The Plant Controller shall follow up to
ensure compliance with the applicable invoice procedures.
In extreme situations, differences noted between the invoice and the Vendor’s P.O. that
are not greater than 5% or a Company approved limit may be made in order to secure the
receipt of goods from the Vendor. Management approval shall be clearly indicated on the
faxed support prior to such an arrangement. The Plant Buyer shall resolve discrepancies
with vendors within the subsequent 24-hour period after such an emergency.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Petty Cash Disbursement
Doc. # PCD-001
1. Purpose
controlling and recording petty cash disbursements.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
A petty cash fund shall be established and used to pay for small, incidental expenses no
greater than an established value. Items greater than this established value shall be paid
from the field disbursement account. This guideline outlines basic principles for the
development of written procedures to pay these incidental expenses.
3.2 Considerations
A request to establish or change the maximum limit of a petty cash fund must be signed
by the Company’s appropriate approval source and coordinated with the site office.
The Company’s established petty cash custodian at the field location shall administer the
fund. Each expenditure from the fund must be supported by a receipt or an approved
petty cash request form.
Expenses Not Covered
The petty cash fund shall not be used to pay for the following expenses:
• Employee or consultant travel expenses and expense reimbursements
• Invoices for controllable warehouse inventory or general or fixed assets
• Licenses, permits and certificates
• Seminars or conferences
• Subscriptions, donations and memberships
• Invoices that require 1099 tax reporting or the local country’s tax reporting
Initial Funding
Initial funding of the petty cash fund shall be as follows:
• The requesting location shall submit a written request to establish a petty cash fund.
• After appropriate approval, the request shall be forwarded to Accounts Payable.
• The Accounts Payable Clerk shall process the request for payment for the amount of
the fund.
• The petty cash custodian shall be the payee.
• The custodian shall then cash the check at a local bank and keep the funds in a locked
cash box.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Petty Cash Disbursement
Doc. # PCD-001
Disbursements
Disbursements from the petty cash fund shall be as follows:
• The requestor shall submit an original receipt or an approved petty cash request form
to the petty cash custodian for reimbursement The original receipt shall contain the
vendor’s name, the date, the dollar amount and the signature of the requestor.
• The custodian shall code the expenditure to the proper account number and retain the
receipt for reporting purposes.
Replenishment of Fund
To replenish the petty cash fund, a cash reimbursement form must be completed. The
form shall contain the following information:
• Name of the petty cash custodian
• Location of the funds
• Cash on hand
• Amount of reimbursable expenditures (total of all petty cash requests and receipts)
• Amount of reimbursements requested but not yet received
• Amount of fund (must equal the cash on hand plus the amount of reimbursable
expenditures plus the amount of reimbursements requested but not yet received)
The custodian shall prepare a copy of the cash reimbursement form and the supporting
documentation for retention at the field location. The original form shall be forwarded to
the Company approver for review and signature.
The approved cash reimbursement form shall be sent to Accounts Payable for processing.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Business Expense and Travel Reimbursement
Doc. # BER-001
1. Purpose
reimbursement of business and travel expenses.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
This guideline reviews basic principles for the development of written procedures to
ensure the efficient reimbursement of appropriate business and travel expenses.
3.2 Considerations
The Company shall reimburse employees for bona fide business and travel expenses
actually incurred on behalf of the Company, provided the employee makes an adequate
accounting for such expenses. The expenses shall be reasonable and provide a direct or
indirect benefit to the Company.
Reporting
Employees shall be required to report reimbursable expenses on the Employee Expense
Report by the date determined by the Company for a designated period. Reimbursement
may be requested before that date if additional expenses for the period are not expected.
If desired, the Company may set a total for expenses required before submittal for
reimbursement is made.
Reporting shall be in sufficient detail and contain adequate support to satisfy the
requirements of the Internal Revenue Service (or country’s tax authority) and sound
accounting principles.
For balances due the Company, a personal check or money order made payable to the
Company shall be attached.
Supporting Documentation
Supporting documentation shall accompany the Employee Expense Report, which shall
include the following:
• Original receipts must be attached to the expense report for all single expenditures
equal to or higher than the Company determined level for lodging, travel fare, car
rentals, taxi fare, etc.
• If specified by the Company, entertainment expenditures shall require original
receipts.
• Original receipts are the receipts actually obtained as a result of the expenditure, not a
photocopy. A written, approved explanation must accompany the expense form if a
required original receipt is lost.
• For expenditures that require prior approval or a higher level of approval, the
supporting approval documents must be attached to the expense report.

Revision: 0
Purchasing Guidelines
Issued: Nov-1999
Ethics
Doc. # PUR-001
1. Purpose
conducting business in a legal, highly ethical and professional manner.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
This guideline outlines responsibilities and reviews basic principles for the development
of procedures to ensure that Company business is conducted legally, ethically and
professionally.
The following principles shall be followed when conducting Company business:
Business Conduct
• Business relationships shall be conducted so as to create equal opportunity between
the Company and approved suppliers.
• Quotations shall be requested only from suppliers who can be given complete and
equitable consideration for participation in the proposed purchase.
• Technical assistance from suppliers shall only be requested or accepted when it can
be appropriately compensated commensurate with the past or the currently proposed
value of purchases.
• Identical or totally equivalent specifications shall be issued to all suppliers involved
in any request for competitive quotations. An equal degree of compliance with the
specifications shall be required from all suppliers responding to a request.
• The confidentiality of all suppliers’ prices or other proprietary information shall be
protected. The Company shall exercise sufficient care in handling, mailing and
storing quotations so that the possibility of nonessential personnel having access to
quotations is avoided.
Personal Conduct
• No personal monetary gain to the buyer or seller shall result from a transaction
between the Company and any supplier. Personnel shall not accept goods, gratuities
or services from any supplier other than an obvious promotional item of low dollar
value bearing the identity or logo of the giver.
• Personnel shall conscientiously limit accepting or extending business entertainment
invitations only to occasions required to establish or maintain beneficial
communication with suppliers. Partiality must be avoided and reciprocation must be
prudently evident. A clear expression of specific business intent shall be included in
the appropriate expense report.
• Personnel shall not accept travel or lodging at a supplier’s expense. Reservations for
the purpose of coordination of business meetings may be made by a supplier but
Company personnel shall pay for the services received. When Company personnel
are accompanying the supplier to the supplier’s place of business, an exception shall
be made for the shared use of a supplier’s car or plane.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Ethics
Doc. # PUR-001

Conflict of Interest
Employees engaged in the purchasing function shall be free of interests or relationships
that are actually or potentially detrimental to the best interests of the Company.
Employees shall not engage or participate in any commercial transaction involving the
Company, its affiliates, divisions or subsidiaries in which they have a significant
undisclosed financial interest.
Employees engaged in the purchasing function shall immediately inform their supervisor
of any financial or other outside business relationship or potential relationship that might
involve a conflict of interest. This information shall be reviewed at an appropriate level
to determine if a conflict of interest is present and if so, the course of action to be taken.
A conflict of interest exists where an employee has an outside interest that materially
encroaches on time or attention that should be devoted to the affairs of the Company.
Conflicts of interest also include having a direct or an indirect interest in or a relationship
with an outsider that:
• Is inherently unethical or that might be implied or construed to be unethical
• Results in possible gain due to the employee’s ability to influence dealings
• Renders the employee partial toward the outsider for personal reasons
• Otherwise inhibits the impartiality of the organization in an equivocal, embarrassing
or ethically questionable position or reflects on the integrity of the organization

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Blanket Purchase Order
Doc. # PUR-002
1. Purpose
blanket purchase orders.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
The use of blanket purchase orders shall be at the discretion of the Company. This
guideline outlines responsibilities and reviews basic principles for the development of
procedures to ensure efficiency when using blanket purchase orders.
Blanket purchase orders are used when any of the following conditions exist:
• Repetitive purchases of specific materials or categories are made from the same
vendor.
• There are standard materials or maintenance supplies that require frequent shipments.
• The Company can obtain firm and more favorable pricing through blanket
arrangements and volume commitments.
The total cost of a release shall not exceed the monetary limit for an individual release
stated in the blanket purchase order. For exceptions, contact the appropriate Purchasing
Agent.
3.2 Considerations
Responsibilities
The Purchasing Agent shall determine if the needed material is covered by a blanket
purchase order agreement. (Refer to the Blanket Purchase Directory.) The Purchasing
Agent shall prepare a blanket purchase order release form with a minimum of two copies,
one to be used as the receiving copy and the other in invoice processing. The completed
release form shall detail the following information.
• Company name • Blanket release number
• Date of release • Item number
• “Ship to” name and address • Required delivery date
• Responsible vendor representative and • Vendor name, address, and phone
telephone number number
• Quantity • Unit of measure
• Unit price • Amount (quantity times unit price)
• Description of material ordered • Accounting code
• Name and telephone number of • Page number and total number of
individual making the release pages of release
• Location • Total value of release
• Appropriate approval
After completing the blanket purchase order, the Purchasing Agents shall contact the
Vendor to place the release order for the needed material and shall relay the above
information and the applicable invoice mailing instructions. The agent shall file a copy
of the release and send a copy of the release order to the person who will receive the
material.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Blanket Purchase Order
Doc. # PUR-002

The Warehouse Clerk shall complete the shipment with no damage and shall record the
following on the receiving copy of the blanket release order:
• Date received
• Delivering carrier
• Freight bill number
• Applicable freight charges
• Signature on the completed form
If a partial shipment is sent, complete a photocopy of the blanket release order form
including the above information as well as the quantities actually received. Sign the
completed form.
If the wrong material or quantity is sent, contact the vendor as soon as possible for
replacement and/or return of the material. The Purchasing Agent shall be contacted if
problems occur.
If the material sent is damaged, note the damage on the carrier’s copy of the delivery
ticket. Make sure that the description of the damage is legible on all copies of the
documents that indicate material was received.
The Senior Clerk shall match the invoice with the receiving copy of the release form and
packing list, obtain approval for the invoice and forward the invoice along with the
receiving copy of the blanket release order form for payment.
3.3 Requirements/Expectations
Establishment of a Blanket Purchase Order
In order to establish a blanket purchase order, complete a purchase requisition with the
following information:
• Desired material or categories of materials
• Preferred time period to be covered
• Estimated annual usage in terms of quantity, monetary amount and/or number of
releases anticipated
• Maximum quantities per release or desired monetary limit per lease
• Suggested vendor(s)
Obtain approval and forward the requisition to the Purchasing Agent. Requests for the
establishment of a blanket purchase order or a change to an existing blanket purchase
order shall reach the Purchasing Agent at least 60 days prior to the requested
implementation date. Purchasing will coordinate the details of the agreements between
the vendors and the users.
Bidding Requirements
Generally, it is not necessary to obtain bids when materials are released on blanket
purchase orders. Purchasing shall have established acceptable prices when the blanket
purchase order was awarded to the vendor. However, there are certain commodities, such
as chemicals and tires, which are subject to frequent price fluctuations. Inquiries shall be
made at the time of release to determine the best value for the Company.
4. References
4.1 Blanket Purchase Directory

Revision: 0
Issued: 20-Nov-1999
Standard Purchase Order
Doc. # PUR-003
1. Purpose
standard purchase orders.
2. Scope
This guideline applies to all “Company” facilities, its employees and its contractors, except
where superseded by more stringent local standards.
3. Guideline
3.1 General
A standard purchase requisition form must be used when a blanket purchase order is not
in effect for required material.
3.2 Considerations
Establishment of a Standard Purchase Order (P.O.)

The requestor initiates the request for purchase as follows:
• Identifies the required material or service
• Completes the Purchase Request (P.R.) form for a material request or the Material
Request/Issue Record (MRIR) form for a service or labor request
• Obtains approval from the authorized approving officer
• Forwards the P.R./MRIR forms to Purchasing for action
Request Processing
The purchaser processes the purchasing request as follows:
• Receives the P.R./MRIR for requests of material or services from plant, warehouse or
administrative personnel.
• Analyzes item/service requirements. If specifications are inadequate, coordinates with
the requestor for complete/adequate specifications.
• Identifies if materials are repeat orders (from blanket P.O.) or new item requests.
• Confirms pricing and prepares a Purchase Order for placement of the order. If items
requested are not covered under a blanket P.O., invite at least three vendors to quote.
• Provides and sets up deadlines on quotation submission. Follows up to obtain
quotations.
• Based on the quotations received, generates a cost analysis summary (or equivalent)
to determine/evaluate pricing and specification conformity including delivery date.
• For critical items, furnishes the requesting department with a Material Technical
Specification list (or equivalent) showing technical descriptions and price of a sample
item by each supplier without quoting the supplier’s name.
• Provides a recommendation for the chosen bidder properly supported with
justification for awarding. Prepares analysis summary (or equivalent) indicating price
and total amount, terms of delivery, terms of payment, etc.

Revision: 0
Issued: 20-Nov-1999
Doc. # PUR-003
• Obtains approval of the appropriate Management regarding awarding to the chosen

bidder.
• If required by the Company, forwards a complete package of information, including
P.O., cost analysis, quotation, etc., to the corresponding plant manager for review and
final approval.
• Provides a copy of the approved P.O. to the winning Vendor. Forwards the “originals”
to the Accounting Department for check preparation and payment.
• (The Company may elect to send the original P.O. to the winning Vendor and forward
copies to Accounting.) Maintains a file of the P.O. including other supporting
documents for future reference.
Warehouse Staff Receiving Responsibilities
• For complete Shipment with No Damage, the following applys:

a. Complete the receiving portion of the Purchase Order/Receiving Report (PORR)
form.
b. Forward PORR copy to Purchasing and Accounting.
• For partial shipment in Satisfactory Condition, the following applys:
a. Complete the receiving portion of the PORR form.
b. Prepare a discrepancy report stating which items were shipped. (If the Company
does not use discrepancy reports, note the shipment was incomplete on the
receiving portion of the PORR and forward it to Purchasing and Accounting.)
c. Forward the PORR copy to Purchasing and Accounting.
d. When the remaining shipment is received, prepare another PORR. Complete the
receiving portion and indicate the PORR number of the first portion in the
completing RR column.
e. Forward a copy of the new PORR to Purchasing and Accounting.
• For the wrong Material or Quantity, the following applys:
a. Prepare Discrepancy Report or note errors on the receiving portion of the PORR
form.
b. Contact the Vendor as soon as possible for the replacement and /or return of the
material.
• For Damaged Material, the following applys:
a. Note the damage on the Carrier’s copy of the delivery ticket or packing list.
b. Make sure the description of the damage is legible on all copies of the documents
that indicate material was received.
Material Buyer Receiving Responsibilities

• Contacts the Vendor regarding incorrect material or quantity.
• Orders the correct material from the Vendor when notified that the wrong material has
been received.
• Orders the correct quantity from the Vendor for undershipments.
• If required, obtains authorization from the Vendor to return incorrect material or
overshipments.
• Initiates and forwards the appropriate documentation to the receiving party
authorizing return of the incorrect material or overship to the Vendor.

Revision: 0
Issued: 20-Nov-1999
Doc. # PUR-003
• Completes the documentation and returns the incorrect material or overship to the
Vendor.
• Obtains and files proof of return.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Emergency Purchase Order
Doc. # PUR-004
1. Purpose
emergency purchase orders.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
This guideline basic principles for the development of procedures to be followed in order
to expedite the emergency acquisition of significant amounts of material or services
costing more than the limits for petty cash.
3.2 Considerations
An emergency purchase order is to be used in the case of legitimate emergencies and not
as a solution to problems created by poor management.
Establishment of an Emergency Purchase Order

As soon as an emergency has been defined, the an emergency purchase order shall be
established as follows:
• Prepare a purchase request (P.R.). Enter the necessary information in the body of the
P.R. and include a statement of purpose and appropriate comments.
• Hand carry the P.R. to the most appropriate available supervisor for emergency
approval.
• Hand carry the P.R. to Purchasing for preparation of a Purchase Order (P.O.).
• Purchasing shall complete the P.O. on a priority basis and contact an approved
Vendor. The delivery of the P.O. shall be expedited to the Vendor.
• Purchasing shall expedite action by the Vendor to ensure that the Vendor understands
the urgency of the situation and gives the P.O. priority attention.
• After the emergency situation has been corrected, the P.R. and the P.O. shall be
rerouted through the normal channels to ensure that all normally required steps have
been completed.
• Purchasing shall file copies of the completed P.R. and PORR (when used) to provide
a complete record of the transaction.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Material Expediting
Doc. # PUR-005
1. Purpose
expediting of material.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
the development of procedures to ensure efficient expediting of material. Purchasing
personnel are responsible for ensuring that delivery deadlines are met; however, in
instances where the obligations are not fulfilled, the material shall be expedited.
3.2 Considerations
Definitions
Purchasing Personnel (Buyer): Those employees designated to purchase material for the
Company.
Delivery Deadlines: Date of delivery agreed upon by the vendor and Purchasing
personnel.
Material: Any part, supply or service requisitioned by plant personnel to complete
corrective, preventive maintenance or shutdown work orders.
Conditions
The following conditions shall apply when expediting material:
• If a Vendor does not meet a delivery deadline, it is the responsibility of the Buyer to
expedite the shipment.
• When material is required immediately and the Vendor is unable to deliver then in
accordance with the Standard Purchasing Terms and Conditions, the Buyer shall seek
another source for the material.
• If the quoted price on the Purchase Order does not equal the price actually billed by a
Vendor, the Buyer is responsible for contacting the Vendor and correcting any
discrepancies.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Bidding
Doc. # PUR-006
1. Purpose
solicitation of competitive quotations.
2. Scope
This guideline applies to all “Company” operated facilities, its employees and its contractors,
3. Guideline
3.1 General
This guideline reviews basic principles for the development of procedures to ensure
efficiency when soliciting competitive quotations.
3.2 Considerations
This guideline applies to transactions on materials and/or services with a Company
established unit price limit or a total purchase price limit that are not covered by a
contractual agreement or a blanket purchase order.
Bidding Levels
The following bidding levels shall be established:
• If the Company deems it necessary, all purchases shall require three written bids.
• If the Company opts to set purchase limits, then purchases of the upper limit and
greater shall require three written bids.
• Purchases between the upper and lower limits shall require three documented phone
inquiries.
• Purchases of less than the lower limit shall require that the Buyer exercise good
business judgement when procuring materials.
Approved exceptions include:
• Items covered by a blanket purchase order or service contract
• Items with a single supplier
• Purchases of less than the upper limit, if the price is known to be competitive from
another purchase of a like item within the last 120 days
Types of Quotations
Verbal Quotations, if allowed by the Company, shall be obtained for the purchase of
standard or non-complex material with an estimated price between the Company
established lower and upper limits. Confirmation shall be made by fax. Prices shall be
recorded on the material requisition, which serves as backup documentation after the
order is placed. The requisition shall be attached to the purchase order.
Written Requests for Quotations (RFQ Bids) shall be sent to vendors under the
following conditions:
• Required by the Company for all purchases
• Purchase of capital equipment
• Non-standard conditions, requirements or instructions
• Any occasion where more permanent documentation is advisable
• Transactions on material and/or services with an estimated unit price over the upper
limit and/or covered by a contractual agreement

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Bidding
Doc. # PUR-006

Bid Requirements
Bid requests shall be typed using a standard format whenever possible and shall comply
with the following requirements:
• Complete information shall be provided including but not limited to quantity,
description, delivery requirements, special conditions, specifications, date
information required, etc.
• If replies are to conform to a certain format, it shall be clearly stated.
• The Buyer must attempt to remove all known variables.
• Bids shall only be solicited from vendors that are qualified or can be qualified to meet
all requirements. A minimum of three suppliers is acceptable, providing the Buyer is
familiar with the market and prices of the material in question. In the case of
proprietary items, it is often not possible to obtain more than one price. This shall be
noted on the requisition.
• Answers to technical questions arising during the bidding process shall be provided
by the requisitioner. The Buyer shall coordinate the reply and ensure that all potential
suppliers are provided the same information.
• When obtaining bids, the Buyer shall keep in mind other segments of the Company
that may be able to provide the desired material or services.
• After all bids have been received and examined for completeness, a summary sheet
shall be prepared noting all the pertinent data and discrepancies.
• Determination of the lowest bidder and award of the order shall be made by the Buyer
only after all aspects, including the preference of the requisitioner, have been
considered.
• The information gathered shall be kept with the purchase order as backup
documentation.
• In the case of bids for evaluating technical aspects, the Buyer shall submit to the
requisitioner a summary of material technical specifications from the suppliers. The
requisitioner in turn shall select his choice from the given specification.
• The Buyer shall not reveal the prices quoted or paid to a vendor at any time.
• The Buyer shall ensure that all vendors contacted have responded to a bid request. If
the Company desires, the Buyer will identify all vendor responses on the requisition.
• If required by the Company, the unsuccessful vendors shall be notified that the bid
has been closed and awarded. The name of the successful bidder shall not be noted.
• Unless a specific exception has been obtained from the Company, bids shall not be
solicited from, nor an order placed with, any Vendor that:
a. Is owned, controlled or actively influenced by any Company employee or
immediate relative of said employee
b. Employs in a management, consulting or sales capacity any Company employee
c. Employs a Company employee in any capacity in a position to influence the
selection of or conduct business with, such vendor.
• When circumstances warrant the solicitation of competitive bids inappropriate, the
Buyer shall document the facts on the reverse side on the purchase requisition and
obtain the specific approval required.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Bidding
Doc. # PUR-006

Awarding of Business
Business shall be awarded on the basis of the greatest long-term value to the Company.
Generally, this means the low bidder who meets the product specifications and delivery
requirements. In cases where significant circumstances warrant, exceptions to low bid
must be justified by the requisitioner in writing and approved by the appropriate
management.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Purchase Request
Doc. # PUR-007
1. Purpose
preparation and handling of the Purchase Request (P.R.) form.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
The Purchase Request form (or equivalent) is used for transactions involving a request
for materials, parts, supplies and other equipment to be purchased. The request may
come from either the end user or the warehouse if restocking is required. An approved
P.R. is only an authority to initiate canvassing and preparation of a Purchase Order (P.O.)
Establishment of a Purchase Request
The requester shall identify that the required material is not available in the warehouse
and shall complete the P.R. form in accordance with the Form Accomplishment
Procedure. The requester shall obtain approval from the authorized approval personnel as
follows:
• The signature of the Department Manager for which the material is intended for
repeat orders or for restocking.
• Joint signatures of the Department Manager for which the material is intended and the
Deputy or Plant Manager for other purchase requests.
The requester shall submit the approved P.R. to Purchasing for action. With an approved
P.R as the starting point for canvassing of suppliers, the purchaser will normally select
suppliers from the Approved Vendor List and notify them to submit a Request for
Quotation (RFQ).
The P.R. shall be attached to the P.O., RFQ and other pertinent documents as justification
for the said purchases.
3.3 Records
The P.R. Form series are maintained and issued by the Material Management Group
(MMS). All issuances are logged on the P.R. issuance logbook for record purposes.
The user department shall be responsible and accountable in the control and issuance of
the form. All cancelled or void forms shall be recorded and submitted to the MMS Group
for clearance of form accountability.
The Form Accomplishment Procedure is printed as the back page of each form. It is a set
of definitions and steps explaining how to complete the form.
4. References
4.1 Purchase Request (P.R.) Form
4.2 Form Accomplishment Procedure

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Request for Quotation
Doc. # PUR-008
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for the development of written instructions on the
proper preparation of a Request for Quotation (RFQ).
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
The RFQ shall adequately describe the required goods or services to the prospective
vendors so that they can respond with proposals in a prescribed format that facilitates a
fair and expeditious bid evaluation and selection. A completed Purchase Request (P.R.)
form serves as the authority for a Buyer to prepare the RFQ.
3.2 Considerations
Buyer Responsibilities
Proper procedures shall be followed when initiating an RFQ. The Buyer’ responsibilities
shall be as follows:
• The Buyer shall select the next RFQ number and enter it on the RFQ document. The
RFQ shall state the time and date the proposal is due, the address and place where the
proposal must be submitted and the name of the person to receive it.
• Describe as precisely as possible the following information:
a. Type
b. Quantity
c. Size
d. Color
e. Material specifications
f. Date required
g. Location
h. Materials involved
i. Access to work areas
j. Utilities available
• Include any drawings required by the vendors as an attachment to the RFQ. Indicate
the requirement for a brochure or catalog if one is needed for comparison.
• List any special terms or conditions in the Special Terms and Conditions section.
Note by number any of the General Terms and Conditions that are not applicable.
• List any reporting requirements.
• Review with the requester and head of Purchasing and obtain approval signatures.
• Distribute to the prospective bidders. (Except in unusual circumstances, the RFQ
shall always be submitted to a minimum of three vendors who are listed on the
Approved Vendor List.)
3.3 Records
Copies of the RFQ shall be maintained and used as a reference while reviewing the
proposals. After award to the selected bidder, copies of the RFQ shall be filed with the
proposals.
4. References
4.1 PUR-009 “Instructions to Bidders”

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Instructions to Bidders
Doc. # PUR-009
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for written instructions to aid bidders on the proper
preparation of proposals in response to a Request for Quotation (RFQ).
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Bidders preparing proposals in response to an RFQ must prepare their proposals in
accordance with the instructions listed below. Deviations may render a proposal
unacceptable.
Format
The format of the proposals submitted by the bidders must be in sequence with the
required information described in the RFQ. This ensures the bidder of a more objective
evaluation.
Scope
The bidders shall consider the scope carefully. If there are questions, the bidders shall
ask them.
If the bidder wishes to deviate from the RFQ, the proposed deviations shall be listed. If
the bidder wishes to offer an alternate proposal, a response to the scope as defined in the
RFQ shall be made first and then an alternate proposal, identified as such, along with
justification can be offered. It is feasible that the alternate proposal will be more
attractive than the original.
Pricing
The bidder shall provide pricing for all items with subtotals as appropriate and a total
all-inclusive price. The bidder shall provide a similar pricing breakdown for any
alternate proposal.
Exceptions
The bidder shall list any exceptions taken to the RFQ. Exceptions to key items may
make a proposal unacceptable.
Subcontractors
The bidder shall list any subcontractors that may be employed and define the items for
which they will be used.
Equipment
The bidder shall list all major equipment to be used and indicate whether it is owned or
leased.
Proposal Letter
The bidder shall submit their proposal as an attachment to a proposal letter signed by a
responsible officer of the company.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Cost/Bid Summary Analysis
Doc. # PUR-010
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes Conduct of Sales instructions to be followed by Purchasing in
reviewing and evaluating proposals submitted by sellers and contractors in response to Requests
of Quotation (RFQs).
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Proposals submitted in response to RFQs must be fairly and objectively reviewed and
evaluated in order to select the winning bid. The Cost Analysis/Bid Summary (or
equivalent) shall be prepared to aid in the selection process. The Purchaser usually bases
his recommendation on the outcome of this report.
3.2 Considerations
The Cost Analysis/Bid Summary (or equivalent) contains the summary list of all the
selected suppliers, their corresponding price proposal, terms and technical description for
a particular item to be purchased.
The list shall include a minimum of three bids from different suppliers. In the case of an
urgent purchase request, the three bid requirement can be waived provided it is justified
and is approved by the appropriate Manger.
Purchasing Department responsibilities are as follows:
• Review the proposal submitted by each supplier.
• For critical items, the Purchaser shall submit a Material Technical Specification
Report (or equivalent) to the end user for technical advice. This report shows the
technical description proposed by each supplier without quoting the supplier’s name.
• Compare and evaluate the bids not only on the price criteria but also on the technical
aspect and other terms and conditions such as delivery time, terms of payment,
discounts, etc.
• Select the best supplier based on the outcome of the bid analysis.
• List comments on the Cost Analysis/Bid Summary (or equivalent) that support the
selection of the winning supplier.
• Sign and date the Cost Analysis/Bid Summary Report (or equivalent) and submit it to
the appropriate Manager for approval.
• After the Cost Analysis/Bid Summary (or equivalent) has been approved, a letter of
award (or equivalent) shall be sent to the winner and a Purchase Agreement (P.A.), or
equivalent, shall be prepared for acceptance by the winner.
• After the winner has accepted the P.A. (or equivalent), regret letters shall be sent to
the other bidders if required by the Company.
3.4 Records
Copies of the Cost/Bid Analysis Summary Report and the Material Technical
Specification Report (if any) (or their equivalents) shall be filed together with copies of
the RFQ, the proposals and the Purchase Agreement (or equivalent) to provide an
auditable record of actions.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Purchase Order/Receiving Record
Doc. # PUR-011
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for written instructions for the preparation, function
and handling of the Purchase Order and Receiving Report (PO/RR) report.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
This guideline outlines the responsibilities and reviews basic principles for the
development of procedures to ensure efficiency when using the PO/RR report.
3.2 Considerations
The Purchasing Department shall use the PO/RR report for transactions involving the
purchase of materials, parts, equipment, tools, labor and services. An approved Purchase
Order (P.O.) signed by the proper approval officer(s) is recognized as a firm contract with
a supplier.
The Warehouse Staff shall use the PO/RR report as a receiving report for deliveries by
suppliers. The warehouse staff shall print the required information on the receiving
portion of the form and compares the receipts against the P.O. information.
Purchase Order Requirements
The designated Purchaser shall prepare a P.O. and proceed as follows:
• Enter the next P.O. number in sequence from the P.O. Log, the Purchase Request
(P.R.) numbers that preceded the P.O. and the date.
• The Purchaser shall complete the PORR form based on the Form Accomplishment
Procedure found at back of the PORR booklet. The Form Accomplishment Procedure
is a reference set of definitions and guidelines.
• The completed P.O. together with the approved Cost Analysis/Bid Summary (or
equivalent), P.R., RFQ and other pertinent documents shall be forwarded to the Plant
Controller for budget notation.
• Final approval shall be obtained from the authorized approving personnel based on
the total cost of the item to be purchased.
• After the P.O. has been approved, the selected Vendor shall be contacted. The P.O.
shall be reviewed with the selected Vendor and acceptance of the order obtained.
• Copies of the PORR shall be distributed as follows:
a. White copy - Supplier
b. Blue copy - Purchasing
c. Pink copy - Warehouse
d. Green copy - Accounting for advance information
• Follow up the Vendor’s performance and inform the requestor of the status of the P.O.
• Maintain a computer record of all P.O.s so that status is readily available.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Purchase Order/Receiving Record
Doc. # PUR-011

Receiving Record Requirements
Upon receipt of materials delivered to the warehouse, the warehouse staff shall proceed
as follows:
• Inspect the condition, quality, quantity and price of the items received to ensure that
they are in accordance with the P.O. terms.
• The receiving portion of the PORR form shall be completed using the information
concerning the condition of the items received.
• For any inconsistency with the P.O. terms or for damaged items, a discrepancy report
(or equivalent) shall be prepared and submitted to Purchasing/Accounting for action.
• The requester shall be informed upon arrival of the requested items. For critical
items, the requester may need to be consulted regarding the technical aspects of the
items delivered.
• Completed PORR copies shall be forwarded to Purchasing (yellow copy) and to
Accounting (photocopy) together with copies of invoices and other pertinent
documents received from the supplier.
3.4 Records
PORR booklets are issued to Purchasing by the Material Management Group (MMS) and
are recorded on the PORR logbook. Purchasing is responsible and accountable in the
control of this form. Cancelled or void forms shall be recorded and submitted to the
MMS group for clearance of form accountability.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Purchase Agreement
Doc. # PUR-012
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for written instructions for preparation of Purchase
Agreements. The Company shall also apply this guideline to preparation of Service Contracts.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
The Purchase Agreement (P.A.) shall contain the language required to adequately define
the contractual relationships of the Buyer and the Seller. The P.A. shall be prepared by
Purchasing with assistance as necessary by others.
Format
The format of the Purchase Agreement shall typically be as follows:
The First Section identifies the Parties (the Buyer and the Seller) to the Purchase
Agreement, first in general terms covering the corporate identities of the parties and
secondly specifically naming the persons who represent each of the parties.
The Second Section describes the various portions of the Purchase Agreement as follows:
• Contract Documents lists key documents and references which comprise the P.A.
• Term of Agreement defines the period during which the P.A. is effective.
• Communications directs the way in which written communications are to be
addressed to the Company.
• Permits and Licenses names the parties responsible for furnishing any permits,
licenses or notices that may be required by pertinent laws or regulations.
• Goods and Services contains a complete description of what the Buyer agrees to buy
from the Seller.
• Resale lists restrictions or privileges that may apply to the resale of goods by the
Buyer.
• Pricing clearly defines the pricing terms agreed upon by the Parties.
• Shipping and Delivery contains directions for the Parties on the conditions relating to
the shipping and delivery of goods or the performance of services.
• Invoicing provides important details to be followed by the Seller in billing the Buyer.
• Payment describes the practices of the Buyer in paying properly submitted invoices.
• Miscellaneous lists other items of agreement not listed in specific earlier sections.
The Third Section is the signature section wherein the representatives of the Parties
formalize the execution of the Purchase Agreement with their signatures and the
signatures of the witnesses to the event.
Supplements to the P.A. may be added, if necessary, but they must be adequately
identified in the Second Section.
3.3 Records
A copy of the P.A. shall be filed with a copy of the P.R. and the PORR in order to provide
an auditable record of the activities involved.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Purchasing Department Files
Doc. # PUR-013
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for the development of written instructions on
maintaining Purchasing Department files.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
efficiency when maintaining Purchasing Department files.
3.2 Records
Purchasing Department file shall be maintained as follows:
• Files kept for the Purchasing Department shall be established and maintained by the
Buyer. Original copies of purchase orders shall be filed by vendor with separate files
maintained for each calendar year.
• One copy of the vendor catalog or product directory for items used in the Company’s
facilities shall be kept current at all times.
• A current file of all blanket purchase orders and procurement contracts shall be kept
for the life of each contract or for the duration of any applicable warranty period.
Upon expiration, these arrangements shall be transferred to storage for a length of
time approved by the Company (or by the country’s applicable statue of limitations)
and afterwards shall be destroyed.
• The current year’s files and a number files from prior years’s (as approved by the
Company) shall be maintained on-site by the Purchasing Department. Purchase
requisitions older than this shall be destroyed.
• All field purchase order copies shall be kept in a logical sequence for a period of time
approved by the Company, after which they shall be destroyed.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Purchase Cut-Off
Doc. # PUR-014
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for the development of written instructions on
purchase cut-off for accounting purposes.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Liabilities for goods and services received during an accounting period shall be recorded
during the same accounting period.
Steps for making sure that all liabilities are recorded and proper purchasing cut-off is
achieved are as follows:
• Closing of the accounting records shall be performed at the month end.

• Receiving reports that have not been matched with the related vendor invoice shall be
accumulated and a liability recorded. A list shall be prepared monthly, noting all
unmatched receiving reports. This list shall be used as supporting documentation for
the journal voucher that is used to record the liability for goods received but not paid.
• A history (file) for all goods received but not paid shall be kept that notes the Vendor,
amount, date goods received and the Vendor’s purchase order (P.O.) number. The file
shall serve as the control record for this liability account. Recording this liability is
different from those entries processed through the accounts payable system. It will not
be processed like an invoice. The dollar amount for this liability can be obtained from
the vendor’s P.O.
• Typically, the entry to record the liability for unmatched receiving reports, per above,
shall be reversed in the subsequent accounting period. Matching receiving reports to
vendor invoices shall be performed monthly.
• The numerical file of receiving reports shall be reviewed to ensure that all receiving
reports for goods received during the period have been processed through the
accounts payable system or included in the purchase cut-off entry for unmatched
receiving reports.

Revision: 0
Inventory Control Guidelines
Issued: Nov-1999
Accounting Treatment for Inventory
Doc. # INC-001
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes definitions of inventory classes and instructions for their accounting
treatment.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
This guideline outlines terminology and reviews basic principles for the development of
accounting treatment for various classifications of inventory.
3.2 Considerations
Definition of Inventory Classes
Stock (Materials and Supplies): Items used regularly during operations and maintenance
activities, which are interchangeable on a variety of facilities and equipment and are
readily available from suppliers.
Non-Stock (Consumables): Items used regularly and consumed in the course of
performing regular operations and maintenance activities. Unit costs for these items are
relatively low.
Plant Standby (Spare Parts): Items that meet the following criteria:
• Parts that are repairable and are reused several times
• Parts that are held to replace items currently in use
• Parts that have an estimated useful life of at least one year
• Parts that are intended as a replacement for a major part of an engine component or
auxiliary unit
However, major spare parts that are not repairable or reusable shall be deemed to be
Plant Standby if the following requirements are met:
• Parts that are set aside as replacements to avoid substantial operating down time
• Parts that are directly related to particular plant items
• Parts that are not subject to normal periodic replacement (not more than once a year)
• Parts that are normally expensive
Accounting Treatment
Stock (Materials and Supplies) shall be controlled through a formal inventory system to
properly reflect the inventory on hand, location, usage and value (beginning balance,
receipts, usage and ending balance). When purchased, stock is charged to either the
applicable inventory account or expensed when it is issued to the user destination.
Non-Stock (Consumables) shall be charged to expense when purchased. These materials
shall be kept in a warehouse or other storage area to prevent loss, theft and spoilage.
Manual stock card shall normally be maintained for non-stock items for the purpose of
monitoring and controlling usage. Semiannual and year-end adjustments shall be made,
if necessary, to recognize the remaining balance as prepaid items with the corresponding
reduction to Operations and Maintenance (O&M) expense.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Accounting Treatment for Inventory
Doc. # INC-001

Plant Standby (rotating and nonrotating) shall accounted for as follows:
• Once purchased and brought into the warehouse for stocking, plant standby shall first
be classified as inventory. Once issued to the plant, it shall be recognized as a fixed
asset addition to equipment and is subject to straight-line depreciation over its
estimated useful life.
• For rotating standby parts, if the estimated useful life can be factored by the time the
parts are not in service and extended to arrive at an average period during which the
part shall be used, then the cost asset can be allocated more realistically.
• If a standby part is retired from production prior to completion of its useful life, it
shall be removed from the control records provided it was individually tagged and
recorded. If the part was not individually recorded in the control records, then an
average book value cost shall be derived. As parts are retired over time the average
book value is used to approximate the spare part.
• Spares routed directly to a plant location instead of the warehouse shall be capitalized
and depreciated beginning in the month it was routed. The rationale is that the part is
ready for its intended purpose.
• Costs associated with reconditioning or repairing a part for future use shall be
expensed when incurred and recognized as a component of O&M expense. The
original part shall be carried on the books at its original cost. Repaired or
reconditioned parts shall not be written off until the parts are fully disposed of or
retired and do not benefit future periods.
Unit Pricing
The weighted average unit cost method shall be used to value each inventory class in
stock. Unit price calculations are specific to each project warehouse location. The
components of inventory costs are:
• Invoice price less cash and other discounts
• Freight, moving and transportation charges
• Cost of inspections and special tests prior to acceptance and receipt
• Insurance and other costs that are directly assignable charges
Prices for stock transfers (sells) between companies are those of the sending location plus
direct costs incurred during the transfers.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Receiving
Doc. # INC-002
1. Purpose
documenting the receipt of goods and services.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
efficient receipt of goods and services.
Inspection
A designated individual shall inspect all goods received. If the good is a specialized
product, a qualified engineer or the end user shall perform the inspection.
Service Review
Services that were rendered shall be reviewed by the end user/engineer to determine that
the job was done in accordance with the purchase order or contract. Approvals shall be
documented in a memo and sent to the Purchasing Department.
Receipt
The following shall be performed upon receipt of each item.
• Log the item on the receiving log and the prenumbered receiving report.
• Check the bill of lading for the correct delivery point.
• Verify the quantity or weight with the bill of lading.
• Examine the packaging for exterior damage.
• Note any discrepancies on the bill of lading.
• Obtain the signature of the person inspecting the goods received.
• Retain a copy of the receiving report for the Receiving Department.
Discrepancies
In the event of discrepancies, the following procedures shall be observed:
• The Receiving Department shall contact the Purchasing Department if any order has
an obvious discrepancy.
• The Plant Buyer shall notify the Vendor in an expeditious manner and give the
Receiving Department direction regarding disposition.
• The Receiving Department shall note all exceptions on the carrier freight bill before it
is signed and turned over to the shipper.
• The shipper’s initials shall be obtained for the noted exceptions.
• A log shall be prepared for every shipment with exceptions.
• A copy of the discrepancy report (or copies of the receiving reports listing
discrepancies) shall be sent to the Plant Buyer on a regular basis for use in resolving
current and past noted discrepancies with the vendors.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Receiving
Doc. # INC-002
3.3 Records
The Receiving Report with the attached purchase order, bill of lading and packing slip
shall be sent to the Accounting Department. Copies of the Receiving Report shall be sent
to the Purchasing Department and a copy shall be retained and filed in the Receiving
Department.
The Purchasing Department shall keep a list of receiving reports received and account for
their completeness by verifying their numerical sequence. The list of receiving reports
shall be compared monthly to the file of reports kept in the Receiving Department.
Differences shall be investigated.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Declaration of Surplus/Junk
Doc. # INC-003
1. Purpose
declaration of surplus and junk materials.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Operations personnel shall declare surplus or junk materials as such with approval by
Plant Managers. For certain equipment, approval by the owning company is required for
the declaration.
3.2 Considerations
Definitions
Surplus is any usable material or equipment having no expected use at its location within
the next 12 months that has been declared surplus in writing according to this guideline.
Junk is material that is not usable in its present condition or material that is not
economical to repair.
Storage Location is the place where the surplus material is physically located. The
surplus material’s care and condition remain the responsibility of the operations
management at that location.
Declaration
The owning Operations Department shall identify and declare material to be surplus from
work orders, retirement orders and materials and supplies inventory by completing a
Surplus Materials Report (SMR) or equivalent.
Fair market value for surplus items shall be estimated or the average cost of the items
used so that the Company has a basis for approving the declaration of surplus, evaluating
the offers to buy and establishing the authority to sell. Assistance for determining the fair
market value shall be obtained from dealers of similar used materials or equipment or
from Technical Services.
Accounting shall use the fair market value to determine an estimated gain or loss for the
disposition of surplus material. Initialization by an appropriate manager acknowledging
the estimated market value entry is required before bids are solicited.
Only those items having a fair market value of a Company approved limit or more shall
be placed on the Company Surplus List. Items of lesser value may be grouped together
for inclusion on the Surplus List as a single line item.
After the Plant Manager has approved the Declaration of Surplus and the fair market
value has been established, the SMR shall require the additional approval of the General
Manager of Operations for high-valued items.
Identification
Operations shall identify and tag surplus material. The tagged items shall indicate
identifying information as required for clarity.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Declaration of Surplus/Junk
Doc. # INC-003

Physical Custody
Material identified as surplus shall physically remain at the storage location.
Cataloging
The Surplus List shall be divided into major classifications according to the type of
materials or equipment. The items in each classification shall be listed in glossary order
in accordance with the inventory system nomenclature. The condition, quantity, book
value and location code shall be indicated for each item.
Disposal
Surplus shall be disposed of in accordance with Guideline INC-004, Disposal of Surplus.
In the event that surplus materials cannot be sold for an acceptable price, the surplus shall
be downgraded to junk if the owning Operations Department deems it acceptable. Junk
shall be disposed of in accordance with Guideline INC-005, Disposal of Junk.
4. References
4.1 Guideline INC-004, Disposal of Surplus
4.2 Guideline INC-005, Disposal of Junk

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Disposal of Surplus
Doc. # INC-004
1. Purpose
disposal of surplus material or equipment.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Operations shall dispose of surplus in a manner that yields maximum value to the
Company.
3.2 Considerations
Approval for disposal of surplus shall be according to the steps listed in Guideline
INC-003, Declaration of Surplus/Junk. Upon completion of these steps, the eventual sale
or transfer of surplus is preapproved within the limits set forth below.
Options for Disposal
Internal Usage: Surplus materials may be transferred to another entity within the
Company. The initiation of documentation for transferring surplus materials shall be the
responsibility of the Company’s approved designee.
Return to the Original Vendor: Unused material may be returned to the original vendor
per the terms of the original purchase order. The Company’s designee shall handle the
transaction if the order has been closed. If the order has not been closed, the transaction
shall be the Buyer’s responsibility.
Outside Sales: Sales may be made to outside organizations in several ways, as follows:
• Items shall be listed in a sales catalog and distributed to potential buyers or users of
the surplused materials. This listing shall be for a prescribed time to allow the sale of
specific items.
• Sales lots may be generated for sale to the highest bidder after the prescribed time for
listing the items in the sales catalog has expired.
Donation to a Nonprofit Organization: Surplus materials may be donated to a nonprofit
organization. Operations shall coordinate the details of the transfer.
Conduct of Sales
Sales of surplus materials shall be conducted as follows:
• Operations Management shall execute a Purchase Agreement (or equivalent) with the
Buyer.
• The concerned Operations section shall be notified to release the material after
payment has been received.
• Operations Management shall provide a bill of sale to the Buyer (when required) that
includes a description of the material sold and any applicable tests. The bill of sale
shall be executed when the Buyer takes delivery of the material.
• Operations Management may automatically complete sales if the high bid is at least
85% of the estimated (or average cost) fair market value. As the high bid trends
downward from this 85% level, increasing levels of approval authority are required.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Disposal of Surplus
Doc. # INC-004

• Authority (or equivalent) to accept bids shall be related to the estimated market value
as follows:
% of Market Value Minimum Approval

85 % or greater Plant Manger
70 – 85% Director of Management
50 – 70% General Manager of Operations
Less than 50 % Joint Approval of the Director of Management
and the General Manager of Operations
• If there is no reasonable basis for estimating the current market value, approval of the
sales price shall automatically be required from the Director of Management (or
equivalent).
• This approval structure shall apply to sales resulting from the solicitation of formal
bids as well as to individual sales for which there are only one or very few potential
buyers.
• In the event that items to be sold are owned by a joint venture, approval by the
participating companies shall be required for sales of any price.
4. References
4.1 Guideline INC-003, Declaration of Surplus/Junk

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Disposal of Junk
Doc. # INC-005
1. Purpose
disposal of junk material or equipment.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
The owning Operations Department shall dispose of junk through local markets.
Conduct of Sales
The following requirements for the disposal of junk shall be followed:
• Junk sales shall normally be to the highest bidder.

• Junk sales shall normally be handled at the field locations.
• Operations shall periodically advise the field locations of fluctuations in scrap prices.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Receiving of Freight
Doc. # INC-006
1. Purpose
receiving of freight.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
The following requirements for receiving freight shall be followed:
• Thoroughly inspect all cartons at the time of delivery. Check for creases, crushed
corners (especially bottom corners), punctures or tears, and rattles.
• Note any and all exceptions on the carrier freight bill (delivery receipt) before it is
signed and turned over to the driver. List the same notes on the consignee copy of the
freight bill.
• Have the driver sign or initial the exceptions listed on the carrier freight bill. If the
driver refuses, call the Vendor.
• Before acceptance, any cartons in extremely bad condition at the time of delivery
shall be opened and the contents inspected. All damage shall be noted on the delivery
receipts and initialed by the driver. If the driver refuses, call the Terminal Manager.
• Sign upon agreement with the accuracy of the carrier inspection report. The report
shall list any irregular conditions to the shipping carton or container, especially with
regard to the freight inside.
• File a claim for damaged shipments refused, noted at the time of delivery, with the
carrier. The responsibility for filing a claim is with the consignee since, in most
cases, ownership of the material passes to the consignee at the time of carrier pickup
from the shipper’s dock.
• If the shipment is obviously incorrect such as incorrect pipe size, telephone the Buyer
regarding the discrepancy. The carrier may be detained for up to two hours without
incurring detention charges while the discrepancy is being investigated.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Physical Inventory Count
Doc. # INC-007
1. Purpose
performing physical inventory counts.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Reconciliation of Physical to Perpetual Inventory

• The actual physical inventory quantities counted shall be reconciled with the amounts
per the perpetual inventory.
• Specific items to be taken into account are inventory items on the perpetual list, but
not found in the physical inventory (reconciling items). These shall include the
following:
a. Items added to the perpetual inventory through purchases, but not yet received
b. Items physically unaccounted for through error, theft, etc.
c. Items scrapped, but not removed from the perpetual list
• Once the perpetual inventory quantities have been adjusted to reflect the physical
counts and other reconciling items, the corresponding extensions and footings shall be
adjusted.
• Costing for items identified as slow moving, obsolete or of questionable value shall
be adjusted accordingly to reflect the expected realizable value.
• Any reconciling inventory item that appears unusual shall be investigated.
• All identified changes to the perpetual inventory balances shall be made and approved
by an individual independent of the custody of or the accounting for the inventory
items.
Annual Physical Inventory Count
• A physical count of all inventory shall be made a minimum of once a year. The
Company may require a physical count twice annually.
• Instructions to company personnel concerning the physical inventory shall be written
and shall include the following:
a. Location, date and beginning time of physical inventory count
b. Number and composition of count teams
c. Designated inventory area assignments of each count team and second count team
d. Detailed instructions on how to fill out inventory tags or sheets (pounds, gallons,
pallets, boxes, bags, manufacturer, etc.) in order to expedite the subsequent
reconciliation process
e. Control of the inventory tags or sheets issued and used
f. Identification of inventory held for others
g. Accumulation of appropriate cut-off information
• Inventory shall be maintained in an orderly arrangement to facilitate the count.
• Inventory shall be properly identified and described, including stage of completion
when appropriate.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # INC-007
• Counters shall be made aware of the possibility of obsolete and slow-moving items as
well as inventory with deteriorating value or questionable quality (i.e., excessive dust,
presence of rust, scrap, goods rejected by quality control). These items shall be noted
on inventory tags or sheets and brought to the attention of the count supervisor for
followup.
• The physical count and the second team’s recount shall be reconciled and all
differences shall be resolved.
• All tags or sheets used during the physical count shall be accumulated and accounted
for before the count teams leave the area.
• A reconciliation of the physical inventory to the perpetual inventory shall be
performed.
Frequent Period Physical Inventory Counts
• Frequent period (more than once a year) physical inventory counts shall be performed
for active or fast-turning inventory items.
• Frequent period physical inventories require the following:
a. Up-to-date perpetual records
b. Functioning internal controls
c. Controls over physical movement
• Fewer people shall be required for the actual counting on periodic inventories as a
smaller portion of the inventory is counted at any one time.
• Counters shall be aware of items with deteriorating value or of questionable quality.
These items shall be noted and brought to the attention of the count supervisor for
followup.
• Management shall perform unscheduled test counts on occasion to maintain the
accuracy and integrity of the inventory.
Perpetual Inventory Counts
• A perpetual inventory system for counting spare parts, materials and tools shall be
maintained. Management requires its use to determine costs incurred for the dollar
value of the inventory on hand at any point in time.
• The general ledger shall accurately reflect the perpetual inventory.
• The perpetual inventory system shall include the use of an average cost method.
• In practice and in theory, the perpetual inventory shall be a subsidiary ledger for the
general ledger.
• However, there may be reconciling items including the following:
a. Allowance for obsolete, slow-moving items, if not taken into account at the
individual item level
b. Adjustment for the lower of cost or market value
c. Adjustment for the actual physical count
• Physical count summaries shall be reviewed for deviation from the expected or
standard usage rates and for mathematical accuracy (including pricing) before
adjustments to the general ledger are made.
Identification of Inventory Ownership

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # INC-007
• All inventory items belonging to others shall be clearly identified and physically
segregated to avoid any erroneous inclusion in the Company’s inventory counts.
• If the amount of items is significant and the activity is frequent, perpetual records
shall be kept.
• Inventory belonging to others shall be included during the physical inventory count,
but shall be excluded from the inventory valuation.
Indirect Materials and Supplies Inventory
• Indirect materials and supplies are items required to be on hand or are used as a part
of the production process. Examples are small hand tools, replacement parts for
machinery, catalysts in chemical processes, and cleaning fluids.
• Preferably, a perpetual inventory shall be maintained with a physical inventory count
taken at least annually. Comparison between the two shall be made and any
discrepancies investigated.
• Depending on the size of the inventory, items shall either be expensed when
purchased or capitalized and charged to expense when used.

Revision: 0
Crisis Management Guidelines
Issued: Nov-1999
Crisis Management Planning
Doc. # CRP-001
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements to be followed for the safe and effective preparation
and implementation of a Crisis Management Plan (CMP).
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Crisis Management Policy
It is the policy of Enron Global Operations (EGO) to require all locations to provide both
the training and resources necessary to effectively manage a crisis (defined herein).
Priorities to be addressed in a crisis are:
• Protect the safety and well-being of the public, personnel and their families.
• Protect Company property and reputation as well as property in neighboring
communities.
• Protect the environment.
• Maintain and/or restore operations.
• Provide effective communication with key audiences.
• Adhere to all laws and regulations.
Applicable safety and regulatory standards are to be met or exceeded during activities to
prevent or minimize incidents that could result in a crisis or emergency. Furthermore,
EGO policy is to promote cooperation and an efficient and coordinated response. To
accomplish this, local management shall establish an effective and efficient process to
interact with local, state and national emergency response agencies; the news media;
other key external audiences and the general public.
3.2 Considerations
Definitions
Occurrence: An event that requires immediate response by the local field team and that
meets the following criteria:
• Does not result in injuries
• Involves little or no property damage
• Has little or no environmental impact
• Attracts no media attention
• Requires only routine or no reporting to regulatory agencies
• Is easily handled by the team or operating company following a Local Emergency
Action Plan (refer to Guideline CRP-002, Emergency Action Plan)
An occurrence, however, could develop into an emergency or crisis if it is not
immediately controlled.
Emergency: A more significant event that may meet any of the following criteria:
• Involve injuries to an employee, contractor or the general public
• Result in significant property damage

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # CRP-001

• Involve a fire, explosion or significant environmental impact
• Attracts local media attention
• Is likely to be reportable to some federal, state or local agencies
For the most part, emergencies are within the capacity of the operating company but may
require certain specialized Crisis Support Team resources to help mitigate the problem or
conduct subsequent follow-up investigations. An emergency can quickly become a crisis
if it is not mitigated (refer to Guideline CRP-002, Emergency Action Plan).
Crisis: A major event that may meet any of the following criteria:
• Result in fatalities or serious injuries to employees or the general public
• Cause extensive property damage
• Involve significant environmental impact
• Attract regional or national media attention
• Require involvement of national regulatory agencies
Response to a crisis may require significant additional resources or support beyond that
available at the local or regional company level. A crisis will in most cases result in
activation of the Crisis Management Team and could lead to mobilization of all or part of
the Crisis Support Team defined below.
Crisis Management Objectives
The objective of Crisis Response Planning is to become prepared to manage major
incidents. Each office shall implement the following steps to help achieve this objective:
• Prepare Crisis Plans that can help guide the Crisis Management Team in dealing with
any specific incident that may occur.
• Ensure that local personnel are able to follow the proper emergency policies and
procedures at all times to preclude disruption of normal facility or office operations.
• Take appropriate actions to mitigate the impact of any kind of crisis on life, property,
operations and the Company’s good reputation.
• Take physical security measures to protect life and property.
• Develop public relations plans and programs to ensure that the Company’s
communications with its audiences are clear and cohesive.
• Develop emergency procedures.
• Keep Crisis Plans current so that the affected facility or office will act to minimize
risk to life and property as well as deal with select public, media and the community.
Components of Crisis Management Planning
Crisis response planning takes place in five areas:
• Crisis Management Plan
• Security Program
• Public Relations Plan
• Emergency Action Plan
• Crisis Support Plan

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # CRP-001

Crisis Management Training
The Crisis Management Plan shall address the following training requirements:
• Team(s) composition and duties
• Potential hazards
• Active crisis management
• Response variations for multiple crises and differing causes of crises
• Media training
• Joint training with suppliers, customers and non-Company emergency response
personnel
Crisis Support Team
Crisis Support Team Membership is formed at the regional headquarters to provide
support and act as a link to corporate management. Members, by department, are:
• Operation/Region • Risk Management
• Safety • Environmental
• Media Relations • Legal
• Human Resources • Security
• Administrative Services
Crisis Support Team Responsibilities include guidance and assistance in providing for
humanitarian needs, conducting investigations and safely returning facilities back to
service. The Crisis Support Team shall assess situations regarding the following:
• Safety and environmental impacts and necessary actions
• Validity and impact of conflicting factors and opinions
• Context in which the incident occurred
• Impact on operations
• Loss of facility
• News media interest
• Need for government affairs input
• Law enforcement expectations
• Employee morale
PREPARING A CRISIS MANAGEMENT PLAN
A Crisis Management Plan (CMP) shall be prepared in the following manner:
• Provide a cover sheet with the date of the current draft.
• Include specific instructions to local offices on how and when to activate the Regional
Crisis Management Plan. Establish a toll-free or other number that is answered
24 hours a day, every day including holidays.
• Identify members of the Crisis Management Team providing names, titles and how to
contact the individuals at any hour. Provide the name of the person who will act in
the first team member's absence and who will act in relief during a crisis situation.
• Describe areas of responsibility of each member (Team Leader, Media Spokesperson,
Security Coordinator, Government Liaison, Records and Administration).
• List all threats such as hurricanes, earthquakes, government instability and riots.
State their potential to occur and their potential to cause harm.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # CRP-001

Emergency Response Providers
In an emergency, certain individuals and entities shall be readily available to provide
unique response. In addition, plans shall be in effect to contact these emergency response
providers and to deal with the emergency at hand. For instance:
• Identify the individual by name who will either perform each task in the event of an
emergency or head a team of people to perform the task (i.e., the name of the person
who will telephone the government in the event of a hazardous environmental spill
that could affect public safety).
• Prepare a list of organizations and individuals other than employees who may require
contact in an emergency response including hospitals, police, government agencies,
public relations consultants, security firm(s), fire department, airlines and banks.
• State how to access names and contact the homes of every employee and their family.
• Prepare a list of the names and phone numbers of media organizations and individuals
who will initiate contact at any hour, stating which media would be involved in
reporting a crisis involving the Company. This list shall be updated monthly.
• Prepare and regularly update a list of the facility's neighbors. Prepare and maintain a
list of community leaders, official and unofficial, who should be notified if a major
incident were to occur.
• Prepare a list of key people working at adjacent Enron companies.
• Identify the meeting location to be used by the Crisis Management Team.
• Prepare a list of equipment that will be needed and assure that it is purchased and
stored in a location with which all are familiar.
• Maintain a list of deficiencies among local resources that are essential for successful
Crisis Management (especially actions to be taken should it become essential to
evacuate). Secure equipment and human resources to eliminate these deficiencies.
• Prepare a training program so that all team members and appropriate external
resources are familiar with the plan and have a "feel" for how to perform when crisis
management is required.
Laws/Regulations
One individual shall be assigned to learn and assemble all laws and regulations of the
country that must be followed in all possible crises. The summary document will include
the following:
• Cite the source.
• Summarize the content.
• List the offices or ministries that must be dealt with in the event the law or regulation
comes into play.
• Identify by name the person to be contacted.
• State how the contact can be initiated at any hour.
• State when and by whom periodic contact will be maintained with officials so that
friendly familiarity and respect are established prior to a crisis.
Post-Event
Plans shall be in place for safekeeping all records generated during the crisis. Utilize the
information gathered to assess plan effectiveness and modify the plan. (See Post-
Emergency Assessment Requirements.)

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # CRP-001

PREPARING A SECURITY PROGRAM PLAN
In preparing a Security Program Plan, write a brief executive summary that states what
the plan is intended to cover. Define the local security situation, as follows:
• Assess and express the nature and level of the threat specifically stating whether
terrorism is a threat and why.
• Identify whether there is a pattern of criminal attacks against persons and property.
• Identify whether information thefts occur by either government or competitors.
• Identify dangerous areas in the vicinity.
• Identify and describe political factors that could lead to hostility toward the project or
actual hostility, if it exists.
• Describe available local resources including professional local security firms and the
presence of any embassy-sponsored security forum for U.S. businesses.
• Determine legal obligations.
• Summarize contractual obligations regarding security including extracts of security-
related contract items.
Physical Security
Description of Locations: Include a brief description of the project or office location for
a non-asset location. Write a summary of any planned project and when each phase will
be built. Provide maps and a description of the location. Describe and provide a map, if
possible, showing location and description of employees' residences and offices used by
Company employees.
Personnel: Identify each expatriate. Identify and list the location of each expatriate's
family.
Security Plan: Describe the security plan for facilities and residences including the
• Concept of the operation
• Who has authority to make decisions about security matters
• Guard staffing pattern
• Type and location of security equipment such as cameras, fences, sensors and badge
control
• Transportation
a. Identify how security will be provided during "official" trips. This shall include
the number and location of guards and drivers, the use of armored cars and
communication between vehicles.
b. Identify how security will be maintained during personal trips. This will include
whether there will be guards, drivers, armored cars and communications.
Information Security Plan
Identify threats by listing competitors and identifying government interest or private
entrepreneurs with an interest in the facility or office information. Include the following
in your Information Security Plan:
• Physical or personnel precautions that will be employed such as safes, access control
and employee background checks
• Technical precautions that will be employed such as secure phones, encryption and
off-line computers

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # CRP-001

Evacuation Plan
State why evacuation plans may be needed. For effective communications, identify how
evacuation will be ordered, how families and workers will communicate, how
transportation will be summoned and how multiple groups of evacuees will
communicate. Written instructions shall be available regarding the following:
• How to obtain vehicles and how to obtain and utilize pre-purchased tickets.
• What prearranged exits exist.
• Describe Company assets including name, address, telephone number and passport
number of personnel. Expiration dates for passports and visas shall also be provided.
Office and asset locations shall be described by address and telephone number.
• Identify limits to authority with regard to who can make decisions about evacuation
and who will be responsible for accomplishing the evacuation.
• Include an "alert" phase for each possible cause for evacuation. Describe what a
"partial evacuation" means and how it would be defined. Describe a "total
evacuation" and what would trigger it.
• Use a map to identify routes for evacuation including assembly points. As
appropriate, develop maps for exit by land, sea and air.
• Identify how to contact key figures in an evacuation including but not limited to local
emergency providers, local security firms and the U.S. embassy.
Kidnapping
The Security Program Plan shall include an anti-kidnapping program that employs
countersurveillance when unusual attention is identified. Methods shall be established to
notify Enron in Houston first if kidnapping does occur.
PREPARING A PUBLIC RELATIONS PLAN
A Public Relations Plan (PRP) shall require there to be one spokesperson to address the
news media. This individual ordinarily will be the single public voice of Enron for the
region and shall coordinate all statements with Enron Corporate Public Relations office.
The following steps will guide preparation of the Public Relations Plan:
• The purpose of the Public Relations Plan shall be documented clearly and concisely
and shall be communicated to local operations.
• Current public relations shall be assessed in regard to communicating with internal
audiences (i.e., employees and their families, vendors and contractors). The opinions
of external audiences should be researched to determine their opinions of the
Company with regard to the industry, local or national politicians, pressure groups,
localm or national media, people in the region who are considered leaders,
community groups, other companies and competitors in the region, if any.
• Develop a means of communicating with each audience by maintaining an updated
list of names, addresses and phone numbers for each category of individuals that may
need to be addressed.
• Prepare a list of news media with names and home telephone numbers of key
reporters including day and night telephone numbers, fax numbers, and switchboard
bypass numbers, as well as e-mail addresses, if available. Document when and how
to inform members of these groups of important events, how they can reach the
Company spokesperson at any hour and who they can contact as backup for periods
when this individual is not available.
NOTE: It is important to remember that all communication with the public must
be coordinated with EI's Houston Public Relations office.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # CRP-001

• Develop a list of "messages” by writing down positive things about the Company’s
operation or benefits the Company’s product or service provides. Also, write down all
negatives to your operation and prepare responses to them in short, clear sentences.
• Identify groups of people as “target audiences”, who shall be informed about and
approve of the operation of the Company. Maintain a list of the leaders of these target
audiences that includes their names, addresses, telephone numbers, fax number and
e-mail addresses.
• Decide how you will reach each important audience or important individual keeping
the following in mind:
a. When to contact each person on the list, who would be most effective and what
messages are most important.
b. What tools are necessary to present the message (i.e., briefing book, PowerPoint
presentation, meeting with no papers, videotape, etc.).
c. What support is available at the site and from corporate and how to secure items
that would be of help.
• Maintain current information about the Company that can be used in an
emergency by preparing a fact sheet explaining who the Company is, what its
business is and other material that would be requested by a reporter covering a
crisis at the site. Review the sheet for proprietary information or security
breaches. Set regular dates on the company calendar to update information.
• Plan to conduct proactive public relations programming. In addition to the Public
Relations Plan, a proactive public relations program shall be written and carried
out during times when there is no crisis. This program shall be reviewed and
approved by Enron Corporate Public Relations office. The following steps shall
be taken before beginning to provide any financial support:
a. Specify criteria for providing community support.
b. Specify criteria for distributing support.
c. Ensure that this support is not and cannot be construed as bribery.
PREPARING AN EMERGENCY ACTION PLAN
The following steps outline preparation for Emergency Action Plan development.
• Identify the person in command. State who is in charge in the event life or property is
threatened and who the alternates are in the absence of the person in charge.
• Identify the location of the command center and where the alternate command center
is in the event the original location is involved in the crisis.
• Maintain a contact list of Emergency Action Plan team members and carefully
document how each member can be reached.
• Keep an up-to-date list of how to contact fire and rescue personnel as well as
Company employees as well as their dependents' names and how to reach them.
• Make a list of key personnel at adjacent or nearby Enron companies.
• Provide a list of every possible disaster such as hurricanes, floods, earthquakes, bomb
threats and equipment failure. Add possible disasters that could affect the facility
internally.
• Make a list of equipment needed such as cell phones, fax machines, flashlights, food,
water and protective clothing and ensure that key personnel know where it is.
• Keep a written plan on how to evacuate employees from the site and state where they
will reassemble.
• Obtain and file, for easy access, reference books on handling fire and injuries as well
as Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) information.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # CRP-001

Planning for Public Notification
Maintain a list of names, addresses and daytime and nighttime telephone and fax numbers
for persons and institutions that could be contacted in the event of a crisis. Maintain
liaison on a written schedule. Contact people on the list more often if conditions warrant.
Detail in writing how soon each category of names or institutions must be notified in the
event of a crisis. Categories that shall be identified are as follows:
• Emergency response personnel including local law enforcement, fire department,
ambulance, Local Emergency Planning Committee (LEPC) and neighboring LEPCs,
the Office of Emergency Management (state and county) and other government
agencies
• Local responders
• Other affected parties including high priority sites in the vicinity for evacuation such
as hospitals, day care centers, nursing homes, commercial sites (shopping centers),
area industries, customers, vendors and contract service personnel
Post-Emergency Assessment Requirements
Each Crisis Management Plan shall provide instructions for assessment of the response
effort to determine the adequacy of the response and revise the plan as needed. The
post-assessment requirement includes the following questions:
• What happened?
• Could it have been prevented and if so, why was it not prevented?
• If a systemic problem was indicated, what has been done to correct it?
• How does the actual impact compare with risk management modeling?
• Were external impacts adequately addressed?
• Were actions consistent with industry standards and company policies?
• Did the various crisis management organizations perform up to expectations?
• Were the crisis management organizations integrated?
• Were there any specific errors in strategies or tactics?
• What would be done differently if the same incident occurred today?
Maps and Plot Plan Requirements
Ensure that the following maps and plot plans are available during an emergency:
• Process flow diagrams or schematics with emergency valves identified including
physical location of emergency valves
• Driving or other directions to the designated emergency valves
• Directions providing alternate access to a site
• Hazardous areas identified
• Location of fire extinguishers and monitors
• Location of emergency equipment and first aid supplies
HazMat Information Requirements
The plan will detail hazardous material which may be present during an emergency and
associated hazards including but not limited to health, fire and reactivity. To accomplish
this, each location will comply with the following:
• Maintain Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for hazardous substances on premises.
• Ensure that areas storing hazardous substances are placarded or marked for easy
identification.
• Provide shipping papers with all vehicles transporting hazardous substances.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # CRP-001
3.4 Records
Documentation Requirements
Provide for documenting activities during an emergency and/or activities relative to the
emergency including:
• The person responsible for documentation
• Information received
• “Incident and Service Interruption Telephone Report” form
• “Material Spill Information Report” form
• “Accident and Equipment Failure Report” form
• Dissemination of information
• Notification Roster
• List of persons or regulatory agencies to be notified
• Chronological sequence of events
• Documentation and preservation of failure sites

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Emergency Action Plan
Doc. # CRP-002
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements to be followed in establishing effective local
Emergency Action Plan (EAP) preparation and implementation.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
This guideline reviews basic principles for the development of procedures and plans to
ensure safety and efficiency when establishing an Emergency Action Plan.
3.2 Considerations
An “Emergency” is defined as an event that may involve injuries to an employee,
contractor or the general public. It also may result in significant property damage and
may involve a fire, explosion or significant environmental impact; attracts local media
attention; and is likely reportable to some federal, state or local agencies.
For the most part, emergencies are within the capacity of the operating company but may
require certain Crisis Support Team resources to help mitigate problems or conduct
subsequent follow-up investigations. An emergency can quickly become a crisis if not
mitigated.
Emergency Action Plan (EAP)
An Emergency Action Plan shall be developed and implemented in accordance with the
Guideline CRP-001, Crisis Management Planning. All locations shall provide both
training and resources to effectively manage an emergency. The priorities of an effective
Emergency Action Plan include:
• Preserving life by minimizing risk to employees and emergency response personnel
• Placing rescue and medical activities over all other actions
• Operating in an environmentally responsible manner
• Complying with both the spirit and letter of all applicable state and federal
regulations pertaining to emergencies
EAP Training
The EAP shall address the following training requirements:
• Team composition and duties
• Potential hazards
• Active emergency management
• Response variations for multiple emergencies and differing causes
Crisis Simulations
EAP simulations shall be combined with Crisis Management Plan simulations.
Simulations shall be critiqued and improvements, revisions and updates made to the EAP
as necessary to achieve the EAP objectives.
4. References
4.1 Crisis Response Planning
Issued: Page 1 of 1
Revision: 0
Quality Operating Guidelines
Issued: 20-Nov-1999
Quality System Selection
Doc. # QSS-001
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for the selection of a Quality System Standard.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Quality System Standards such as the ISO 9000 series identify the basic disciplines of a
quality management system. The series specifies internationally accepted procedures and
criteria required to ensure that products and services meet customer requirements.
3.2 Considerations
ISO 9000 Description
The ISO 9000 series is divided into a number of different parts that provide details of the
essential requirements for quality assurance during the design, delivery and acceptance of
products and services. The various sections and parts are outlined below:
• ISO 9000-1 (Guideline for Selection and Use) clarifies the various responsibilities,
differences and inter-relationships within the quality management system and
provides background information regarding managerial responsibilities and quality
management system principles.
• ISO 9000-2 (Generic Guidelines for the Application of ISO 9001, ISO 9002 and ISO
9003): sets guidelines and provides background information, clarification and
understanding of the requirements of ISO 9000.
• ISO 9004 (Guidelines to the Quality Management and Quality Management System
Elements): provides basic rules for the development and implementation of quality
management systems according to product, service, market, etc.
a. ISO 9004-1 (Guidelines) covers organizational goals, customer requirements,
risks, costs and benefits. It includes sections on definitions, management
responsibilities and quality marketing.
b. ISO 9004-2 (Guidelines for Service) deals with the problem of how a quality
management system for services should respond to the human aspects involved in
the provisions of service.
c. ISO 9004-3 (Guidelines for Processed Materials) provides a guide to quality
management system elements applicable to processed materials such as bulk
products and discusses means for ensuring effective management.
d. ISO 9004-4 (Guidelines for Quality Improvement) provides management
guidance for implementing continuous quality improvement within an
organization.
• ISO 9001 (Model for Quality Assurance in Design/Development, Production,
Installation and Servicing) provides details of the quality management system
requirements used when an organization must demonstrate the ability to design and
supply a quality product or service.
• ISO 9002 (Model for Quality Assurance in Production and Installation) covers quality
management system requirements used when an organization must demonstrate the
capability to control the processes that determine the acceptability of products and
services provided.

Revision: 0
Issued: 20-Nov-1999
Doc. # QSS-001

• ISO 8402 (Quality Management and Quality Assurance – Vocabulary) provides
definitions of ordinary words used in the quality field in a specific or restricted
manner compared with the full range of dictionary definitions.
The energy services business includes a variety of assets delivering services and bulk
products. The Company provides operating and maintenance management services of
physical energy service assets. As part of the management strategy, an ISO 9000 Quality
Management System shall be implemented.
For the majority of assets, a quality management system meeting the requirements of
ISO 9002 should be developed and implemented. ISO 9002 describes the requirements
of a quality management system used to control processes that determine the
acceptability of products and services.
The exceptions are organizations that must maintain an engineering department/group
whose responsibility it is to prepare and install system modifications or new system
designs as part of the routine process of operating or maintaining an asset. In these cases
the requirements of ISO 9001 shall be evaluated to determine whether design and
installation capabilities should be included within the quality system controls.
4. References
4.1 ISO 8402 International Standard
• Quality Management and Quality Assurance – Vocabulary
• ISO 9000-1, Quality Management and Quality Assurance Standards, Part 1:
Guidelines for Selection and Use
Guidelines for Services
• ISO 9004-1, Quality Management and Quality System Elements, Part 1: Guidelines
• ISO 9004-2, Quality Management and Quality System Elements Part 2: Guidelines
for Services
for Processed Materials
• ISO 9004-4 Quality Management and Quality System Elements, Part 4: Guidelines
for Quality Improvement
• Quality System – Model for Quality Assurance in Design, Development, Production,
Installation and Servicing
• Quality System – Model for Quality Assurance in Production, Installation and
Servicing)

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Quality Manual Structure
Doc. # QSS-002
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for constructing a Quality Manual that is consistent
with the structure of the ISO 9000 Quality System Standards.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
This guideline outlines reviews basic principles for the development of procedures, users
guides or manuals to ensure consistency with Quality System Standards.
The Quality Manual will be assembled in four parts or sections.
PART I (Users Guide) will be written to provide a description of the Quality Manual
itself. The following sections shall be considered for inclusion in Part I:
Foreword: Provides a general description of the organization's quality commitment and
how the Quality Manual is integrated with that commitment.
Revision History: Provides a written history of revisions made to the various documents
contained in the Quality Manual.
Table of Contents: Provides an inventory of documents and their general location within
the Quality Manual.
Objectives of the Quality Manual: Provides a series of definitive statements about the
intent (objectives) to be accomplished by the Quality Manual.
Authorization for Implementation and Updating Responsibility: Defines responsibilities
for manual maintenance, approval and authorization for implementation.
Quality Manual Distribution: Provides information concerning the distribution of
controlled volumes of the Quality Manual.
Quality Manual Document Coding System: Describes how various documents used in
the organization will be identified, including the identification of documents contained in
the Quality Manual.
PART II (Company Profile) provides information about the company, its organization
and management responsibilities for quality. The following sections shall be considered
for inclusion in Part II:
Company Background: A brief description of the organization (company) and its
purpose, partners and pertinent agreements with outside agencies and organizations.
Business Process: A brief explanation or flow chart describing the business process or
flow from customer requirements to service or product delivery.
Organization Chart: A chart displaying the physical organization of management and
staff. A chart will also be included that shows the organizational structure of the Quality
System Team.
Quality Responsibilities: Describes the responsibilities of various plant members for
Quality System implementation. Quality System responsibilities and physical
organization positions will be linked.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # QSS-002
PART III (Quality System): Provides a description of the Quality System. The following
sections shall be considered for inclusion in Part III:
Introduction: A brief introduction stating the Company’s (organization’s) approach to
quality, the Quality System and general organization and of the quality documentation
and responsibilities for maintaining the Quality System.
Scope of the Quality System: Statements describing activities and processes covered by
the Quality System.
Quality Policy: A statement of the organization’s commitment to quality.
Definition of Terms: Terms and their definitions used in the Quality Manual that are
unique to the operation, process or service.
Quality Plan: Establishes the specific quality practices, resources and sequence of
activities relevant to a particular service, contract or product. This includes a statement
of purpose, quality objectives, any specific exclusions and period of validity.
PART IV (Quality System Elements and Policies): Describes how each of the 20
elements found in the ISO 9000 Quality System Standards are addressed and/or satisfied
by the Quality System. Part IV shall be organized using the following sections, one for
each of the ISO 9000 Quality System elements:
Management Responsibility: This section will address management responsibilities for
the quality policy, objectives, commitment, organizational responsibilities, training,
verification, resources, personnel and management representatives.
Quality System: This section will address procedures, procedure manual and work
instructions.
Contract Review: This section will address contract documents and contract review.
Design Control: This section will address design inputs, process control and instructions,
marketing implications, component parts and materials, specifications and tolerances,
health and safety, computers, design output, design review, design process review and
design verification and review. (NOTE: for ISO 9002 Quality Systems, the Design
Control function is not required.)
Document and Data Control: This section will address document approval, issue,
review, changes, modifications, removal and availability.
Purchasing: This section will address the control of a product or service obtained from a
third party.
Control of Customer Supplied Product: This section will address verification, control
storage and maintenance of customer supplied products.
Product Identification and Traceability: This section will address product identification
and traceability during production, delivery and installation.
Process Control: This section will address the controls of special processes,
environmental conditions, specifications, standards, work instructions, procedures and
monitoring and control.
Inspection and Testing: This section will address in-process inspection, final inspection
and testing and inspection and test records.
Control of Inspection, Measuring and Test Equipment: This section will address control
of inspection, measuring and test equipment including maintenance and calibration.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # QSS-002

Inspection and Test Status: This section will address production control, product testing
and special processes to indicate product conformance and inspection status.
Control of Nonconforming Product: This section will address control and traceability of
non-conforming material.
Corrective and Preventive Action: This section will address how problems and accidents
are investigated, analyzed and corrected with actions appropriate to prevent recurrence.
Handling, Storage, Packaging, Preservation and Delivery: This section will address
material storage and delivery documentation, instructions and procedures, quarantine
areas, toxic contamination, prevention of damage or deterioration, stock rooms, packing
and preservation, marking, protection during delivery and deterioration control.
Control of Quality Records: This section will address procedures for identification,
collection, indexing, filing, storage, maintenance and retention of records.
Internal Quality Audit: This section will address the audit plan.
Training: This section will address training requirements, provisions, personnel and
training records.
Servicing: This section will address servicing of products according to contract
requirements.
Statistical Techniques: This section will address statistical process controls.
4. References
• Quality System – Model for Quality Assurance in Design, Development, Production,
Installation and Servicing
• Quality System – Model for Quality Assurance in Production, Installation and
Servicing

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
ISO 9000 Implementation Process
Doc. # QSS-003
1. Purpose
This guideline established the requirements to be followed for providing a process description
for the development and implementation of an ISO 9000 Quality System.
2. Scope
except where superceded by more stringent local standards.
3. Guideline
3.1 General
The attached flow chart shows an example of the steps an organization or company may
progress through in their efforts to develop and implement an ISO 9000 Quality System.
Following are explanations that correspond with the numbered steps on the attached flow
chart:
• Select Consultant: Consultants, knowledgeable in the development and
implementation of ISO Quality Systems, are normally engaged to assist the
management team.
• Train Management Team and Develop Implementing Schedule: Educate the
management team on the standards. The management team should then develop a
schedule for implementation to set objectives and measure progress toward
certification.
• Define Quality Roles and Assign Responsibilities for Organization: Define roles and
responsibilities for development, control and implementation of the Quality System
and assign those roles, along with the requisite authority, to the appropriate
individuals.
• Develop Quality Policy and Quality Manual: Develop tier one and two level
documentation describing the organization's commitment to and responsibilities for
quality and applicability of the Quality System elements to the business.
• Develop Documentation: Develop procedures that provide guidelines to translate the
requirements of the Quality Manual into specific processes.
• Train Staff: Educate the staff on the Quality System and their roles and
responsibilities for development and implementation.
• Develop Work Instructions and Procedures: Develop the third and fourth tiers of
documentation used directly by staff to control work activities and processes.
• Begin Quality System Implementation: Begin to use the Quality System to meet the
Quality Policy and Quality Plan(s).
• Establish Corrective and Preventive Action Tracking System: Provide a method of
tracking corrective and preventive actions to completion.
• Train Internal Auditors and Begin Auditing: Internal verification and validation of
the effective implementation of the Quality System.
• Perform Pre-Certification Audit: Perform audit to validate effective implementation
of the Quality System.
• Correct Findings From Pre-Certification Audit: Corrective and preventive actions to
bring the Quality System into closer compliance with the requirements of the selected
ISO 9000 Quality System.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # QSS-003

• Contract with Registrar/Perform Certification Audit: Select an appropriate
registration body and contract with them to perform the required independent
certification audit.
• Certification: Certification will be determined based upon the results of the
independent audit performed by the registrar.
4. References
4.1 ISO 9000-1 International Standard
Guidelines for Selection and Use
Guidelines for Services
4.2 ISO 9004-1 International Standard
for Services
for Processed Materials
for Quality Improvement

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # QSS-003
IMPLEMENTATION PROCESS FLOW CHART
(2)
(3)
TRAIN
(1) DEFINE QUALITY ROLES
MANAGEMENT TEAM
START SELECT
AND
AND
CONSULTANT ASSIGN RESPONSIBLITIES
DEVELOP IMPLEMENTING
FOR ORGANIZATION
SCHEDULE
(7)
(4)
DEVELOP (6) (5)
DEVELOP QUALITY POLICY
WORK INSTRUCTIONS TRAIN DEVELOP
AND
AND STAFF DOCUMENTATION
QUALITY MANUAL
PROCEDURES
NOTE: FROM THE START DATE TO

IMPLEMENTATION CAN TAKE 4 TO 9
MONTHS DEPENDING UPON THE
COMPLEXITY OF THE ASSET
(9)
(10)
(8) ESTABLISH
TRAIN
BEGIN CORRECTIVE
INTERNAL AUDITORS
QUALITY SYSTEM AND
AND
IMPLEMENTATION PREVENTIVE ACTION
BEGIN AUDITING
TRACKING SYSTEM
NOTE: FROM THE START OF IMPLEMENTATION

OF PRE-CERTIFICATION AUDIT IS ABOUT 3
MONTHS TO ESTABLISH A HISTORY OF
PROGRAM EFFECTIVENESS
(11)
(13) (12)
CONSULTANT
REGISTRAR CORRECT FINDINGS
PERFORMS
PERFORMS FROM PRE-CERTIFICATION
PRE-CERTIFICATION
CERTIFICATION AUDIT AUDIT
AUDIT
CERTIFICATION

Revision: 0
Security Operating Guidelines
Issued: Nov-1999
Facility Perimeter Barriers
Doc. # SEC-001
1. Purpose
This guideline provides a description of the requirements for perimeter fencing that must be met
at each individual field facility including office buildings, compressors, measuring, metering,
city gate and other stations.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Perimeter fencing that meets the requirements in this guideline shall be in place to
provide security of Company facilities.
The Perimeter Barrier shall be continuous around the site and shall include the
following.
• Chain-Link (or Hurricane Fencing): Perimeter barriers shall be a minimum of 6 feet
in height (7 feet is recommended) with fence post centers at a maximum of 10 feet.
Posts shall be set in concrete in holes a minimum of 24 inches in depth. Fencing
material shall be of #9 or #11 AWG chain-link material with mesh openings no larger
than 2¼ inches. Fencing shall be anchored to the ground at all points between posts
OR a bottom rail should be installed. A top rail shall be installed on all fencing.
• Barriers, including gates, shall be topped with a minimum of three strands of barbed
wire angled outward at 45 degrees
• Concrete Barriers shall be solid and not offer a foot or hand hold. Concrete barriers
shall be topped with a minimum of three strands of barbed wire angled outward at
45 degrees.
• Gates shall be constructed of the same fencing material and shall reach within
2 inches of the ground at all points. Gates shall be secured with a heavy-duty chain or
hasp as well as a padlock when not in use.
3.3 Reports
There is no reporting requirement under this guideline. The written security procedure
will satisfy the intent of this guideline.
4. References
4.1 Protection of Assets Manual

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Security Lighting
Doc. # SEC-002
1. Purpose
This guideline provides a description of the requirements that must be met for security lighting at
each individual field facility including office buildings, compressors, measuring, metering, city
gate and other stations.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Security lighting that meets the requirements in this guideline shall be in place to provide
security of Company facilities.
Requirements for security lighting at Company facilities are as follows:
• Security lighting shall be mounted inside the perimeter, illuminating the perimeter
barrier. Lighting is adequate if it allows the employees a clear field of vision through
and outside the perimeter barrier.
• Lighting shall not be directed on a guard post or otherwise illuminate guards on
patrol. Lighting shall provide continuous unbroken lighting of the site perimeter.
• Existing lighting that is built at the fence line illuminating inward shall be
repositioned to illuminate the fence line and outside areas.
• Photocell or other automatic switches shall control lighting at manned stations.
Manual switches may control lighting at unmanned stations.
3.3 Reports
4. References

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Access Control
Doc. # SEC-003
1. Purpose
This guideline provides a description of the requirements for access control inside the perimeter
at each individual field facility including office buildings, compressors, measuring, metering,
city gate and other stations.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Access control that meets the requirements in this guideline shall be in place to provide
security at Company facilities.
Requirements for access control at Company facilities are as follows:
• Local regulations governing age or other categories of visitors must be followed.
• Access inside the site perimeter shall be restricted to individuals with a business need
to be present. External parking should be provided for visitors’ vehicles.
• Only Company and authorized contractor vehicles shall be allowed access into the
site. A site employee shall be assigned responsibility for ensuring that only
authorized persons are allowed entry.
• A visitor log shall be maintained showing the time and date of the visit and the
purpose of the visit or the name of the person the visitor met with.
• Visitor movement inside the site perimeter shall be restricted to those areas that are
not hazardous to the visitor and that do not contain sensitive or proprietary
information. If movement in those areas is necessary, it should be limited by a site
employee escorting the visitor.
• Valve handles shall be locked into position, especially at unmanned sites.
3.3 Reports
4. References

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Information Security
Doc. # SEC-004
1. Purpose
This guideline provides a description of the requirements to be followed for protection of
sensitive written information, data and electronic media at each individual field facility. This
shall include office buildings, compressors, measuring, metering, city gate and other stations.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Information security that meets the requirements in this guideline shall be in place to
provide security at Company facilities.
Sites that deal with sensitive information or that transmit data through the Company
SCADA system shall take appropriate security measures to ensure that the data, in
whatever form, cannot be compromised. Appropriate steps include the following:
• Checking the background of employees who handle sensitive information
• Training employees how to handle, store, distribute and destroy sensitive material
• Providing suitable storage locations for sensitive information and ensuring that
sensitive information is properly secured when not in use
SCADA access shall be tightly controlled through physical security measures utilizing
solid doors and good security locks.
All data transmissions that transmit sensitive data including e-mail, voice, video
conferencing and SCADA shall be encrypted to minimize vulnerability to interception.
3.3 Reports
4. References

Revision: 0
Training Guidelines
Issued: Nov-1999
Procedure Guideline
Doc. # TRG-097
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for the development and revision of natural gas
pipeline operation and maintenance procedures.
2. Scope
This guideline applies to all “Company” operated facilities and its employees and its contractors
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Operation and maintenance procedures shall be readily accessible to all employees who
operate and maintain plant equipment.
3.2 Considerations
Operation and maintenance procedures shall address the following elements:
• Operating limits
• Consequences of deviation
• Steps required to correct or avoid deviation
• Safety and health considerations
• Safety systems and their functions
Procedure and Content
The Asset Manager shall develop and implement written procedures that provide clear
instructions for safely conducting activities involved in the operation and maintenance of
the asset.
Procedures shall be consistent with the Enron Safety and Environmental Guidelines and
the Enron International Procedure ADM-099, “Procedure Development” and shall
provide procedural steps for each of the following stages:
• Initial startup
• Normal operations
• Temporary operations
• Emergency shutdown’ including conditions under which emergency shutdown is
required and assignment of shutdown responsibility to qualified operators to ensure
emergency shutdown is executed in a safe and timely manner
• Emergency operations
• Normal shutdown
• Startup following a turnaround or after an emergency shutdown
Reviews
Operation and maintenance procedures shall be reviewed as often as necessary to ensure
that they reflect current operating practice including changes that result from changes in
technology, equipment and modifications to facilities. The Asset Manager shall certify
annually that these procedures are current and accurate.

Revision: 0
Training Guidelines
Issued: Nov-1999
Procedure Guideline
Doc. # TRG-097
Safe Work Practices

The Asset Manager shall develop and implement safe work practices to provide for the
control of hazards during operations. Work practices shall include lock-out/tag-out;
confined space entry; opening system equipment or piping; and control over entrance into
a facility by maintenance, contractor, laboratory or other support personnel. These safe
work practices shall apply to employees and contractor employees.
4. References
4.1 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR)
• CFR 29, Part 1910 Section 119, Occupational Safety and Health Standards
• CFR 49, Part 192 Section 605, Procedural Manual for Operation and Maintenance
and Emergencies
• CFR 49, Part 193 Section 2503, Operating Procedures

Revision: 0
Training Guidelines
Issued: Nov-1999
Operations and Maintenance Training
Doc. # TRG-098
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for the development and revision of a training
program that supports operations and maintenance of an asset facility.
2. Scope
This guideline applies to all “Company” operated facilities, its employees and contractors except
where superseded by more stringent local standards.
3. Guideline
3.1 General
The Asset Manager shall ensure that each employee involved in operating
equipment/systems has received and has a clear understanding of the required training.
Initial Training
Following are the requirements for initial training of employees:
• Each employee presently involved in operations and maintenance shall be trained in
an overview of the equipment or system as well as in the operating and maintenance
procedures.
• Employee training shall be required before being involved in operating or
maintaining a newly assigned equipment or system. Training shall include emphasis
on the specific safety, environmental and health hazards as well as emergency
operations including shutdown.
• Safe work practices shall be applicable to all employee job tasks for the assigned
equipment or system.
• In lieu of initial training, the Asset Manager may certify in writing that the employee
possesses the required knowledge, skills and abilities to safely carry out the duties
and responsibilities as specified in the operating procedures. This shall apply to those
employees who have not had the initial training and are already involved in operating
the equipment or system. This certification must be maintained in the employees
training records.
Refresher Training
Refresher training shall be provided at least every three years and more often, if
necessary to ensure that each employee involved in operating equipment or systems
understands and adheres to the current operation and maintenance practices of the
equipment or system.
The Asset Manager, in consultation with the employees involved in operating the
equipment or system, shall determine the appropriate frequency of refresher training.
3.3 Reports
The Asset Manager shall prepare a record that contains the following information:
• Identity of the employee
• Date of training
• The means used to verify that the employee understood the training (i.e., written test,
oral examination and/or walkdown of the equipment/system)

Revision: 0
Training Guidelines
Issued: Nov-1999
Operations and Maintenance Training
Doc. # TRG-098
4. Reference
and Emergencies
• CFR 49, Part 193 Section 2701-2719, Personnel Qualifications and Training

Revision: 0
Training Guidelines
Issued: Nov-1999
Procedure Development Guideline
Doc. # TRG-099
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements to be followed in the development and revision of
operation and maintenance procedures to ensure that procedures prepared by operations and
maintenance personnel are of a consistently high quality.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
This guideline reviews basic principles to ensure consistency in the development and
revision of operation and maintenance procedures.
3.2 Considerations
This guideline includes the following elements:
• A method for the format and preparation of procedures
• A set of criteria that are essential to an effective procedure and explanations with
examples, where necessary
• A checklist that will enable the procedure author or reviewer to adequately and
efficiently review a procedure
Operating Procedures
Introduction Section: Every procedure shall contain an introductory section that clearly
and concisely describes the purpose of the procedure. Each page shall contain the
• Procedure Number is a unique and permanently assigned number. If a procedure is
canceled or deleted, its number shall not be reassigned to a different procedure.
• Title will uniquely, clearly and accurately define a procedure. The procedure title
shall accurately describe the nature of the activity for which the procedure is
intended. Misleading or inaccurate titles can cause the operator to select the wrong
procedure.
• Date of Issue (effective date) is the date that the procedure was signed and approved.
If the procedure was revised, the effective date will reflect the revision approval date.
• Revision Number is the number that identifies the revision level of the procedure.
Always check to insure the operator and/or maintenance person has the latest revision
of the document.
• Page Number: All pages must be numbered. The last page must be clearly identified
as such.
Purpose Section: The first step in preparing a procedure is to determine why the
procedure is being written or what is the intent of the procedure. The intent will be stated
in the Purpose section of the procedure. The purpose will provide the guideposts that
lead the author through the remainder of the procedure. The purpose of the procedure
shall be stated clearly, concisely and accurately.
Scope Section: This section provides information for the person performing a procedure
regarding activity details included in the procedure. The scope might also give the
boundaries of the activities to be performed and what equipment it applies to.

Revision: 0
Training Guidelines
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # TRG-099

Prerequisite Section: This section describes which actions or procedures must be
completed prior to performing the steps in the procedure. Any plant, system or
equipment that must exist prior to performing this procedure must be listed here.
Required Equipment Section: This section lists all Personal Protective Equipment (PPE),
repair parts, special tools and equipment and any materials that might be required to
perform the procedure.
Safety and Environmental Section: This section specifies any special precautions to be
observed in the performance of the procedure to ensure compliance with safety and
environmental concerns. It addresses all concerns that affect personnel, equipment and
environmental safety. In addition, safety considerations are included in the body of the
procedure.
Reference Materials Section: This section lists any materials used during the review for
development of this procedure. It will correctly identify titles and numbers of all
referenced documents. References may include, but are not limited to, the following:
• P&Ids • Flow Diagrams
• Vendor Data • HAZOPS
• System Descriptions • Enron Engineering Standards
• Other documents required to
perform the procedure
Additional reference materials may be added during the development phase of the
procedure.
Procedure Section: This section will contain the steps to perform the procedure.
Procedures shall be written in short, concise sentences that represent identifiable steps.
Each step shall contain a maximum of two actions and preferably only one. If a step
must contain two or more actions, they shall be listed rather than in sentence format.
• Notes usually consist of helpful information that clarifies the procedure or step and
shall not contain action statements.
• Cautions are used for notification of possible equipment hazards.
• Warnings are used to alert personnel of possibile safety hazards that may result in
personal injury.
• Cautions and Warnings shall never fall at the end of the page but shall be carried
over to the next page and appear immediately prior to the step(s) to which they apply.
They shall be easily distinguishable from instructional steps and notes and contain no
action statements. Following are samples of notes, cautions, and warnings:
Note:
A Note is enclosed by a single lined (1 ½ pt) box to offset it from the
rest of the procedure. None of the type is bolded.
CAUTION:
A Caution is enclosed by a double lined box and the word “Caution” is
in bold to help identify it as a Caution and to offset it from the
procedure Note and Warning.
WARNING:
A Warning is enclosed by a heavy (3 pt) lined box and all print is in
bold to help identify it as a Warning and offset it from the Note and
Caution boxes.

Revision: 0
Training Guidelines
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # TRG-099

• Graphs, Charts and Tables shall be easy to read and use. The type style shall be a
minimum of 10 point for ease of readability. Tables should be used where there is a
need to identify several valve positions for a system line-up, as below.
EXAMPLE
Table 4
F-204 Flare Knockout Drum
ISOLATION NORMAL
VALVE NAME POSITION CHAIN LOCK TAG POSITION
JP-258A Suction Valve Closed X X X Open
JP-258B Suction Valve Closed X X X Open
LT-272 Block Valves Closed X X X Open
LT-242 Block Valves Closed X X X Open
JP-263A Suction Valve Closed X X X Open
JP-263B Suction Valve Closed X X X Open
LGT-2040 Block Valve Closed X X X Open
• Sequence: Any steps that must be performed in a fixed sequence shall be clearly
identified.
EXAMPLE
7.2 Close the following hydraulic valves to isolate the control unit. The following
steps must be performed in the order listed below.
7.2.1 Charging riser isolation valve (V113).
7.2.2 Insert riser isolation valve (V101).
• Limits and Setpoints: Whenever limits and setpoints are used, ensure that they
conform to the following requirements:
a. They are expressed in quantitative terms.
b. They are expressed as a range with a midpoint rather than a point value.
c. Units of measurement are specified where the range is compatible with the units
of measurement on the instrument used by the operator and/or technician.
EXAMPLE Correct: Incorrect:
270 - 300 psig 285 ± 15 psig
or or
300 psig (270-300 psig) 300 psig ± 10%
• Calculations: Whenever calculations are required, ensure that adequate space is

provided within the procedure to perform the computations, record the results and
record (sign-off) an independent review.

Revision: 0
Training Guidelines
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # TRG-099

EXAMPLE
6.2 Using Table 1, calculate the difference in standard cubic feet per minute (scfm)
between steam flow and feedwater flow for each steam generator:
Steam Readings Difference

Generator 2 Instruments
A Steam Flow FIC-1A _______ scfm _______ scfm
Feedwater Flow FIC-2A _______ scfm
B Steam Flow FIC-1B _______ scfm _______ scfm
Feedwater Flow FIC-2B _______ scfm
Performed by:_________________________ Reviewed by:____________________
• Contingencies: Provide instructions for all reasonable contingencies as follows:

a. Contingency instructions shall be expressed so that the contingency precedes the
action statement. (i.g., If ____ then _____ ).
b. Contingency instructions shall be easy to understand.
c. Information shall be organized to support decision-making, if required.
EXAMPLE
1. Monitor the reactor coolant pump motor ammeter (AI-987) for five (5) minutes.
1.1 If reading is 600 amps or greater and not decreasing, then go to step 12, page 4.
1.2 If reading is less than 600 amps or decreasing, then continue.
• Referencing Other Procedures: A procedure shall contain all the information

necessary to perform the activity. Referencing other procedures should be avoided;
however, if it is necessary, the applicable section(s), paragraph(s) and page(s) must be
specified. Any referenced procedure must also be listed under the Reference Section
of the procedure.
• Coordinated Procedures: If more than one person is required to perform the
procedure, the procedure shall be written for the person responsible for coordinating
the activity. When a coordinated procedure is performed, the following information
shall be provided:
a. Checklist for recording that the action has been completed and identification of
the person performing the action.
b. If special communication is required for coordination, the equipment must also be
specified in the introduction section of the procedure.
EXAMPLE
7.12 The following sequence will isolate a hydraulic control unit during reactor
operation.
7.12.1 The on-duty control room operator (RO), or designee and the auxiliary
operator (AO) shall establish sound powered-phone communication
between the control room and the hydraulic control unit to be isolated.
__________ / ___________
RO AO

Revision: 0
Training Guidelines
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # TRG-099

7.12.2 The RO, or designee, shall fully insert the control rod to position zero.
7.12.3 The RO, or designee, shall direct the AO to close the following
hydraulic control unit isolation valves. The following sequence must be
performed in the order listed.
7.12.3.1. Charging-water riser isolation valve (V113).
__________/__________
RO AO
7.12.3.2. Insert riser isolation valve (V101).
__________/___________
RO AO
Maintenance Procedures
Maintenance procedures are similar to operational procedures in style and format;
however, there are a few differences that should be noted, as follows.
Introduction Section: In addition to the normal operating requirements, the maintenance
procedure shall:
• Specifically state the technical skill level that is required to perform the stated task.
• Designate the specific equipment to which the procedure is applicable.
• Specify the number of persons required to perform the procedure.
• Specify any follow-up action, test or procedure which must be performed upon the
completion of a maintenance procedure and whom to notify.
Emergency Procedures
Emergency procedures are similar to standard procedures in style and format; however,
there are a few differences that shall be noted, as follows:
Introduction Section: There is no section for required equipment or prerequisites. There
shall be a section entitled Initial Indications, which defines initial indicators that would
help to determine (troubleshoot) the type of emergency the operator is encountering.
Procedure Section: The procedure section of an emergency procedure shall be divided
into the following two sections:
• Immediate Actions, which are actions performed by the operator, usually from
memory, required to bring the emergency condition under control. If these actions
were performed from memory, the operator shall retrace all steps taken to determine
that all necessary actions were performed. There will be a check-off for each step so
the operator can verify that all steps were actually performed.
• Supplementary Actions, which are actions that will either return the plant or
equipment to a stable condition or secure the plant or equipment for further inspection
and/or maintenance. These steps are not performed from memory.
Temporary Procedures
When writing temporary procedures, use the same style and format used in other
procedures. However, a temporary procedure shall be identified as a "TEMPORARY"
and have an expiration date. Procedures shall be developed and written for all systems
operations that address the following, as applicable:

Revision: 0
Training Guidelines
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # TRG-099

• System Initial Startup
• System Normal Startup
• System Normal Operations
• System Normal Shutdown
• System Emergency Shutdown
• System Emergency Operations
• System Temporary Operations, as applicable
• System Startup following a turnaround or after an emergency shutdown
In addition, these procedures will address the following:
• Operating limits
• Consequences of deviation
• Steps required to correct or avoid deviation
• Safety and health considerations
• Safety systems and their functions
Training
Initially, each employee presently involved in operations and maintenance and each
employee prior to being involved in operating or maintaining a newly assigned
equipment or system, shall be trained in the operating and maintenance procedures. The
training shall include emphasis on specific safety, environmental and health hazards;
emergency operations including shutdown; and safe work practices applicable to the
employee's job tasks for that equipment or system.
Refresher training shall be provided at least every three years and more often if
necessary. Each employee involved in operating an equipment/system shall be trained to
ensure that the employee understands and adheres to the current operation and
maintenance practices of the equipment/ system. The Asset Manager, in consultation
with the employees involved in operating the equipment/system, shall determine the
appropriate frequency of refresher training.
Procedure Evaluation (Criteria) Checklist
The checklist attached to this procedure shall be used to verify that procedures meet all
requirements described in this guideline.
3.4 Records
Master Files
All procedures must be kept in a hard copy and an electronic copy Master File. These
will be stored in a secure location and access to them will be available upon approval of
the person assigned as Document Control.
Develop/Revise
When a procedure is being revised, the developer will obtain a copy of the current
procedure. If the procedure has not yet been developed, the developer will draft the
procedure. The procedure can be revised from either a hard copy or an electronic file.
Once the procedure is drafted, the developer will route the procedure for review. A cover
page shall be attached to the draft procedure with signatures and dates for all reviewers
and for final approval.

Revision: 0
Training Guidelines
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # TRG-099
3.4 Records (Continued)

Incorporation of Comments
After the appropriate individuals have reviewed a procedure, the comments from these
reviews will be incorporated into the draft procedure by the developer. The developer
will then send the procedure off for final approval.
Final Approval
The person assigned as final approval will review the document, note any changes
required and forward the document to Document Control for inclusion into the procedure
Master Files. Document Control will file the new procedure or, if the procedure was
revised, develop a revision sheet and ensure that all field copies receive the revised
procedure.
Training Records
The Asset Manager shall ascertain that each employee involved in operating an
equipment/system has received and understood the required training.
The Asset Manager shall prepare a record that contains the identity of the employee, date
of training and the means used to verify that the employee understood the training.
Verification shall include written tests, oral examination and/or walkdown of the
equipment/system.
Training records shall be maintained as long as individual is an employee of the
Company.
4. References
and Emergencies
• CFR 49, Part 193 Section 2503, Operating Procedures
4.2 Procedures from Various Assets
4.3 Operating Practices of Various Assets

Revision: 0
Training Guidelines
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # TRG-099
Procedure Evaluation (Criteria) Checklist
Procedure Checklist Items Yes No

1. Are the following items included on each page:
a. Procedure number (unique and permanently assigned)
b. Title (unique, clear, and accurately define procedure)
c. Date of issue
d. Revision number
e. Page number
2. Does purpose section clearly and concisely describe:
a. Procedure
b. Specific equipment
3. Does the prerequisite section describe:
a. Actions or procedures which must be completed
prior to using the procedure
b. Plant, system, or equipment that must exist prior to using
the procedure
4. Does the required equipment section specify special tools and test
equipment required to perform the procedure.
5. Does the safety section specify precautions that must be observed
in the performance of the procedure
6. Does the reference section:
a. Describe other documents required to perform the
procedure
b. Correctly identify titles, numbers, and revisions of all
referenced documents
7. Are procedures typed in both upper and lower case letters?
8. Are procedure instructions written in short, concise sentences that
represent identifiable steps?
9. If step contains more than two actions, are actions listed rather
than in sentence format?
10. Are Cautions, Warnings, and Notes:
a. Placed immediately prior to the step(s) to which they apply
b. Easily distinguishable from instructional steps
c. Void in the use of action statements?
11. Are graphs, charts, and tables easily readable? (numbers & text)
12. Are sequential steps clearly identified as such?
13. Are the following requirements fulfilled:
a. Limits and setpoints expressed in quantitative terms?
b. Are the limits and setpoints expressed as a range with a
midpoint rather than a point value?
c. Are the units specified with the range compatible with the units
on the instrument used by the operator/ technician?
14. When calculations are required, is adequate space provided within
the procedure to perform the computations, record the results, and
record (sign-off) an independent review?

Revision: 0
Training Guidelines
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # TRG-099
Procedure Checklist Items Yes No

15. Does the procedure meet the following criteria:
a. Provide instructions for all reasonable contingencies?
b. Are contingency instructions:
1) Expressed so that the contingency precedes the
action statement?
2). Written so that they are easy to understand?
c. Is the information organized to support decision-making, if
required?
16. Does equipment (valves, breakers and switches) requiring align-
ment to perform the procedure meet the following requirements:
a. Is each item individually specified?
b. Is each item identified with a unique number or designator?
c. Is position for each item specified?
d. Is space provided to record final position of item?
17. If the procedure specifies an action that must be performed later
or repeated at periodic intervals, does it contain provisions for
alerting the operator to perform the action?
18. Does procedure contain all information necessary to perform an
activity, rather than refer to other procedures?
19. If procedure refers to other procedures for information, are
applicable sections, paragraphs, and pages specified?
20. Do Emergency procedures contain provisions for verifying the
a. Symptoms associated with an emergency were actually
observed?
b. Automatic actions associated with an emergency were
actually observed?
c. Critical immediate operator actions performed from
memory were actually performed?
21. If a follow-on action, test, or procedure must be performed upon
the completion of the procedure, does the procedure, or related
document (e.g., work request) instruct the user as to what follow-
on action is required and whom to notify?
22. If more than one person is required to perform procedure, is
procedure written for person responsible for coordinating activity?
23. Is following information provided for coordinated procedures:
a. Checklist for recording that someone has been directed to
take action and the action has been completed.
b. If coordination requires special communication equipment,
is equipment specified?
24. Does the procedure specifically state the technician's skill level
required to perform the stated task?
25. Is last page clearly identified as such?
26. Do instructional steps within a procedure provide for verification,
with a sign-off line, for each instructional step?
27. Does each unit, at a multiple unit site have it's own unique set of
procedures?
28. Are Temporary Procedures clearly marked to indicate:
a. Is procedure temporary?
b. Expiration date assigned?

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Maintenance Philosophy
Doc. # MSO-001
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements to be followed for the selection, development and
implementation of effective facility maintenance philosophy, systems and programs.
2. Scope
This guideline applies to all “Company” operated facilities except where management directive
and/or economic considerations preclude the implementation of a maintenance system.
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Under this guideline, there are no specific procedures to be developed; however, each
facility shall prepare a maintenance philosophy document that defines the scope of each
of the elements of a maintenance system as they apply to the particular facility. This
document will govern development and implementation of the procedures and systems.
3.2 Considerations
As facilities have evolved in capacity and complexity, the requirements on maintenance
to provide the levels of reliability and availability to meet production and economic
demands have increased accordingly. Often these increased requirements for maintenance
are coupled with constraints on maintenance resources, which means that managed
maintenance is vital to meet the demands with available resources. In simple terms,
management of maintenance is a system whereby maintenance activities become
proactive rather than reactive. This is accomplished through the planning and scheduling
of maintenance activities, which are conducted according to objectively established
equipment criticalities and work priorities. The necessary elements of a system of
managed maintenance are defined below.
Equipment Criticality is an objective ranking of individual items of equipment based on
considerations such as production, reliability, safety and environmental.
Work Priority is an objective system of assigning resources to maintenance activities.
This differs from Equipment Criticality in that the Work Priority for a given item of
equipment can vary depending on circumstances and availability of resources at a given
time.
Work Order System is a structured process for the identification, planning, scheduling,
approval, tracking, completion and history capture of maintenance activities.
Predictive Maintenance is the application of sophisticated monitoring, trending and
analysis of equipment performance to detect deterioration and predict the requirement for
corrective action.
Preventive Maintenance is the more traditional system of applying planned and
scheduled activities to equipment aimed at preventing equipment failures and
breakdowns.
Corrective Maintenance is any maintenance activity with the purpose of correcting a
fault or deficiency in an equipment item. Corrective maintenance activities can be either
planned or unplanned.
Breakdown Maintenance is any maintenance activity that results directly from a fault or
failure of an item of equipment while in service.
Planned Maintenance is a maintenance activity that has been identified beforehand and
has certain requirements such as tasks and resources assigned to the activity. Planned
Maintenance is scheduled according to Equipment Criticality and Work Priority. This is
the most economical utilization of maintenance resources.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # MSO-001

Unplanned Maintenance includes activities that are reactive in nature or initiated by the
failure of critical equipment and are initiated with no consideration for the actual work
requirements and resources required. These are normally unscheduled activities as well.
Generally, the most expensive type of maintenance costing five to twelve times as much
as Planned Maintenance activities to execute.
Maintenance History is the capture, retention and analysis of equipment maintenance
activities and related specific data.
Each of these elements is essential to an effective program for the management of
maintenance; however, the degree to which each of these is applied for any given facility
and location may vary greatly. Below is a discussion of the factors to be considered in
the selection, development and application of these elements.
Prior to the development and implementation of a maintenance system, each facility and
location should analyze a number of factors to determine the appropriate level of for each
of the above elements. Development and implementation shall then proceed accordingly
to generate a site-specific maintenance system. Some of the factors to be analyzed along
with considerations for each are discussed below.
Facility Size and Complexity

The larger and more complex a facility is, the greater the requirements for management
of maintenance becomes. Furthermore, the degree to which each of the elements of the
maintenance system is developed and implemented rises accordingly. Larger facilities
generally require larger maintenance forces, which in turn require better control and
scheduling for efficient utilization. In this situation, a thorough assessment of equipment
criticalities and work priorities along with a structured work order system and effective
maintenance planning and scheduling are necessary for the effective allocation and
control of maintenance resources.
A higher degree of complexity of the equipment in a facility will generally dictate that
sophisticated predictive maintenance techniques are employed to ensure the availability
and reliability of equipment. Less complex equipment may respond to less complex
maintenance techniques, which can be supported by a maintenance staff of lower skills
and experience.
Equipment Throughput and Service Equipment

Service equipment that is operated at a high level of throughput or rated capacity, or
severe service such as high temperatures, pressures or corrosive fluids will require a
much higher degree of maintenance attention. High throughputs contribute to accelerated
wear and deterioration of equipment, which will require more intensive predictive and/or
preventive maintenance activities to detect or prevent accelerated deterioration and
failure. Likewise, equipment in high temperature/pressure service is subject to extra
stress and potential accelerated deterioration.
Certain types of equipment, particularly stationary equipment such as pressure vessels,
towers and exchangers is not responsive to predictive/preventive maintenance techniques
and may require more frequent internal visual inspections to assure reliability. Similarly,
equipment in corrosive service will probably require closer monitoring and more frequent
inspection.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # MSO-001

Qualifications of Maintenance Workforce
The level of experience and skills of the maintenance workforce can have a significant
influence on the maintenance systems employed. For example, many of the predictive
maintenance techniques require that the data developed be analyzed to yield trends and
potential or developing equipment problems. This will require a level of expertise that
may not be readily available in certain locations, which will negate the effectiveness of
using predictive maintenance techniques. As the level of experience and skills drops
within the maintenance workforce, the requirement for closer control and supervision
increases. This requirement is satisfied by more planning and scheduling of maintenance
activities and by more detailed written maintenance procedures.
Location of Facility
The location of the facility can have a significant impact on the on the maintenance
systems and programs selected and implemented. Aside from cultural considerations, the
availability of experienced, skilled maintenance personnel varies widely form one area to
another. The impacts of workforce skills are discussed above. In addition to this, the
availability and quality of support to the maintenance effort can vary from nonexistent to
highly developed. For example, spare parts, materials, specialized services, machine
shops, etc. may not be readily available, forcing the maintenance function to be broader
by inclusion of these functions. Spare parts stocking requirements must take into
consideration the availability or unavailability of local supply.
Local Regulations
Any maintenance system must comply with local statutory requirements for maintenance
of equipment and facilities. These requirements should be thoroughly researched and
identified before maintenance system development is initiated. Likewise, certifying
authorities and insurance carriers may also have certain requirements that must be
considered in the development of maintenance systems and programs.
The above list is not all-inclusive of the factors to be considered in determining the
breadth and depth of maintenance systems and programs to be implemented. However, it
is intended to serve as reference and guidelines for the facility to follow in determining
the most effective and economical systems for their facility and location. No single
maintenance system or programs can satisfy the unique requirements of different types of
operations throughout the world. In order for the maintenance system to be effective, it
must follow the general principles of a managed maintenance system with careful
consideration of unique local factors and requirements.
3.4 Reports
The maintenance philosophy document described above will constitute the record of
compliance with this guideline.
4. Reference
4.1 Enron Global Asset Operating Maintenance Guidelines
• MSO-003, Maintenance Work-order System
• MSO-004, Equipment Criticality Assessment
• MSO-005, Maintenance Planning and Scheduling
• MSO-006, Maintenance History Capture and Review

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Selection and Implementation of a Computerized
Maintenance Management System (CMMS) Doc. # MSO-002
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for the selection and implementation of a
Computerized Maintenance Management System (CMMS) consistent with the facility
maintenance philosophy and requirements.
2. Scope
and/or economic considerations preclude the use of a Computerized Maintenance Management
System.
3. Guideline
3.1 General
The Computerized Maintenance Management Systems (CMMS) is one of the most
effective and widely accepted tools developed for the management of maintenance.
Multitudes of systems are commercially available and vary considerably in cost,
complexity and functionality. The most commonly encountered mistake made by
maintenance organizations in selecting a CMMS is failure to identify specific
requirements before purchasing and implementing a CMMS. Frequently, the result is that
the system fails to meet expectations and is often abandoned. This guideline is intended
to assist in avoiding this repeated mistake.
3.2 Considerations
The selection of a CMMS should only be made after careful consideration of the
following of factors.
Maintenance Philosophy (Described in Guideline MSO-001, Maintenance Philosophy).
Preparation of this document will enable the organization to focus on specific needs and
circumstances to facilitate the selection of a CMMS that meets these requirements rather
than attempting to tailor the organization's needs to a particular CMMS.
Total Cost: The total cost of a CMMS typically includes initial system purchase,
development of databases (required for system functionality) and personnel training.
Compatibility with Corporate Standards/Existing Systems: Many organizations have
developed standards for computer software that requires the new software to comply with
the standards. The basis for these standards is usually compatibility with existing
systems or the ability to provide “in-house” support for new systems. If such standards
exist, it is useful to enlist the support of the Information Technology group in the
selection of a CMMS. A common mistake in the selection process is allowing the IT
group to drive the selection of the CMMS, which often results in a system that does not
satisfy the Maintenance Philosophy and the needs of the maintenance group.
There is a strong possibility that the CMMS will need to communicate with other existing
systems such as accounting, payroll, materials and purchasing. Although these are useful
capabilities, these requirements should not be allowed to override the needs of the
maintenance group in selecting the CMMS. Due consideration must be given to these
factors but any compromises made in the selection of a CMMS should not be at the
expense of the maintenance needs.
CMMS Functionality: The basic CMMS functions typically include Work Order
Processing, Job Planning and Scheduling, Preventive Maintenance, Resource Allocation
and History Capture. Many systems offer additional functions such as maintenance cost
accumulation and reporting, spare parts and materials management, failure analysis,
trending and ad-hoc report generation. Evaluation and selection of these additional
functions can result in a CMMS that better serves the needs of maintenance.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Selection and Implementation of a Computerized
Maintenance Management System (CMMS) Doc. # MSO-002

System Support: The availability of technical support, either in-house or by the vendor,
for the CMMS is an important consideration in the selection process. In a remote or
foreign location, neither form of technical support may be readily available and a less
complex system that requires minimal technical support may be the best choice.
Database: Minimum requirements of facility and equipment specific databases include a
Master Equipment List or Equipment Register, a Preventive/Predictive Maintenance
Procedures List or Library and a Preventive Maintenance Schedule.
Prior to selecting a CMMS, operating companies shall conduct an evaluation of their
specific needs and document the results of that evaluation to serve as a specification for
the selection and implementation of a CMMS. If the decision to defer CMMS purchase
and implementation is made, justification for that decision must be thoroughly
documented.
Personnel training conducted as a result of CMMS implementation shall be documented
and maintained in employees’ training records.
3.4 Reports
Under this guideline, no specific reporting is required; however, the documented
specification described above will be the record of compliance with this guideline.
4. Reference
• MSO-001, Maintenance Philosophy
• MSO-003, Maintenance Work Order System

Revision: 0
Maintenance Operating Guidelines
Issued: Nov-1999
Maintenance Work Order System
Doc. # MSO-003
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements to assist in the development and implementation of a
Maintenance Work Order System.
2. Scope
and/or economic considerations preclude implementation of a work order system.
3. Guideline
3.1 General
A Maintenance Work Order System provides an efficient process for approval, planning,
scheduling, monitoring, control and documentation of maintenance activities.
If a Computerized Maintenance Management System (CMMS) is utilized, many of the
steps in the work order process are predetermined as integral functions within the
CMMS. Nevertheless, these will be made a part of the flow chart and the accompanying
procedures will be required. A CMMS is the preferred vehicle for management of
maintenance by operating companies.
3.2 Considerations
A work order system shall consist of a flow chart that provides a road map for the
processing and handling of the work order from inception to closure. Each step in this
process shall be clearly identified as well as the individuals, groups or departments
responsible for executing each step. In addition to the flow chart, the actions,
responsibilities and authorities of each individual, group or department for their
function(s) within the system shall be specified in an accompanying procedure document.
To assist in the development and documentation of the Maintenance Work Order System,
the basic steps in the process are defined below.
Work Order Initiation: Identification of a requirement to perform maintenance work.
This requirement must be communicated to the maintenance group in the form of a Work
Request.
Work Request Review and Approval: Often the initiator of a work request does not have
the full perspective necessary to define and prioritize the action that is requested. A
position at a level to possess this broader perspective should be designated for review of
the work request to ensure the proper action is identified and assigned the appropriate
priority. Additionally, a work request is a request to commit resources to execute the
requested work. Designated expenditure approval authorities should be defined and the
Work Request approved at a level consistent with the anticipated expenditure.
Work Order Prioritization clearly defines priorities assigned to work requests. Work
priorities and definitions shall be developed for use in assigning work priorities. The
work priority and the equipment criticality ranking are used to assign resources.
Planning: An approved work request should be directed to the maintenance planning
function for work task and resource identification. Guideline MSO-005, Maintenance
Work Planning and Scheduling, addresses the maintenance planning function.
Scheduling: The work or activity is placed on the maintenance schedule according to the
assigned priority, the equipment criticality and the availability of maintenance resources.
Scheduling is addressed further in Guideline MSO-005, Maintenance Work Planning and
Scheduling.

Revision: 0
Maintenance Operating Guidelines
Issued: Nov-1999
Maintenance Work Order System
Doc. # MSO-003

Execution of maintenance work remains the responsibility of the maintenance teams.
Reporting or regular feedback to the planning and scheduling function is necessary to
ensure that maintenance resources are utilized efficiently. Information on work status
allows the schedule to be maintained and adjusted for work completed, ongoing work or
work delayed for any reason. The system and procedures shall ensure that a structured
system of feedback is established.
Completion: Acceptance and approval of the work performed is required before
maintenance is considered complete. Record work details and resources used. (See
Guideline MSO-006, Maintenance History Capture and Review). Return completed Work
Order to planning for closure of the Work Order.
There can be variations to the Work Order process but the basics described are essential
to the efficient conduct of maintenance activities.
3.4 Records
Retain work order documentation including scope of maintenance work performed,
results, test data, etc. for the life of the facility.
4 References
• MSO-002, Selection and Implementation of a Computerized Maintenance
Management System (CMMS)

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Equipment Criticality Assessment
Doc. # MSO-004
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for assigning equipment criticality rankings using a
systematic and objective methodology.
2. Scope
and/or economic considerations preclude the implementation of a maintenance system.
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Several systems and methodologies are available for the evaluation and ranking of
equipment criticality. It is important that a systematic and objective approach be
employed regardless of the methodology to ensure equality of ranking over various
facilities.
3.2 Considerations
Under this guideline, an equipment criticality assessment shall be performed. The results
of the criticality assessment shall serve as the basis for assigning maintenance work
priorities and allocation of resources.
The selection of factors to be evaluated and the criteria for ranking each factor requires
that they are clearly defined and can be applied objectively. The weighting of the factors
in establishing an overall criticality may vary from location to location. An example
would be the weighting of safety and environmental factors in a densely populated or
environmentally sensitive area versus a remote area. Factors to be evaluated include:
• The importance of the system in which the equipment is installed to the overall
facility production and profitability
• The importance of the equipment item relative to the operation of the system in which
it is installed
• The safety consequences associated with a failure of the equipment item
• The environmental consequences associated with a failure of the equipment item
• The inherent reliability of the equipment item
• The maintainability of the equipment item
For each of the factors selected for use in the criticality assessment, a specific set of
criteria for ranking the item for each factor will be required. Data sources such as
equipment reliability statistics, the facility's hazards analysis, and facility design data will
be useful in setting these criteria as well as ranking equipment against the established
criteria.
A team comprised of members from operations, maintenance, technical and management
teams should perform the equipment criticality assessment. The use of a facilitator to
coordinate the assessment is beneficial and encouraged.
3.3 Records
Retain the results of the Equipment Criticality Assessment.
Periodic reviews shall be performed to ensure that valid rankings are maintained.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Equipment Criticality Assessment
Doc. # MSO-004
4. Reference

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Maintenance Work Planning and Scheduling
Doc. # MSO-005
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for the development and implementation of
Maintenance Planning and Scheduling functions.
2. Scope
and/or economic considerations preclude the establishment of Maintenance Planning and
Scheduling functions.
3. Guideline
3.1 General
This guideline is not intended to detail the responsibilities and actions of the maintenance
planning function but only serves to provide general direction for implementation of this
function.
This guideline has been prepared to assist each facility in establishing and implementing
the maintenance planning/scheduling function. Each facility, in conjunction with
defining the facility maintenance philosophy, implementing a maintenance work order
system and specifying a CMMS shall evaluate the specific requirements for maintenance
planning/scheduling and document the roles, responsibilities and duties of the position in
the form of a job description and procedure(s).
3.2 Considerations
Activities such as preventive and predictive maintenance, scheduled inspections and
overhauls and plant turnarounds are normally viewed as planned maintenance. Typically,
other types of maintenance activities have been performed as a reaction to an equipment
fault or failure and receive minimal or no planning. It is this category of maintenance
activity that should be targeted for planning and scheduling.
Planner/Scheduler Qualifications: Effective maintenance planning and scheduling
requires personnel who have the following minimum general qualifications:
• Effective written and oral communications skills
• Computer literacy if a CMMS is utilized
• Experience as a maintenance technician or craftsman
The planner/scheduler will be required to act as liaison between operations, maintenance,
logistics and contractors for work priorities, schedules and resources and will be
frequently called on to resolve conflicts in these areas. Where a CMMS is employed by
the maintenance organization; the planner/scheduler will require substantial computer
knowledge to effectively utilize the CMMS. Planning of maintenance work requires
knowledge of the equipment, routines and techniques used to maintain and repair that
equipment.
Planner/Scheduler Staff: Experience has shown that effective planning and scheduling
of maintenance work requires one planner/scheduler for each 20 craftsmen or technicians
in the maintenance group.
Planner/Scheduler Duties: The planning role requires the planner to analyze the work to
be performed; define the tasks necessary to execute the work; estimate the resources in
manpower, time, tools, parts and materials required to complete the work; and document
the job plan to be used by maintenance.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Maintenance Work Planning and Scheduling
Doc. # MSO-005

For ongoing maintenance work, the planner is responsible for monitoring work progress,
updating daily status reporting and modifying work plans and schedules, if necessary.
For completed work, the planner is responsible for ensuring that the required completion
documentation is obtained and history records are updated as well as maintaining and
revising job plans for future usage.
The scheduling function requires the planner to evaluate maintenance work priorities
versus production requirements as well as availability of equipment and maintenance
resources and prepare maintenance work schedules that maximize the use of resources to
meet work priorities and production requirements. The schedule should not usurp the
authority of maintenance supervisors and foremen to assign their personnel to perform
the work but should only communicate the work requirements for a given period of time.
The scheduling function also requires that work progress be monitored for status and
completion and that the schedule be updated accordingly.
Although the specific functions and duties will vary from facility to facility depending on
several factors, the underlying objective is to maximize the efficiency of the maintenance
function through the implementation and application of planning and scheduling.
3.4 Reporting
Compliance with this guideline will be through a documented evaluation of the
maintenance planning/scheduling function for each facility and by the documented job
description and procedures for the position(s).
4. Reference


Revision:
0
Maintenance Guidelines Issued: Nov-1999
Maintenance History Capture and Review
Doc. # MSO-006
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements to assist operating facilities in establishing a
structured methodology for the capture of equipment maintenance history and the review and
analysis of historical data.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Maintenance history is a valuable tool in identifying equipment with recurring problems
requiring excessive maintenance and for analyzing and solving equipment problems.
This process requires the complete and accurate capture of equipment maintenance
history in order to be effective. A system that provides for the capture of equipment
maintenance history and for regular review and analysis of this data can significantly
reduce equipment maintenance costs.
3.2 Considerations
Each facility shall examine its needs and capabilities and develop a program and
supporting procedures to establish a program of maintenance history capture, review and
analysis.
All maintenance work performed shall be documented and retained in a central location
in order to perform review and analysis of historical data.
A Computerized Maintenance Management System (CMMS) provides for recording and
retention of maintenance history and ready access of that data by various means. If a
CMMS is not used, it is necessary to maintain hard copy maintenance history records.
Use of an equipment maintenance log will facilitate the access and review.
To benefit from the capture of maintenance history, a program of periodic review of the
data must be established. The focus of the review shall be to identify trends of excessive
maintenance requirements for a particular type of equipment or to identify recurring
problems and failures. Identification of either trend should trigger an analysis to
determine the cause and to develop and implement solutions to prevent future problems.
The use of a system of failure codes is beneficial in performing this analysis and, in fact,
most CMMS’s provide this capability.
The history analysis is also beneficial in determining the effectiveness of
preventive/predictive maintenance programs and in identifying the need for program
modification. A higher incidence of failures and repairs could indicate the need to
intensify preventive/predictive maintenance while no failures or repairs over a period of
time could indicate that the preventive/predictive activities are effective.
3.4 Reports
Capture and retention of maintenance history shall be per the procedures developed under
this guideline.

Revision:
0
Maintenance Guidelines Issued: Nov-1999
Maintenance History Capture and Review
Doc. # MSO-006
4. Reference

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Equipment Spare Parts Review and Selection
Doc. # MSO-007
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for assisting operating facilities to establish a
structured methodology for the review of equipment spare parts and selection of parts to
effectively support the maintenance requirements.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Appropriate inventory levels of equipment spare parts minimize downtime without tying
up operating funds. The objective is to analyze the contributing factors and arrive at the
spare parts requirements necessary to ensure the desired level of equipment availability at
the lowest amount of spare parts inventory.
3.2 Considerations
Each facility shall designate a review team comprised of the appropriate maintenance
disciplines and perform a systematic review of all equipment in the facility. The results
of the review shall be documented in the form of a Recommended Spare Parts List
(RSPL), which will outline the required stock levels and communicate this requirement to
purchasing and warehousing.
Arriving at the appropriate stock of spare parts for a particular facility requires that the
following factors must be evaluated to arrive at the proper stock of spare parts. Some of
the factors that contribute to the inventory requirements include the following:
Facility Location: A facility located in or near a highly industrialized area may take
advantage of the local infrastructure to readily obtain spare parts, thus reducing the
inventory requirements. Absence of a local supply base could increase the inventory
requirements.
Manufacturing Lead Time: For highly complex equipment (such as turbines)
manufacturers do not maintain spares. Certain components are produced only on receipt
of a customer order. These items must be evaluated to identify stocking requirements.
Exchange Programs: Availability of manufacturers’ exchange programs for major
components in the event of a failure should be identified.
Commonality of Equipment: The commonality of equipment or the interchangeability of
parts between equipment should be identified. A high level of commonality or
interchangeability can significantly reduce the total spare parts requirements.
Equipment Service: Equipment in severe service such as high pressures, extreme high or
low temperatures, corrosive or abrasive materials, is subject to increased wear and failure
rates requiring higher than normal spare parts.
Maintenance Philosophy: The stock of spare parts should be consistent with the
established maintenance philosophy. Reliance on preventive/predictive maintenance will
reduce the requirements for certain types of spare parts while possibly increasing the
requirement for others, such as oil filters.
Manufacturer’s Recommendations: Most equipment manufacturers supply
recommendations for spare parts. However, these are frequently “one size fits all” and
does not take into consideration any of the above factors.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Equipment Spare Parts Review and Selection
Doc. # MSO-007

Spare parts shall be categorized into replacement types to determine the potential usage
of the parts. These categories can be defined as follows.
• Routine Replacement Spares: Parts such as oil filters, which are routinely replaced
on a scheduled basis.
• Wearing Spares: Parts that wear out over time, usually with some level of
predictability. Purchase of these parts may be deferred until near the time of required
replacement.
• Insurance Spares: Typically high value parts having a high criticality such as turbine,
pump and compressor rotating elements where unavailability of equipment has severe
financial consequences.
3.4 Records
The RSPL, which is developed under this guideline, shall be reviewed and updated on
any substantial change in any of the evaluation criteria.
4. Reference

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Centrifugal Compressor Maintenance
Doc. # EMP-001
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements to be followed for the development of effective
maintenance procedures and programs for centrifugal compressors.
2. Scope
This guideline applies to all “Company” operated facilities in which centrifugal compressors are
installed, its employees and its contractors except where superseded by more stringent local
standards.
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Each facility responsible for operating and maintaining centrifugal compressors shall
evaluate the maintenance requirements for those compressors and shall prepare written
procedures for the preventive/predictive maintenance activities deemed appropriate based
on the considerations presented in this guideline. The content of those procedures shall
contain the data described in the “Preventive/Predictive Maintenance” section in this
guideline.
3.2 Considerations
Centrifugal compressors covered under this guideline are typically large, complex units.
An Equipment Criticality Assessment (refer to Guideline MSO-004, Equipment
Criticality Assessment) shall enable each facility to determine the relative criticality of
each centrifugal compressor installed in the facility. Since centrifugal compressors vary
greatly in size, design and complexity depending on manufacturer, service and location,
maintenance procedures must be based on the manufacturer's specifications and
recommendations with appropriate modifications for site-specific requirements.
Maintenance of centrifugal compressors generally falls into one of two types:
Preventive/Predictive Maintenance or Corrective Maintenance. Industry experience has
shown that the performance of corrective maintenance is five to twelve times as costly as
the performance of preventive maintenance and that centrifugal compressors respond
favorably to preventive maintenance. The following is presented as a guide in the
development of a structured maintenance program and procedures for centrifugal
compressors.
Preventive/Predictive Maintenance
Manufacturer's specifications and recommendations should be thoroughly reviewed
before developing site-specific maintenance procedures. If a Computerized Maintenance
Management System (CMMS) is utilized, the format of the procedures shall also consider
CMMS requirements. A CMMS is the preferred vehicle for maintenance management.
At a minimum, a maintenance procedure shall define the following:
• A statement of the task(s) to be performed
• The frequency at which the task(s) should be performed
• Special safety requirements for the performance of the task(s)
• Special tools or equipment required
• Spare parts or lubricants required
• Estimated manpower by skill and quantity to perform the task(s)
• Estimate of the time required to perform the task(s)
• Reference to manufacturer's special requirements, where applicable.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Centrifugal Compressor Maintenance
Doc. # EMP-001
In developing preventive/predictive maintenance procedures for centrifugal compressors,

the following techniques or activities shall be considered:
• Equipment performance monitoring and analysis
• Trending of equipment operating parameters
• Lube oil analysis
• Vibration monitoring and analysis
• Calibration and testing of control, alarm and shutdown devices
• Lube oil and filter change
• Alignment checks
• Thermographic monitoring
• Acoustical monitoring and analysis
Corrective Maintenance
Corrective or repair maintenance, by nature, is unpredictable and does not readily permit
the development of specific repair procedures. Manufacturers will usually address certain
repair and inspection procedures in the maintenance instructions. When a corrective
maintenance procedure is performed, it shall be documented in a procedure format that
contains the elements described in this guideline, resulting in a reference library of
specific repair procedures.
3.4 Records
Reporting under this guideline shall be in compliance with Guideline MSO-006,
Maintenance History Capture and Review.
4. References
4.1 Equipment Manufacturer’s Maintenance Instructions

4.4 Enron Global Asset Operations Environmental Implementation Guidelines

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Reciprocating Compressor Maintenance
Doc. # EMP-002
1. Purpose
maintenance procedures and programs for reciprocating compressors.
2. Scope
This guideline applies to all “Company” operated facilities in which reciprocating compressors
are installed, its employees and its contractors except where superseded by more stringent local
standards.
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Each facility responsible for operating and maintaining reciprocating compressors shall
evaluate the maintenance requirements for those compressors and shall prepare written
contain the data described in the “Preventive/Predictive Maintenance” section in this
guideline.
3.2 Considerations
Reciprocating compressors covered under this guideline may be small, relatively simple
units such as plant air compressors or large, complex units such as process and
transmission gas compressors. An Equipment Criticality Assessment (refer to Guideline
MSO-004, Equipment Criticality Assessment) shall enable each facility to determine the
relative criticality of each reciprocating compressor installed in the facility. Since
reciprocating compressors vary greatly in size, design and complexity depending on the
manufacturer, service and location, maintenance procedures must be based on the
manufacturer's specifications and recommendations with appropriate modifications for
site-specific requirements.
Maintenance of reciprocating compressors generally falls into one of two types:
the performance of preventive maintenance and that reciprocating compressors respond
favorably to preventive maintenance. The following is presented to guide each facility in
the development of a structured maintenance program and procedures for reciprocating
compressors.
Management System (CMMS) is utilized, the format of the procedures shall also consider
the CMMS requirements. A CMMS is the preferred vehicle for maintenance
management.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Reciprocating Compressor Maintenance
Doc. # EMP-002

• Reference to manufacturer's special requirements, where applicable.
In developing preventive/predictive maintenance procedures for reciprocating
compressors, the following techniques or activities shall be considered:
• Electronic compressor analysis (Beta or Recip-trap)
contain the elements described above, resulting in a reference library of specific repair
procedures.
3.4 Records
4. References


Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Rotary Compressor Maintenance
Doc. # EMP-003
1. Purpose
maintenance procedures and programs for rotary compressors.
2. Scope
This guideline applies to all “Company” operated facilities in which rotary compressors are
standards.
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Each facility responsible for operating and maintaining rotary compressors shall evaluate
the maintenance requirements for those compressors and shall prepare written procedures
for the preventive/predictive maintenance activities deemed appropriate based on the
considerations presented in this guideline. The content of those procedures shall contain
the data described in the “Preventive/Predictive Maintenance” section in this guideline.
3.2 Considerations
Rotary compressors covered under this guideline are usually in the lower horsepower
range but frequently operate at high speeds and volumes and contain close internal
tolerances. An Equipment Criticality Assessment (refer to Guideline MSO-004,
Equipment Criticality Assessment) shall enable each facility to determine the relative
criticality of each rotary compressor installed in the facility. Since rotary compressors
vary in size, design and complexity depending on manufacturer, service and location,
maintenance procedures must be based on the manufacturer's specifications and
recommendations with appropriate modifications for site-specific requirements.
Maintenance of rotary compressors generally falls into one of two types:
the performance of preventive maintenance and that rotary compressors respond
favorably to preventive maintenance. The following is presented as a guide in the
development of a structured maintenance program and procedures for rotary
compressors.
Management System (CMMS) is utilized, the format and content of the procedures shall
also consider the CMMS requirements.
At a minimum, maintenance procedure shall define the following:
• Reference to manufacturer's special requirements, where applicable

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Rotary Compressor Maintenance
Doc. # EMP-003

In developing preventive/predictive maintenance procedures for rotary compressors, the
following techniques or activities shall be considered:
contains the elements described in this guideline, resulting in a reference library of
specific repair procedures.
3.4 Records
4. References

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Centrifugal Pump Maintenance
Doc. # EMP-004
1. Purpose
maintenance procedures and programs for centrifugal pumps.
2. Scope
This guideline applies to all “Company” operated facilities in which centrifugal pumps are
standards.
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Each facility responsible for operating and maintaining centrifugal pumps shall evaluate
the maintenance requirements for those pumps and shall prepare written procedures for
the preventive/predictive maintenance activities deemed appropriate based on the
3.2 Considerations
Centrifugal pumps covered under this guideline vary greatly in size, design and
complexity depending on manufacturer, service and location. An Equipment Criticality
Assessment (refer to Guideline MSO-004, Equipment Criticality Assessment) shall
enable each facility to determine the relative criticality of each centrifugal pump installed
in the facility. Maintenance procedures must be based on manufacturer’s specifications
and recommendations with appropriate modifications for site-specific conditions and
requirements.
Maintenance of centrifugal pumps generally falls into one of two types:
the performance of preventive maintenance and that centrifugal pumps respond favorably
to preventive maintenance. The following is presented as a guide in the development of a
structured maintenance program and procedures for centrifugal pumps.
Manufacturer's specifications and recommendations for all complex rotating equipment
shall be thoroughly reviewed before developing site-specific maintenance procedures.
Requirements of a CMMS shall also be taken into consideration, where applicable.
• The frequency at which the task(s) shall be performed
• Safety requirements for the performance of the task(s)
• An estimate of the time required to perform the task(s)
• Reference to manufacturer’s special requirements, where applicable

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Centrifugal Pump Maintenance
Doc. # EMP-004
In developing preventive/predictive maintenance procedures for centrifugal pumps, the

• Calibration and testing of control, alarm and shutdown devices.
• Internal inspections
the development of specific repair procedures. Usually manufacturers shall address
certain repair and inspection procedures in the maintenance instructions. However, in a
structured maintenance environment a corrective maintenance procedure, when
performed, shall be documented in a procedure format, which contains the elements
described above, resulting in a reference library of specific repair procedures.
3.4 Records
4. References

4.4 Enron Global Asset Operations Environmental Implementation Guide

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Positive Displacement Pump Maintenance
Doc. # EMP-005
1. Purpose
maintenance procedures and programs for positive displacement pumps.
2. Scope
This guideline applies to all “Company” operated facilities in which positive displacement
pumps are installed, its employees and its contractors except where superseded by more stringent
local standards.
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Each facility responsible for operating and maintaining positive displacement pumps
shall evaluate the maintenance requirements for those pumps and shall prepare written
on considerations presented in this guideline. The content of the procedures shall contain
3.2 Considerations
Positive displacement pumps vary greatly in size, design and complexity depending on
manufacturer, service and location. Maintenance procedures must be based on
manufacturer’s specifications and recommendations with appropriate modifications for
site-specific conditions and requirements. An Equipment Criticality Assessment (refer to
Guideline MSO-004, Equipment Criticality Assessment) shall enable each facility to
determine the relative criticality of each positive displacement pump installed in the
facility.
Maintenance of positive displacement pumps generally falls into one of two types:
performance of preventive maintenance. In the case of small positive displacement
pumps such as chemical injection pumps, it is beneficial to evaluate the economics of
repair versus replacement to determine the best maintenance scheme to follow. The
following is presented as a guide in the development of a structured maintenance
program and procedures for positive displacement pumps.
before developing site-specific maintenance procedures for complex rotating equipment.
If a Computerized Maintenance Management System (CMMS) is utilized, the format of
the procedures will be governed to some degree by the CMMS requirements.
• Reference to manufacturer's special requirements, where applicable

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Positive Displacement Pump Maintenance
Doc. # EMP-005

In developing preventive/predictive maintenance procedures for positive displacement
pumps, the following techniques or activities shall be considered:
repair and inspection procedures in the maintenance instructions. However, when a
corrective maintenance procedure is performed in a structured maintenance environment,
it shall be documented in a procedure format that contains the elements described in this
guideline, resulting in a reference library of specific repair procedures.
3.4 Reporting
Reporting under this guideline shall be as per Guideline MSO-006, Maintenance History
Capture and Review. Written maintenance procedures shall be retained on-site and shall
be reviewed and updated, as appropriate.
4. References
4.2 Enron Global Asset Operating Guidelines
4.4 Enron Global Asset Operations Environmental Implementation Guide

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Pressure Vessel Maintenance
Doc. # EMP-006
1. Purpose
maintenance procedures and programs for pressure vessels.
2. Scope
This guideline applies to all “Company” operated facilities in which pressure vessels are
standards.
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Each facility responsible for operating and maintaining pressure vessels shall evaluate the
maintenance requirements for those vessels and shall prepare written procedures for the
preventive/predictive maintenance activities deemed appropriate based on the
3.2 Considerations
Maintenance of pressure vessels covered under this guideline, regardless of criticality,
requires special consideration and planning to be safe, effective and economical. An
Equipment Criticality Assessment (refer to Guideline MSO-004, Equipment Criticality
Assessment) shall enable each facility to determine the relative criticality of each
pressure vessel installed in the facility. In general, pressure vessel manufacturers do not
supply recommendations for maintenance requirements; however, local regulations and
insurance carriers may have specific requirements for pressure vessel maintenance and
inspections.
Maintenance of pressure vessels generally falls into one of two types:
the performance of preventive maintenance. The preventive/predictive maintenance
techniques available for pressure vessels are limited. Rigorous application of these
techniques can prevent failures that, in the case of pressure vessels, may be catastrophic.
The following is presented as a guide in the development of a structured maintenance
program and procedures for pressure vessels.
Local regulations as well as insurance carrier and certifying agency requirements shall be
thoroughly reviewed for all pressure vessels before developing site-specific maintenance
procedures. If the facility utilizes a Computerized Maintenance Management System
(CMMS), the format and content of the procedures shall be governed to some degree by
the CMMS requirements.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Pressure Vessel Maintenance
Doc. # EMP-006

• Reference to manufacturer's special requirements
In developing preventive/predictive maintenance procedures for pressure vessels, the
• Ultrasonic thickness testing
• Radiographic examination
Repairs to coded pressure vessels may be subject to code requirements in order to
maintain vessel certification. Prior to initiating repairs to pressure vessels, the appropriate
codes and agencies must be consulted.
3.4 Records
Recordkeeping under this guideline shall be in compliance with Guideline MSO-006,
Maintenance History Capture and Review. Written maintenance procedures shall be
retained on-site and shall be reviewed and updated as necessary.
4. References
4.1 Applicable Codes and Regulatory Requirements


Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Tower Maintenance
Doc. # EMP-007
1. Purpose
maintenance procedures and programs for towers.
2. Scope
This guideline applies to all “Company” operated facilities in which towers are installed, its
employees and its contractors except where superseded by more stringent local standards.
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Under this guideline, each facility responsible for operating and maintaining towers shall
evaluate the maintenance requirements for those towers and shall develop written
contain the data described in the "Preventive/Predictive Maintenance" section in this
guideline.
3.2 Considerations
Towers will likely be found in all facilities in a wide range of sizes and ratings. A tower
differs from a pressure vessel in that towers contain internal fixtures in the form of trays,
bubble caps, nozzles, etc. Please note that deaerators are considered as towers under this
guideline. The tower service will probably be very critical to facility operation. An
Assessment) will enable each facility to determine the relative criticality of each tower
installed in the facility.
In general, tower manufacturers do not supply recommendations for maintenance
requirements; however, local regulations and insurance carriers may have specific
requirements for tower maintenance and inspections.
Maintenance of towers generally falls into one of two types: Preventive/Predictive
Maintenance or Corrective Maintenance. Industry experience has shown that the
performance of corrective maintenance is five to twelve times as costly as the
performance of preventive maintenance. The preventive/predictive maintenance
techniques available for towers are limited; however, rigorous application of these
techniques can prevent failures that, in the case of towers, may be catastrophic.
The following is presented to guide each facility in the development of a structured
maintenance program and procedures for towers.
Local regulations as well as insurance carrier and certifying agency requirements for all
towers shall be thoroughly reviewed before developing site-specific maintenance
procedures. If the facility utilizes a Computerized Maintenance Management System
(CMMS), the format and content of the procedures will be governed to some degree by
the CMMS requirements.
However, at a minimum, a maintenance procedure shall define the following:

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Tower Maintenance
Doc. # EMP-007

• A list of special tools or equipment required
• A list of spare parts or lubricants required
• A list of the estimated manpower by skill and quantity to perform the task(s)
In developing preventive/predictive maintenance procedures for towers, the following
techniques or activities should be considered:
• Internal inspections (more frequent internal inspections may be required for towers to
determine the condition of internal fixtures)
Repairs to towers may be subject to code requirements in order to maintain vessel
certification. Prior to initiating repairs to towers, the appropriate codes and agencies must
be consulted.
3.4 Reports
Recordkeeping under this guideline shall be per Guideline MSO-006, Maintenance
History Capture and Review. Written maintenance procedures shall be retained on-site
and shall be reviewed and updated as necessary.
4. References


Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Atmospheric Tank Maintenance
Doc. # EMP-008
1. Purpose
maintenance procedures and programs for atmospheric tanks.
2. Scope
This guideline applies to all “Company” operated facilities in which atmospheric tanks are
standards.
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Each facility responsible for operating and maintaining atmospheric tanks shall evaluate
the maintenance requirements for those tanks and shall prepare written procedures for the
3.2 Considerations
Maintenance of atmospheric tanks, regardless of criticality, requires special consideration
and planning to be safe, effective and economical. An Equipment Criticality Assessment
(refer to Guideline MSO-004, Equipment Criticality Assessment) will enable each facility
to determine the relative criticality of the atmospheric tanks within the facility.
In general, tank manufacturers do not supply recommendations for maintenance
requirements; however, local regulations and insurance carriers may have specific
requirements for atmospheric tank maintenance and inspections.
Maintenance of atmospheric tanks generally falls into one of two types:
techniques available for atmospheric tanks are limited; however, rigorous application of
these techniques can prevent failures that, in the case of tanks, may be catastrophic or
have severe environmental consequences.
program and procedures for tanks.
atmospheric tanks shall be thoroughly reviewed before developing site-specific
maintenance procedures. If the facility utilizes a Computerized Maintenance
Management System (CMMS), the format and content of the procedures will be
governed to some degree by the CMMS requirements.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Atmospheric Tank Maintenance
Doc. # EMP-008

In developing preventive/predictive maintenance procedures for atmospheric tanks, the
following techniques or activities should be considered:
Repairs to tanks may be subject to code requirements in order to maintain vessel
certification. Prior to initiating repairs to atmospheric tanks, the appropriate codes and
agencies must be consulted.
3.4 Records
4. References


Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Heat Exchanger Maintenance
Doc. # EMP-009
1. Purpose
maintenance procedures and programs for heat exchangers.
2. Scope
This guideline applies to all “Company” operated facilities in which heat exchangers are
standards.
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Under this guideline, each facility responsible for operating and maintaining heat
exchangers shall evaluate the maintenance requirements for those exchangers and shall
prepare written procedures for the preventive/predictive maintenance activities deemed
appropriate based on the considerations presented in this guideline. The content of those
procedures shall contain the data described in the “Preventive/Predictive Maintenance”
section in this guideline.
3.2 Considerations
Maintenance of heat exchangers, regardless of criticality, requires special consideration
and planning to be safe, effective and economical. An Equipment Criticality Assessment
to determine the relative criticality of the installed heat exchangers.
In general, heat exchanger manufacturers do not supply recommendations for
maintenance requirements; however, local regulations and insurance carriers may have
specific requirements for heat exchanger maintenance and inspections.
Maintenance of heat exchangers generally falls into one of two types:
techniques available for heat exchangers are limited; however, rigorous application of
these techniques can prevent loss of performance or failures that, in the case of heat
exchangers, may be catastrophic or have severe environmental consequences.
maintenance program and procedures for heat exchangers.
heat exchangers shall be thoroughly reviewed before developing site-specific
maintenance procedures. If the facility utilizes a Computerized Maintenance
governed to some degree by the CMMS requirements.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Heat Exchanger Maintenance
Doc. # EMP-009

In developing preventive/predictive maintenance procedures for heat exchangers, the
• Performance monitoring
• Operating data trending
Repairs to heat exchangers may be subject to code requirements in order to maintain
certification. Prior to initiating repairs to heat exchangers, the appropriate codes and
agencies must be consulted.
3.4 Records
4. References
4.2 Applicable Codes and Regulations


Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Gas Turbine Maintenance
Doc. # EMP-010
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements to be followed for development of the effective
maintenance procedures and programs for gas turbines.
2. Scope
This guideline applies to all “Company” operated facilities in which gas turbines are installed, its
employees and its contractors except where superseded by more stringent local standards.
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Each facility responsible for operating and maintaining gas turbines shall evaluate the
maintenance requirements for those units and prepare written procedures for the
3.2 Considerations
Maintenance of gas turbines is complex, regardless of criticality, and requires specialized
skills and techniques and special consideration and planning to be safe, effective and
economical. An Equipment Criticality Assessment (refer to Guideline MSO-004,
Equipment Criticality Assessment) shall enable each facility to determine the relative
criticality of each gas turbine installed in the facility. Gas turbine manufactures provide
detailed maintenance instructions for their equipment, which shall be thoroughly
reviewed and utilized as basis of the maintenance procedures with appropriate site-
specific modifications.
Maintenance of gas turbines generally falls into one of two types: Preventive/Predictive
performance of preventive maintenance. There are extensive and sophisticated
techniques available for gas turbine preventive and predictive maintenance. Rigorous
application of these techniques can improve unit availability as well as extend periods
between inspections and overhauls.
program and procedures for gas turbines.
Manufacturer’s specifications and recommendations shall be thoroughly reviewed for all
complex rotating equipment before developing site-specific maintenance procedures. If
the facility utilizes a Computerized Maintenance Management System (CMMS), the
format and content of the procedures will be governed to some degree by the CMMS
requirements.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Gas Turbine Maintenance
Doc. # EMP-010

• Reference to manufacturer's special requirements, if applicable
In developing preventive/predictive maintenance procedures for gas turbines, the
• Lube oil and filter changes
• Accoustical analysis
• Borescope inspections
the development of specific repair procedures. Gas turbine manufacturers provide certain
maintenance procedure is performed in a structured maintenance environment, it shall be
documented in a procedure format that contains the elements described in this guideline,
resulting in a reference library of specific repair procedures.
When performing corrective maintenance on gas turbines, special consideration must be
given to manufacturer’s instructions. Repair parts used shall meet manufacturer’s
specifications.
3.4 Records
4. References
4.1 Gas Turbine Manufacturer’s Maintenance Instructions


Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Steam Turbine Maintenance
Doc. # EMP-011
1. Purpose
maintenance procedures and programs for steam turbines.
2. Scope
This guideline applies to all “Company” operated facilities in which steam turbines are installed,
its employees and its contractors except where superseded by more stringent local standards.
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Each facility responsible for operating and maintaining steam turbines shall evaluate the
maintenance requirements for those units and shall develop written procedures for the
3.2 Considerations
Maintenance of steam turbines is complex, regardless of criticality, requiring specialized
skills and techniques, consideration and planning to be safe, effective and economical.
Criticality Assessment) shall enable each facility to determine the relative criticality of
each steam turbine in the facility.
Steam turbine manufactures provide detailed maintenance instructions for their
equipment, which should be thoroughly reviewed and shall be made the basis of the
maintenance procedures with appropriate site-specific modifications.
Maintenance of steam turbines generally falls into one of two types:
the performance of preventive maintenance. There are extensive and sophisticated
techniques available for steam turbine preventive and predictive maintenance. Rigorous
application of these techniques can improve unit availability as well as extend periods
between inspections and overhauls.
maintenance program and procedures for steam turbines.
Manufacturer’s specifications and recommendations shall be thoroughly reviewed for all
requirements.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Steam Turbine Maintenance
Doc. # EMP-011

In developing preventive/predictive maintenance procedures for steam turbines, the
the development of specific repair procedures. Steam turbine manufacturers provide
certain repair and inspection procedures in their maintenance instructions. When a
corrective procedure is performed in a structured maintenance environment, it shall be
documented in a procedure format that contains the elements described in this guideline,
resulting in a reference library of specific repair procedures.
When performing corrective maintenance on steam turbines, special consideration must
be given to manufacturer’s instructions and to ensuring that any repair parts used meet
manufacturer’s specifications.
3.4 Records
4. References
4.1 Steam Turbine Manufacturer’s Maintenance Instructions


Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Turbo-Expander Maintenance
Doc. # EMP-012
1. Purpose
maintenance procedures and programs for turbo-expanders.
2. Scope
This guideline applies to all “Company” operated facilities in which turbo-expanders are
standards.
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Under this guideline, each facility responsible for operating and maintaining
turbo-expanders shall evaluate the maintenance requirements for those units and shall
develop written procedures for the preventive/predictive maintenance activities deemed
appropriate based on the considerations presented in this guideline. The content of those
procedures shall contain the data described in the “Preventive/Predictive Maintenance”
section in this guideline.
3.2 Considerations
Turbo-expanders will generally be found in gas processing facilities in a range of sizes.
They represent a significant capital investment and are critical to the process operations.
Criticality Assessment) will enable each facility to determine the relative criticality of
each turbo-expander installed in its facility.
Maintenance of turbo-expanders is complex, requiring specialized skills, techniques and
special consideration and planning to be safe, effective and economical. Turbo-expander
manufacturers provide detailed maintenance instructions for their equipment, which shall
be thoroughly reviewed and incorporated as the basis of the maintenance procedures with
appropriate site-specific modifications.
Turbo-expanders require special safety considerations for the performance of
maintenance. In addition to the normal safety requirements for lock-out/tag-out, isolation
and depressurization, work permits, and personal protective equipment, there are special
safety procedures that must be identified and defined for turbo-expander maintenance
activities. Some considerations are:
• Operating turbo-expanders may emit high levels of noise and have surfaces at low
temperature.
• Components may be heavy and require special lifting procedures.
• Special tools may be required.
• For shutdown maintenance, a warming period may be required.
• Provisions for access, such as scaffolding, may be required.
• Other unique site-specific requirements shall be identified.
Maintenance of turbo-expanders generally falls into one of two types:
the performance of preventive maintenance. There are extensive and sophisticated
techniques available for turbo-expander preventive and predictive maintenance.
Rigorous application of these techniques can improve unit availability as well as extend
periods between inspections and overhauls.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # EMP-012

maintenance program and procedures for turbo-expanders.
Manufacturers’ specifications and recommendations should be thoroughly reviewed for
all complex rotating equipment before developing site-specific maintenance procedures.
If the facility utilizes a Computerized Maintenance Management System (CMMS), the
requirements.
• A frequency at which the task(s) shall be performed
• Reference to manufacturers’ special requirements
In developing preventive/predictive maintenance procedures for turbo-expanders, the
the development of specific repair procedures. Turbo-expander manufacturers provide
repair and inspection procedures in their maintenance instructions. When a corrective
maintenance procedure is performed in a structural maintenance environment, it shall be
documented in a procedure format that contains the elements described in this guideline.
Through the capture of this information, a reference library of specific repair procedures
will be developed over a period of time.
3.4 Reports
There is no reporting requirement under this guideline. The written maintenance
procedures will satisfy the intent of this guideline.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # EMP-012
4. References
4.1 Turbo-expander Manufacturer’s Maintenance Instructions

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Electric Motor Maintenance
Doc. # EMP-013
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements to be followed for the effective maintenance
procedures and programs for electric motors.
2. Scope
This guideline applies to all “Company” operated facilities in which electric motors are installed,
its employees and its contractors except where superseded by more stringent local standards.
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Under this guideline, each facility responsible for operating and maintaining electric
motors shall evaluate the maintenance requirements for those units and shall develop
written procedures for the preventive/predictive maintenance activities deemed
appropriate for those motors based on the considerations presented in this guideline. The
content of those procedures shall contain the data described in the “Preventive/Predictive
Maintenance” section above.
3.2 Considerations
Electric motors are found in all facilities in a wide range of sizes ranging from
non-critical service to the highest level of criticality. An Equipment Criticality
Assessment (refer to Guideline MSO-004, Equipment Criticality Assessment) will enable
each facility to determine the relative criticality of each electric motor installed in its
facility.
Maintenance of electric motors requires special consideration and planning to be safe,
effective and economical. Some electric motor manufacturers provide detailed
maintenance instructions for their equipment while others provide none. Instructions
should be thoroughly reviewed and incorporated as the basis of the maintenance
procedures with appropriate site-specific modifications.
Electric motors require special safety considerations for the performance of maintenance.
In addition to the normal safety requirements for lock-out/tag-out, work permits and
personal protective equipment, there are special safety procedures that must be identified
and defined for electric motor maintenance activities.
Some considerations are as follows:
• Operating electric motors may emit high levels of noise.
Maintenance of electric motors generally falls into one of two types:
the performance of preventive maintenance. There are certain techniques available for
electric motor preventive and predictive maintenance. Rigorous application of these
techniques can improve unit availability as well as extend periods between inspections
and overhauls.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # EMP-013

maintenance program and procedures for electric motors. A useful consideration in
developing maintenance procedures for electric motors is to evaluate the size and
criticality of motors and establish a point at which it is less expensive to replace the
motor if it fails rather than maintain the motor.
Manufacturers’ specifications and recommendations shall be thoroughly reviewed for all
rotating equipment before developing site-specific maintenance procedures. If the
facility utilizes a Computerized Maintenance Management System (CMMS), the format
and content of the procedures will be governed to some degree by the CMMS
requirements. However, at a minimum, a maintenance procedure shall define the
following:
In developing preventive/predictive maintenance procedures for electric motors, the
• Lube oil analysis, if applicable
• Lube oil and filter changes, if applicable
• Megger testing
• Lubrication of bearings if applicable
3.4 Reporting

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # EMP-013
4. References
4.1 Motor Manufacturer’s Maintenance Instructions


Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Electric Generator Maintenance
Doc. # EMP-014
1. Purpose
maintenance procedures and programs for electric generators.
2. Scope
This guideline applies to all “Company” operated facilities in which electric generators are
installed, its employees and its contractors except where superceded by more stringent local
standards.
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Each facility responsible for operating and maintaining electric generators shall evaluate
the maintenance requirements for those units and shall develop written procedures for the
3.2 Considerations
Electric generators are found in facilities in a variety of sizes ranging from low criticality
service, such as standby units, to the highest level of criticality in a power generation
facility. An Equipment Criticality Assessment (refer to Guideline MSO-004, Equipment
each electric motor installed in its facility. Maintenance of electric generators requires
special consideration and planning to be safe, effective and economical.
Some electric generator manufacturers provide detailed maintenance instructions for the
equipment while others provide only minimal instructions. Instructions should be
thoroughly reviewed and incorporated as the basis of maintenance procedures with
appropriate site-specific modifications.
Electric generators require special safety considerations for the performance of
maintenance. In addition to the normal safety requirements for lock-out/tag-out, work
permits and personal protective equipment, there are special safety procedures that must
be identified and defined for electric motor maintenance activities. Some considerations
are as follows:
• Operating electric generators may emit high levels of noise.
• Large generators may be hydrogen cooled, requiring special caution.
Maintenance of electric generators generally falls into one of two types:
the performance of preventive maintenance. There are certain techniques available for
electric generator preventive and predictive maintenance. Rigorous application of these
techniques can improve unit availability as well as extend periods between inspections
and overhauls.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # EMP-014

maintenance program and procedures for electric generators.
rotating equipment before developing site-specific maintenance procedures. If the
facility utilizes a Computerized Maintenance Management System (CMMS), the format
and content of the procedures will be governed to some degree by the CMMS
requirements.
In developing preventive/predictive maintenance procedures for electric generators, the
• Lube oil analysis, if applicable
• Lube oil and filter changes, if applicable
• High potential testing.
• Megger testing
• Lubrication of bearings, if applicable
3.4 Reports

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # EMP-014
4. References
4.1 Generator Manufacturer’s Maintenance Instructions


Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Manually Operated Valve Maintenance
Doc. # EMP-015
1. Purpose
maintenance procedures and programs for manually operated valves.
2. Scope
This guideline applies to all “Company” operated facilities in which manually operated valves
are installed, its employees and its contractors except where superseded by more stringent local
standards.
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Under this guideline, each facility responsible for operating and maintaining manually
operated valves shall establish and document routines for the inspection and operation of
those valves. The content of those procedures shall contain the data described in the
"Preventive/Predictive Maintenance " section in this guideline.
3.2 Considerations
All facilities contain manually operated valves in a wide variety of types, sizes and
ranges. Some of the valves may be in a critical service while the majority will be in a
low criticality service. However, maintenance of manually operated valves should be
addressed as a part of the overall facility maintenance program.
Manually operated valves require safety considerations for the performance of
maintenance. In addition to the normal safety requirements for isolation, depressurizing,
tag-out, work permits and personal protective equipment, there are special safety
procedures that must be identified and defined for manually operated valve maintenance
activities. Some considerations are as follows:
• The fluid may be extremely hot or cold, explosive, flammable, toxic, corrosive or
have other hazardous properties.
There are limited preventive/predictive maintenance activities that can be applied to
manually operated valves. Most forms of maintenance performed on manually operated
valves will be corrective in nature. If the facility utilizes a Computerized Maintenance
governed to some degree by the CMMS requirements. However, at a minimum, a
maintenance procedure shall define the following:

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Manually Operated Valve Maintenance
Doc. # EMP-015

The following activities shall be considered for routine application to manually operated
valves:
• Visual external inspection
• Operation or partial operation of the valve.
the development of specific repair procedures. Manufacturers will usually address
certain repair and inspection procedures in the maintenance instructions. When a
corrective maintenance procedure is performed in a structural maintenance environment,
guideline. Through the capture of this information, a reference library of specific repair
procedures will be developed over a period of time.
For the smaller sizes of manually operated valves, repair is often not economical to
perform. Each facility shall determine the point at which it is not economical to repair
manually operated valves and adopt a replace rather than repair philosophy and set the
stock levels for replacement valves accordingly.
3.4 Reports
4. References
4.1 Valve Manufacturer’s Maintenance Instructions

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Motor-Operated Valve Maintenance
Doc. # EMP-016
1. Purpose
maintenance procedures and programs for motor-operated valves.
2. Scope
This guideline applies to all “Company” operated facilities in which motor-operated valves are
standards.
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Each facility responsible for operating and maintaining motor-operated valves shall
establish and document routines for the inspection and operation of motor-operated
valves. The content of those procedures shall contain the data described in the
"Preventive/Predictive Maintenance" section in this guideline.
3.2 Considerations
Company facilities are likely to contain motor-operated valves in a wide variety of types,
sizes and ranges. It is probable that the motor-operated valves installed are in critical
service. An Equipment Criticality Assessment (refer to Guideline MSO-004, “Equipment
Criticality Assessment”) will enable each facility to determine the relative criticality of
each motor-operated valve. Regardless of criticality, maintenance of motor-operated
valves shall be addressed as a part of the overall facility maintenance program.
Motor-operated valves require safety considerations for the performance of maintenance.
In addition to the normal safety requirements for isolation, depressurizing,
lock-out/tag-out, work permits and personal protective equipment, there are special safety
procedures that must be followed for motor-operated valve maintenance activities. Some
considerations are as follows:
motor-operated valves. Most forms of maintenance performed on motor-operated valves
will be corrective in nature. If the facility utilizes a Computerized Maintenance
governed to some degree by the CMMS requirements. However, at a minimum a

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Motor-Operated Valve Maintenance
Doc. # EMP-016

• Reference to manufacturers, special requirements
The following activities shall be considered for routine application to motor-operated
valves:
• Visual external inspection
• Operation or partial operation of the valve
3.4 Reports
4. References
4.1 Valve Manufacturer’s Maintenance Instructions


Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Relief Valve Maintenance
Doc. # EMP-017
1. Purpose
maintenance procedures and programs for relief valves.
2. Scope
This guideline applies to all “Company” operated facilities in which relief valves are installed, its
employees and its contractors except where superceded by more stringent local standards.
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Under this guideline, each facility responsible for operating and maintaining relief valves
shall evaluate the regulatory, testing and maintenance requirements for relief valves.
Written procedures shall be developed for the testing and certification of relief valves
based on the considerations presented in this guideline. The content of those procedures
shall contain the data described in the "Preventive/Predictive Maintenance" section of this
guideline.
3.2 Considerations
Relief valves are found in all facilities and are generally in a high criticality service. An
Assessment) will enable each facility to determine the relative criticality of each relief
valve installed in its facility. In all probability, there will be local regulations that
mandate testing and maintenance of relief valves. Prior to developing site-specific
procedures for relief valves, local regulations must be identified and taken into
consideration.
Relief valves require special safety considerations for the performance of maintenance.
In addition to the normal safety requirements for isolation and lock-out/tag-out, work
be identified and defined for relief valve maintenance activities. Some considerations are
as follows:
• Other unique site-specific requirements should be identified.
There are limited preventive/predictive maintenance activities that can be applied to relief
valves unless testing of the valve is considered a preventive maintenance activity. Other
forms of maintenance performed on relief valves will be corrective in nature.
The periodic testing of relief valves, whether mandated or not, falls into the category of a
scheduled activity and requires written procedures to ensure a safe and effective program
of testing.
NOTE: The minimum frequency specified by the “Company” for testing of relief
valves is annually, with intervals between tests not to exceed fifteen (15) months. If
local regulations are less stringent, “Company” specified intervals shall be met.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Relief Valve Maintenance
Doc. # EMP-017

following:
There are several options available for the testing and maintenance of relief valves. Each
facility should evaluate these options and determine the appropriate option(s) that best
satisfy its particular requirements. Some of the options are as follows:
• Test, in place, if provisions have been made.
• Remove and test on a test bench, either by company personnel or third party service.
• Maintain a complete set of tested valves and exchange valves in operation at the
required intervals.
3.4 Reports
Testing and certification records for relief valves shall be maintained on-site and shall be
submitted to the appropriate authority as required by local regulations.
4. References
4.1 Applicable Local Codes and Regulations
4.2 Relief Valve Manufacturer’s Maintenance Instructions


Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Shutdown Valve Maintenance
Doc. # EMP-018
1. Purpose
maintenance procedures and programs for shutdown valves.
2. Scope
This guideline applies to all “Company” operated facilities in which shutdown valves are
standards.
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Under this guideline, each facility responsible for operating and maintaining shutdown
valves shall evaluate the regulatory, testing and maintenance requirements for shutdown
valves. Written procedures shall be developed for the testing and certification of
shutdown valves based on the considerations presented in this guideline. The content of
those procedures shall contain the data described in the "Preventive/Predictive
Maintenance" section in this guideline.
3.2 Considerations
Shutdown valves should be installed in all facilities and are generally in a high criticality
service. An Equipment Criticality Assessment (refer to Guideline MSO-004, “Equipment
Criticality Assessment”) will enable each facility to determine the relative criticality of
each shutdown valve installed in its facility.
In all probability, there will be local regulations that mandate testing and maintenance of
shutdown valves. Prior to developing site-specific procedures for shutdown valves, local
regulations must be identified and taken into consideration. Even in the absence of
regulations governing testing and maintenance of shutdown valves, safe operation of the
facility requires that the valves be maintained and tested.
Shutdown valves require special safety considerations for the performance of
maintenance. In addition to the normal safety requirements for isolation and
procedures that must be identified and defined for shutdown valve maintenance activities.
Some considerations are as follows:
shutdown valves unless testing of the valve is considered a preventive maintenance
activity. Other forms of maintenance performed on shutdown valves will be corrective in
nature.
Many shutdown valves are equipped with a test feature that allows the valve to partially
operate, enabling testing during operation. Valves without this feature may have to be
tested during periods of facility shutdown.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Shutdown Valve Maintenance
Doc. # EMP-018

The periodic testing of shutdown valves, whether mandated or not, falls into the category
of a scheduled activity and requires written procedures to ensure a safe and effective
program of testing. If the facility utilizes a Computerized Maintenance Management
System (CMMS), the format and content of the procedures will be governed to some
degree by the CMMS requirements. However, at a minimum, a maintenance procedure
shall define the following:
3.4 Reports
Testing and certification records for shutdown valves shall be maintained on-site and
shall be submitted to the appropriate authority as required by local regulations.
4. References
4.2 Shutdown Valve Manufacturer’s Maintenance Instructions


Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Instruments and Control Maintenance
Doc. # EMP-019
1. Purpose
maintenance procedures and programs for instruments and controls.
2. Scope
This guideline applies to all “Company” operated facilities in which instruments and controls are
standards.
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Under this guideline, each facility shall evaluate the regulatory, testing and maintenance
requirements for instruments and controls. Written procedures shall be developed for the
testing and calibration of loops based on the considerations presented in this guideline.
The content of those procedures shall, as a minimum, contain the data described in the
3.2 Considerations
For the purpose of this guideline, all devices used for control, monitoring, indication,
alarm and shutdown functions are considered instruments and controls. This category
covers a broad range of devices and functions of varying criticalities. An Equipment
Criticality Assessment (refer to Guideline MSO-004, “Equipment Criticality
Assessment”) will enable each facility to determine the relative criticality of the
instruments and controls installed in its facility.
certain devices. Local regulations must be identified and taken into consideration prior to
developing site-specific procedures for instruments and controls. Even in the absence of
regulations governing testing and maintenance, instruments and controls shall be
maintained and tested to allow safe operation of the facility.
Instruments and controls require special safety considerations for the performance of
maintenance, particularly if any maintenance is performed with the device in service. In
addition to the normal safety requirements for isolation and lock-out/tag-out, work
be followed for instrument and control maintenance activities. Some considerations are
as follows:
• When performing maintenance with instrument and control devices in service, close
coordination with operations is required.
• Fluids may be extremely hot or cold, explosive, flammable, toxic, corrosive or have
other hazardous properties.
Limited preventive/predictive maintenance activities can be applied to instruments and
controls. However, periodic calibration and testing ensures proper function. General
practice for instruments and controls is that testing and calibration be performed on a
loop basis, that is, from the end device to the indicator, controller, alarm panel, etc. Other
forms of maintenance performed on instruments and controls will be corrective in nature.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Instruments and Control Maintenance
Doc. # EMP-019

The periodic testing and calibration of instruments and controls, whether mandated or
not, falls into the category of a scheduled activity and requires written procedures to
ensure a safe and effective program of testing. If the facility utilizes a Computerized
Maintenance Management System (CMMS), the format and content of the procedures
will be governed to some degree by the CMMS requirements. However, at a minimum, a
• Sspecial safety requirements for the performance of the task(s)
Much of the testing of instrument and control loops can be performed “in-service” with
the proper precautions to avoid upsets and shutdowns. Close coordination with
operations is required for maintenance of instruments and controls during operation.
The following activities shall be considered in developing a maintenance program for
instruments and controls:
• For alarm and shutdown loops – periodic function testing with calibration at longer
intervals
• For control loops – periodic calibration with frequency based on loop criticality
• For indicator loops – periodic calibration based on loop criticality
3.4 Reports
Testing and calibration records for instrument and control loops shall be maintained
on-site and shall be submitted to the appropriate authority as required by local
regulations.
4. References
4.2 Manufacturer’s Maintenance Instructions


Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Fire and Gas Detection System Maintenance
Doc. # EMP-020
1. Purpose
maintenance procedures and programs for fire and gas detection systems.
2. Scope
This guideline applies to all “Company” operated facilities in which fire and gas detection
systems are installed, its employees and its contractors except where superceded by more
stringent local standards.
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Under this guideline, each facility responsible for operating and maintaining fire and gas
detection systems shall evaluate the regulatory, testing and maintenance requirements for
fire and gas detection systems. Written procedures shall be developed for the testing and
calibration of systems and devices based on the considerations presented in this
guideline. The content of those procedures shall, as a minimum, contain the data
described in the "Preventive/Predictive Maintenance" section in this guideline.
3.2 Considerations
For the purpose of this guideline, all devices used for the detection of flame, heat and
smoke and explosive and toxic gases are considered fire and gas detection systems. This
category covers a broad range of devices and functions that are generally of a high
criticality. An Equipment Criticality Assessment (refer to Guideline MSO-004,
Equipment Criticality Assessment) will enable each facility to determine the relative
criticality of the systems installed in its facility.
certain devices. Prior to developing site-specific procedures for fire and gas detection
systems, local regulations must be identified and taken into consideration. Even in the
absence of regulations governing testing and maintenance of fire and gas detection
systems, safe operation of the facility requires that they be maintained and tested.
Fire and gas detection systems may require special safety considerations for the
performance of maintenance, particularly if any maintenance is performed with the
systems in service. In addition to the normal safety requirements for isolation and
procedures that must be followed for fire and gas systems maintenance activities. Some
• When performing maintenance with fire and gas systems devices in service, close
coordination with operations is required.
Limited preventive/predictive maintenance activities can be applied to fire and gas
detection systems. However, periodic calibration and testing ensures proper function.
Other forms of maintenance performed on fire and gas detection systems will be
corrective in nature.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Fire and Gas Detection System Maintenance
Doc. # EMP-020

The periodic testing and calibration of fire and gas detection systems, whether mandated
or not, falls into the category of a scheduled activity and requires written procedures to
ensure a safe and effective program of testing.
requirements.
However, as a minimum, a maintenance procedure shall define the following:
• Any special safety requirements for the performance of the task(s)
• A list of any special tools or equipment required
• A list of any spare parts or lubricants required
Much of the testing of fire and gas systems can be performed in service with the proper
precautions to avoid upsets and shutdowns. Close coordination with operations is
required for maintenance of fire and gas detection systems during operation.
The following activities shall be considered in developing a maintenance program for fire
and gas detection systems:
• For alarm and shutdown functions – periodic function testing with calibration at
longer intervals
• For indicator functions – periodic calibration
3.4 Reports
Testing and calibration records for fire and gas systems loops shall be maintained on-site
and shall be submitted to the appropriate authority as required by local regulations.
4. References


Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Reciprocating Engine Maintenance
Doc. # EMP-021
1. Purpose
maintenance procedures and programs for reciprocating engines.
2. Scope
This guideline applies to all “Company” operated facilities in which reciprocating engines are
standards.
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Under this guideline, each facility shall evaluate the maintenance requirements for
reciprocating engines and shall develop written procedures for the preventive/predictive
maintenance activities of those engines based on the considerations presented in this
guideline. The content of those procedures shall, at a minimum, contain the data
described in the "Preventive/Predictive Maintenance" section above.
3.2 Considerations
For the purpose of this guideline, reciprocating engines refers to stationary prime movers,
either natural gas or diesel fueled. This does not apply to vehicle engines. This category
covers a range of types and sizes of engines with varying criticalities. An Equipment
Criticality Assessment (refer to Guideline MSO-004, Equipment Criticality Assessment)
will enable each facility to determine the relative criticality of the engines installed in its
facility. Prior to developing site-specific procedures for reciprocating engines,
manufacturers’ maintenance instructions shall be reviewed and incorporated as the basis
of the maintenance procedures with appropriate site-specific modifications.
Reciprocating engines may require special safety considerations for the performance of
maintenance. In addition to the normal safety requirements for isolation and
procedures that must be identified and defined for reciprocating engine maintenance
activities. Some considerations are as follows:
• Operating engines may emit high levels of noise and heat.
• Components may be heavy and require lifting devices.
There are various preventive/predictive maintenance activities that can be applied to
reciprocating engines which, when rigorously applied, can extend the period between
inspections and overhauls. If the facility utilizes a Computerized Maintenance
governed to some degree by the CMMS requirements. However, at a minimum, a
maintenance procedure should define the following.
• A frequency at which the task(s) should be performed

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Reciprocating Engine Maintenance
Doc. # EMP-021

In developing preventive/predictive maintenance procedures for reciprocating engines,
the following techniques or activities shall be considered.
• Engine performance monitoring and analysis
• Trending of operating parameters
• Electronic engine analysis (Beta)
it should be documented in a procedure format that contains the elements described in
this guideline. Through the capture of this information, a reference library of specific
repair procedures will be developed over a period of time.
3.4 Reporting
The development of the procedures described above will document compliance with this
guideline.
4. References


Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Gearbox Maintenance
Doc. # EMP-022
1. Purpose
maintenance procedures and programs for gearboxes.
2. Scope
This guideline applies to all “Company” operated facilities in which gearboxes are installed, its
employees and its contractors except where superceded by more stringent local standards.
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Under this guideline, each facility responsible for operating and maintaining gearboxes
shall evaluate the maintenance requirements for those gearboxes and shall develop
appropriate for those gearboxes based on the considerations presented in this guideline.
The content of those procedures shall, at a minimum, contain the data described in the
3.2 Considerations
Gearboxes will be found in all facilities in a wide range of sizes and configurations. The
gearbox service may be extremely critical to facility operation or it may be non-critical.
each gearbox installed in its facility.
Gearbox maintenance, regardless of criticality, will require special consideration and
planning to be safe, effective and economical. Gearboxes vary greatly in size, design and
complexity depending on manufacturer, service and location. Thus, all maintenance
procedures must be based on manufacturers’ specifications and recommendations with
appropriate modifications for site-specific conditions and requirements.
Gearboxes, as all rotating equipment, require special safety considerations for the
performance of maintenance. In addition to the normal safety requirements for
procedures for the maintenance of gearboxes that must be identified and defined. Some
• Operating gearboxes may have high levels of noise.
• Components of the gearbox may be quite heavy and require special lifting provisions.
• Special tools may be required for maintenance of the gearbox.
Maintenance of gearboxes generally falls into one of two types: Preventive/Predictive
performance of preventive maintenance and that gearboxes respond favorably to
preventive maintenance.
maintenance program and procedures for gearboxes.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Gearbox Maintenance
Doc. # EMP-022

following:
In developing preventive/predictive maintenance procedures for gearboxes, the following
techniques or activities shall be considered:
3.4 Reports
procedure will satisfy the intent of this guideline.
4. References
4.1 Gearbox Manufacturer’s Maintenance Instructions


Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Aerial Cooler Maintenance
Doc. # EMP-023
1. Purpose
maintenance procedures and programs for all types of aerial coolers including cooling towers.
2. Scope
This guideline applies to all “Company” operated facilities in which aerial coolers and cooling
towers are installed, its employees and its contractors except where superseded by more stringent
local standards.
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Under this guideline, each facility responsible for operating and maintaining aerial
coolers shall evaluate the maintenance requirements for those coolers and shall develop
appropriate for those coolers based on the considerations presented in this guideline. The
content of those procedures shall, at a minimum, contain the data described in the
3.2 Considerations
Various types of aerial coolers including radiators, fin-fans and cooling towers may be
found in all facilities in a wide range of sizes. The cooler service may be extremely
critical to facility operation or may be non-critical. An Equipment Criticality Assessment
to determine the relative criticality of each cooler installed in the facility.
Maintenance of coolers, regardless of criticality, requires special consideration and
planning to be safe, effective and economical. Because coolers vary greatly in size,
design and complexity depending on manufacturer, service and location, maintenance
procedures must be based on manufacturer’s specifications and recommendations with
appropriate modifications for site-specific conditions and requirements.
Aerial coolers require special safety considerations for the performance of maintenance.
In addition to the normal safety requirements for lock-out/tag-out, isolation,
depressurization, work permits and personal protective equipment, there are special
safety procedures for the maintenance of aerial coolers that must be identified and
defined. Some considerations are as follows:
• Operating coolers may have high levels of noise.
• The fluid contained may be flammable, explosive or toxic or may have other
hazardous properties.
• Operating coolers with fans present a personnel hazard.
• Components of the cooler may be quite heavy and require special lifting provisions.
• Special tools may be required for maintenance of the cooler.
• Provisions for access, such as scaffolding may be required.
• Cooling towers with wood construction or wood fill, when dewatered, present a
severe fire hazard and require special provisions.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Aerial Cooler Maintenance
Doc. # EMP-023
Maintenance of aerial coolers generally falls into one of two types: Preventive/Predictive
Maintenance or Corrective Maintenance. Industry experience shows that performance
of corrective maintenance is five to twelve times as costly as the performance of
preventive maintenance and that coolers respond favorably to preventive maintenance.
maintenance program and procedures for aerial coolers and cooling towers.
Manufacturer's specifications and recommendations shall be thoroughly reviewed before
developing site-specific maintenance procedures. If the facility utilizes a Computerized
Maintenance Management System (CMMS), the format and content of the procedures
will be governed to some degree by the CMMS requirements. However, at a minimum, a
maintenance procedure should define the following.
• A frequency at which the task(s) should be performed
In developing preventive/predictive maintenance procedures for gearboxes, the following
techniques or activities should be considered
• External inspection and cleaning
3.3 Reporting
procedure will satisfy the intent of this guideline.
4. References
4.1 Gearbox Manufacturer’s Maintenance Instructions

• EMP-013, Electric Motor Maintenance
• EMP-022, Gearbox Maintenance

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Piping Maintenance
Doc. # EMP-024
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements to be followed for the development of procedures for
internal and external inspection and maintenance of aboveground piping and components.
2. Scope
This guideline applies to all “Company” operated facilities in which aboveground piping and
components are installed, its employees and its contractors except where superseded by more
stringent local standards.
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Maintenance equipment guidelines EMP-001 through EMP-024 are directed towards the
maintenance of specific equipment types. This guideline is intended to assist facilities in
establishing a maintenance inspection program for the interconnecting piping. The
following considerations are provided for use in developing such programs and
procedures.
3.2 Considerations
Inspection programs for atmospheric corrosion shall include areas such as under
hold-down straps, pipe penetrations of building walls, insulated pipe and headers near
“open” cooling towers.
Whenever pipe is protected by steel wear pads or sleeves that are seal welded to the pipe
(such as at pipe supports), inspection of the pad or sleeve in accordance with this
procedure is not required. Periodically check the condition of pads or sleeves that are not
seal welded, on a sample basis to confirm continued protection of the pipe, especially if in
areas conducive to corrosion. Such areas would typically be those where moisture is
present on the pipe due to reasons other than normal precipitation. The results of
inspections, geographic location and pipe environment shall be used to determine an
appropriate continuing inspection level.
Refer to the Corrosion Control Manual for guidelines for establishing an inspection
program for vessels and piping covered by insulation or other protective covering subject
to moisture penetration.
Corrosion, leaks and defects may be safety-related conditions. Reference Procedure
ADM-104, Reporting of Safety Related Conditions, for identification and reporting of
such conditions.
Inspection Program
Develop an inspection program for piping and pressure containing components enclosed
by insulation or other protective covering that are subject to moisture penetration and
retention to ensure detection of atmospheric corrosion before detrimental damage is
sustained. Consider the facility's operating history, future anticipated operating
conditions, evidence of possible corrosion found during routine observations and actual
inspection results in establishing inspection frequencies.
External Inspections
Inspect all noninsulated and uncovered aboveground onshore piping at intervals not
exceeding 36 months. Include non-emergency valves and any other pressure containing
pipeline components in this inspection.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Piping Maintenance
Doc. # EMP-024

At least once each calendar year, inspect all offshore piping and pressure-containing
components exposed to the atmosphere. Inspection intervals shall not exceed 15 months.
Based on the inspection program, remove selected areas of insulation or covering to allow
inspection of piping or component surface conditions. Location and size of each
insulation or covering removal should be based upon component function, size, type of
covering, surface indications of covering or insulation deterioration, leaks, or corrosion,
and inspection results.
Continuous Maintenance
Maintain a continuing program of painting or installation of other protective coverings
based upon results of the external inspection program. It is necessary that intent and
practicality be incorporated into this program of facility protection.
The Company's intent is to maintain safety of its facilities by controlling surface pitting
and uniform general metal loss. Therefore, surface corrosion of a small percentage of the
surface area of an aboveground facility can be tolerated on a short-term basis (years) until
there is sufficient coating deterioration to warrant repair or replacement of the coating
system.
Internal Inspection
Whenever any pipe section is opened or removed from a pipeline, that pipe section and
any adjacent pipe section must be inspected to determine evidence and/or extent of
internal corrosion.
Each facility shall develop a program and written procedures for the inspection and
ongoing maintenance of interconnecting piping installed within the facility. The
considerations presented above along with any local requirements and site-specific factors
shall be evaluated as applied, as appropriate, in program development.
3.4 Records
Documentation is required when external corrosion is identified and repair or preventive
maintenance action other than painting is required, when pipe is opened or when a section
of pipe is removed or replaced. The above records shall be maintained for the life of the
facility.
4. References
4.1 Enron International Operating Guidelines
• ADM-104, Reporting of Safety-Related Conditions
4.2 Code of Federal Regulations 49
• CFR 192.475, Internal Corrosion Control: General
• CFR 192.479, Atmospheric Corrosion Control: General
• CFR 192 .481, Atmospheric Corrosion Control: Atmospheric
• CFR 192.491, Corrosion Control Records
• CFR 192.605(f), Procedural Manuals for Operations, Maintenance and Emergencies

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Maintenance Welding
Doc. # EMP-025
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements to be followed for the development of procedures for
safe and effective maintenance welding.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Maintenance welding covers a wide range of welding activities usually associated with
repairs or small fabrications. It may be non-coded in the case of fabricating racks,
handrails and similar equipment or coded in the case of piping and vessel repairs. It can
also be highly specialized in the case of turbine blade repairs. Compliance with various
codes, regulations, insurance carriers and certifying agencies requires that certain types of
welding be performed according to approved and certified procedures.
3.2 Considerations
There are two elements required for certified welding activities. The first element
requires development and certification of a specific welding procedure according to a
code standard. such as the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code in the U.S. However,
other codes may apply internationally. The second element requires that any welder
performing a specific welding procedure attain certification to perform the procedure.
Some of the factors each facility shall consider regarding maintenance welding activities
and development of maintenance procedures are:
• Whether the welding activity requires a code certification.
• The availability of corporate procedures and standards for certain welding activities.
• The frequency at which the particular welding activity will be required. If the activity
will be performed infrequently, it may be better to use a contractor with approved
procedures and certified welders.
• Highly specialized welding such as turbine blade weld repairs should always be
contracted through the equipment manufacturer.
• An assessment of the potential maintenance welding activities in a facility will assist
in determining the requirements, if any, for welding procedures and welder
certifications.
Each facility shall perform an assessment of the potential maintenance welding activities
and determine if any require code certification and will be performed with in-house
maintenance personnel. For each procedure meeting these criteria, a welding procedure
shall be developed and certified according to ASME or other local requirements. Prior to
actually performing a certified procedure, a welder shall be certified according to ASME
or other local standards.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Maintenance Welding
Doc. # EMP-025
3.2 Reports
The following information shall be retained on-site and shall be reviewed, updated and
recertified as necessary:
• Written welding procedures along with tests
• Certification data and reports
Welder certification documentation and data shall be retained on-site and welder
certifications renewed according to applicable codes and regulations.
4 References
4.1 Enron Engineering Standards
4.2 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
4.3 Applicable Local Codes and Standards

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Annual Reporting
Doc. # ADM-302D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for annual reporting to the Department of
Transportation (DOT), where applicable.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Annual reports are not required for facilities not covered by U.S. DOT regulations unless
local regulations contain a similar reporting requirement.
Procedures shall be in place to fulfill annual reporting requirements to DOT each year, no
later than March 15th for the preceding calendar year.
Annual reports are not required for systems that serve fewer than 100 customers from a
single source, master meter systems or LNG facilities. (Form RSPA F 7100.1-1 is used.)
4. References
• CFR 191.11, Distribution System: Annual Report

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Property Damage to Company Facilities
Doc. # ADM-801D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for the evaluation of incidents resulting in physical
damage to Company facilities and the recovery of repair costs from the responsible party external
to the Company.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Costs for repair and/or replacement resulting from damage to Company facilities shall be
collected from the responsible party as outlined by this guideline. Physical damage to
Company facilities requiring an estimated repair or replacement cost exceeding U.S.
$1000 must be reported as indicated below.
3.2 Considerations
The following items shall be considered and applied in the development of the required
procedures.
Initial Assessment
• Making an initial telephone report of damage to the Operations office and advising of
any customer service reduction or interruption.
• Taking pictures of the damage and making a written description listing the damaged
materials and equipment, complete with date and time.
• Detailing the cause of the damage, the names of all involved parties and any witnesses
observing the incident.
• Reporting loss of product.
Each facility shall develop procedures to be followed in the event of an incident in which
a third party causes physical damage to Company property or facilities. Those procedures
shall incorporate the considerations presented above.
Cost of Repair
Costs shall be accumulated during repair or replacement and an invoice shall be prepared
and sent to the responsible party including at least the following items:
• Labor costs according to current schedules with overhead costs added.
• Utilization costs for equipment.
• Materials at cost.
• Product volume lost at current billing rates.
• Miscellaneous expenses such as telephone calls, travel costs, contract or third party
costs, etc.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # ADM-801D

Invoice the Responsible Party
Call to advise the responsible party of the extent of the damage, their liability, the method
of settlement and the billing procedures. Further procedures are as follows:
• Send a written confirmation to the responsible party and retain a copy in the file.
• Upon completion of repair and replacement caused by the damage, mail the invoice
complete with cover letter to the responsible party.
• Following 30 days without response from the responsible party, prepare and send a
second cover letter with a copy of the invoice.
• Following an additional 15 days without response, forward a copy of the entire file to
the Legal Department.
• Collected monies will be forwarded to the Accounting Department.
3.4 Records
A copy of the entire file shall be retained for five years. The file shall not be destroyed
without the consent of the Legal Department. Retain appropriate records regarding
repairs.
4. References
4.1 Enron Global Asset Operation Safety Guidelines
4.2 Gas LDC Operating Guidelines

• PPL-102D, Damage Prevention Program
4.3 Enron Accounting Guidelines

Revision: 0
Gas LDC Guidelines
Issued: Nov-1999
Operation and Maintenance Plans
Doc. # ADM-100D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements to be followed for the development, administration,
review and update of Operation and Maintenance Plans and Procedures.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Written procedures shall be in place outlining safe, efficient methods for operating and
maintaining operating facilities and actions taken in the event of incidents and
emergencies. Operators shall retain records necessary to administer the Plan.
3.2 Considerations
Areas covered in the Plan shall include, but are not limited to, the following:
• Normal operations and maintenance
• Corrosion control and testing
• Making repairs and maintaining records
• Abnormal operations
• Startup and shutdown
• Maintenance management systems
• Equipment/system startup and shutdown
• Safety precautions
• Equipment maintenance
• Testing and inspection
• Testing, inspection and survey of facilities
• Communications
• Emergency plan and response
Operating and Maintenance Plans shall be reviewed and updated at intervals not
exceeding 15 months but at least once each calendar year or upon significant addition or
expansion to the facility or process changes. The Plan shall be reviewed for effectiveness
and adequacy and shall be modified accordingly.
These plans and procedures shall meet the standards outlined in the Enron Gas LDC
Operating Guidelines, local regulatory requirements and local Management Standards.
The plans and procedures must be revised to reflect changes in regulations, operating
conditions and management directives.
4. References
• CFR 192.603, General Provisions
• CFR 192.605, Procedural Manual for Operations, Maintenance and Emergencies
4.2 American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
• B31.8, 850.3, Essential Features of the Operation and Maintenance Plan

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Reporting and Investigation of Incidents
Doc. # ADM-101D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements to be followed for writing and performing procedures
involving incident control, repair, reporting, investigation and documentation for hazardous
materials incidents and commercial motor vehicle accidents.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
The information in this guideline is intended to assist operating personnel in accurately
identifying reportable incidents and complying with governmental requirements for the
reporting of such incidents. This guideline outlines terminology and responsibilities and
reviews basic principles for the development of procedures to ensure safety and
efficiency.
3.2 Considerations
Each facility shall develop procedures for the reporting of incidents as mandated by local
regulations. It is the responsibility of each facility to identify the regulatory requirements
in effect for that particular location and prepare procedures to ensure compliance.
Considerations for preparing those procedures are listed below.
• Definition of a “Reportable Incident”
• Agency to which an incident is reported (name, telephone number, fax number,
address, etc.)
• Form for the report (verbal, written, etc.)
• Information required in the report
• Time permitted for reporting
• Follow-up requirements after initial reporting
Various governmental agencies have strict requirements for reporting certain safety and
environmental occurrences within an operating facility. Failure to comply with these
regulations can result in fines being imposed on the Company or individuals within the
organization. Procedures for reporting and investigation of incidents shall be developed
and maintained in order to ensure compliance with government regulations for the
disclosure and reporting of specified occurrences within the operating facility.
Prompt initial reporting followed by continued communication of information and data to
the appropriate regulatory agency is crucial. Aid in the investigation of the cause of such
incidents is also very important. An understanding of the responsibilities of Codes,
Environmental Affairs, Gas Control, Field Operations and Safety is essential to the
smooth handling of incidents.
To accomplish the above, it is necessary that prompt notification be given to the Codes,
Environmental Affairs or Safety departments within the Operating Company. Incidents
not requiring reporting or investigation by these departments will be handled by Field
Operations as per local requirements and the requirements of Guideline ADM-103D,
Investigation of Accidents and Failures.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # ADM-101D

While it is the Company’s policy to comply with all such regulations, it is not intended
that information beyond that mandated be voluntarily disclosed. Procedures shall
identify responsibility and limit authority to responsible facility management or EHS
personnel.
What Incidents Should be Reported?
Safety incidents are to be reported to the department responsible for regulation
compliance.
In the absence of specific definition by the agencies, the Company defines a Reportable
Incident as a release of flammable, toxic, corrosive or hazardous material from a facility
or pipeline that results in any of the following:
• Injury to an employee, contractor or member of the public requiring hospitalization
• Death of an employee, contractor or member of the public
• Estimated damages of U.S. $50,000 or more including the value of lost product,
repair costs, costs of temporary measures and damage to property of others
• Rupture of a pipe or component allowing product release. (A rupture is the
propagation of a defect requiring isolation and blowdown of the facility.)
• An event that results in an intentional (but unplanned) emergency shutdown at an
LNG facility.
The following incidents shall be reported to the Environmental Affairs Department:
• Material spills to the air, land, surface or ground water
• Gaseous (excluding natural gas meeting gas sales quality requirements), liquid or
solid spills exceeding the reportable quantity (RQ) of hazardous or toxic substances
(refer to Global Asset Operations Environmental Guidelines)
Release of emissions exceeding permit limits shall be reported on the next regularly
scheduled workday. This shall include the following:
• A discharge of reportable material to the atmosphere
• Release of a reportable liquid or solid including wastewater
• Noise that exceeds applicable permit limits
Hazardous Materials Transportation and Commercial Motor Vehicle incidents shall be
reported to Safety.
NOTE:A commercial motor vehicle for the purpose of this guideline is a
vehicle used in commerce on public highways that has a gross vehicle or
combination weight rating above 10,000 pounds or is used for transporting a
quantity of hazardous materials requiring placards.
Incidents are defined as transportation, loading, unloading and storage of a hazardous

material or waste leading to the following conditions:
• Injury requiring in-patient hospitalization or death of an employee or member of the
public occurs
• Property damage in excess of U.S. $50,000
• Evacuation of the general public lasting one hour or longer
• Shutdown of a major transportation artery or facility for one or more hours
• Alteration of the flight pattern or routine of an aircraft

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # ADM-101D

• Fire, breakage, spillage or suspected radioactive contamination involving shipment of
radioactive material
• Release of a marine pollutant exceeding 119 gallons of liquid or 882 pounds of solid
When a commercial motor vehicle is involved (except when boarding or alighting from a
stationary vehicle or loading or unloading cargo), a report shall be made when the
following occurs:
• Injury requiring immediate medical treatment away from the scene of the occurrence
• Death of an employee or member of the public
• Disabling damage to a vehicle requiring removal by a tow truck or some other vehicle
Operations Responsibilities
The minimum responsibilities for Operations shall include the following:
• Establish initial control of each incident with the help of the first supervisor or other
designated employee on the scene.
• Contact Gas Control to report the incident.
• Reporting of the incident shall be made immediately after control of the situation is
established and a preliminary assessment of conditions is made.
• Call the Enron International Crisis Hotline with details of the incident. Refer to the
appropriate emergency plan.
The appropriate internal departments shall perform a technical investigation or the
technical portion of the overall investigation. Field Operations will undertake the
following:
• Secure the site, leaving it undisturbed if possible, until the appropriate investigating
individual(s) is on site. If the site cannot be left undisturbed, document the site and
incident details and preserve the site and details as indicated in the appropriate
emergency plan or in Guideline ADM-103D, Investigation of Accidents and Failures.
• Arrange for the shipment of materials or evidence to be transferred to locations as
designated by the investigating individual(s).
• Arrange interviews of Field Operations employees as needed.
• Conduct an overall investigation per Guideline ADM-103D and prepare a report
consistent with the particular incident.
3.4 Records
Detailed documentation of the incident investigation and copies of all reports shall be
retained for at least five years from the date of the incident.
4. References
• CFR 191.3, Definitions
• CFR 191.5, Telephone Notice of Certain Incidents
• CFR 191.7, Address for Written Reports
• CFR 191.9, Distribution System: Incident Report
• CFR 193.2011, Reporting

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # ADM-101D
4.1 Code of Federal Regulations 49 (Continued)

• CFR 171.15, Temporary Regulation; Liquefied Compressed Gases in Cargo Tank
Motor Vehicles
• CFR Part 191, Transportation of Natural and Other Gas by Pipeline; Annual Reports;
Incident Reports and Safety Related Condition Reports
• CFR Part 390, Federal Motor Carrier Safety Regulations
4.2 Code of Federal Regulation 29
• CFR 1910.119, Process Safety Management (PSM)
• ADM-103D, Investigation of Accidents and Failures
• PPL-403D, Emergency Plans
4.4 Enron Guidelines
• Crisis Management Guidelines
• Environmental Implementation Guidelines
• AMSE B31.4, 850.4, Essential Features of the Emergency Plan
• ASME B31.8, 454, Emergency Plans

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Investigation of Accidents and Failures
Doc. # ADM-103D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements to be followed for investigating, analyzing and
documenting accidents and equipment and facility failures to minimize the possibility of
recurrence.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
In the event of an accident or failure, appropriate action shall be taken to protect people
first and then property, in accordance with the applicable Emergency Action Plan.
3.2 Considerations
After establishing initial control of the situation, Corporate or Operations Office, Gas
Control and appropriate staff departments shall be notified, as applicable, of those
incidents affecting their operating responsibilities.
All listed accidents and failures shall be investigated and a detailed report shal be
prepared. The Codes Compliance, Environmental Affairs and Safety Units are
responsible for contributing to the technical investigation. Central technical or other staff
department assistance shall be requested when location resources are inadequate.
Investigation Requirements
Qualified personnel shall be dispatched, as needed, to the location of the accident or
failure. Depending upon the situation, such personnel may include corrosion,
environmental, metallurgical, safety, welding and other disciplines.
A complete investigation of the failure shall be conducted, which shall address at least the
following:
• Nature and history of the failed facility or equipment
• Sequence of events leading up to the accident or failure
• General data on any systems involved including the facility specifications
• Operating conditions at the time of failure or accident
• Physical damage to any facilities or equipment
• Injury to Company and/or third party individuals
• Cause of accident or failure
• Laboratory analysis, if appropriate, to investigate facts
• Preventive measures to be taken to prevent recurrence
• A review of employee activities to determine whether appropriate procedures were
followed
• Procedure changes necessary
If possible, failed equipment or portions of failed systems shall be left undisturbed until
the appropriate investigating individual(s) arrive on site. If the site or equipment cannot
be left undisturbed, the situation shall be thoroughly documented prior to disturbing it.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # ADM-103D

In order that the location and orientation of equipment or failed portions can be identified
later and other necessary data is not lost by repair work, documentation should include
the following:
• Taking photographs
• Making dimensioned sketches
• Performing corrosion surveys
• Collecting soil and liquid samples, as applicable
• Collecting failed parts, if possible, for furthur evaluation
Drug Testing of Individuals Involved, if applicable
No later than 32 hours after a pipeline safety incident has occurred, each employee whose
performance contributed to or may have contributed to the incident shall be drug tested.
All reasonable steps shall be taken to test involved persons even though injured,
unconscious or otherwise unable to evidence consent. In addition, ensure that contractors
arrange tests for their employees. Contact Human Resources for assistance with drug
testing.
Alcohol Testing of Individuals Involved, if applicable
Each employee whose performance contributed to or may have contributed to the incident
shall be tested for alcohol within 2 hours, but no longer than 8 hours, after a pipeline
safety incident has occurred. Ensure that contractors arrange tests for their employees.
Contact Human Resources for assistance with alcohol testing.
Testing of Individuals Involved in a Motor Vehicle Incident
Drivers shall be tested for drugs and alcohol for the following reasons:
• After a commercial motor vehicle incident is reported involving loss of life
• A driver receives a citation for a moving traffic violation for alcohol and drugs
Testing shall be done as follows:
• Testing for alcohol shall be done within 2 hours, but no longer than 8 hours, after the
incident.
• Testing for drugs shall be within 32 hours following an incident.
Contact Human Resources for assistance with the testing.
3.4 Records
Detailed records shall be maintained of all accidents as well as equipment or facility
failures. The files shall be retained for at least five years. Contact the Legal Department
prior to destroying a file.
4. References
4.1 Enron Global Asset Operations Safety Guidelines
4.2 Enron Crisis Response Manual
4.3 Enron Human Resources Policy

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # ADM-103D

• ADM-101D, Reporting and Investigation of Incidents
• CFR 192.617, Investigation of Failures
• CFR 199.11, Drug and Alcohol Testing
• CFR 199.225(a), Alcohol Tests Requirements
• CFR 382.303, Post Accident Testing
• ASME B31.8, 850.5, Pipeline Failure Investigation

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Reporting Safety Related Conditions
Doc. # ADM-104D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements to be followed for identifying conditions constituting
safety related conditions and establishes responsibilities for reporting safety related conditions on
in-service pipelines.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Operations personnel shall look for possible safety related conditions while conducting
routine operating functions, inspections and surveillance. Operations shall document a
possible safety related condition and submit that information to the appropriate
department. If an unsafe condition is discovered, the facility shall be taken out of service
and the condition investigated and repaired, if necessary, before returning the facility to
service. Make the appropriate reports to state or federal agencies, where applicable.
Threshold Levels
The following guidelines establish the threshold (limits) levels for a safety related
condition.
On a pipeline operating at or above 20% of specified minimum yield strength, the
severity of corrosion must exceed the following before a possible safety related condition
can exist:
• General corrosion has reduced the wall thickness to less than required for the system
maximum allowable operating pressure. (Refer to Engineering Standards 0150 and
8350.)
• Localized corrosion pitting on ineffectively coated or bare pipeline results in pits
deeper than 80% of pipe wall thickness.
• A material defect, physical damage or localized pitting on an effectively coated and
cathodically protected pipeline that requires repair under Guideline PPL-201D, Repair
Procedures.
• A leak in a pipeline characterized by the need for immediate corrective action to
protect the public or property including those that occur in residential or commercial
areas in conjunction with a natural disaster, where a flammable concentration of gas is
detected inside a building or involves response by police or fire departments.
• Unintended movement or abnormal loading by environmental causes, such as an
earthquake, landslide or flood that impairs the serviceability of a pipeline. This
applies to suddenly occurring movement in particular.
• Any equipment malfunction or operating error that causes the pressure in a pipeline to
exceed the maximum allowable operating pressures (MAOP) plus the buildup or
overpressure allowed by Guideline VLV-102D; Pressure Limiting and Relief Devices.
• A shutdown or reduction in operating pressure of 20% or more that is made in
reaction to a known unsafe condition. This would include facilities where a
maximum allowable operating pressure is reduced because of continuing surveillance
per Guideline VLV-406D; Continuing Surveillance.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Reporting Safety Related Conditions
Doc. # ADM-104D
The following conditions are not to be reported when there is a reduction in pressure:
• Abandonment
• Routine maintenance or construction
• Facilitate inspection for potential problems
• Avoid problems related to external loading from blasting or subsidence
• Provide for safe line movement
• As a precaution to avoid an unsafe condition
3.3 Records
Document all safety related conditions, the results of the investigation and all remedial
action taken. Retain the records for the life of the facility.
4. References
• CFR 192.605(d), Procedural Manuals for Operations, Maintenance and Emergencies
• PPL-201D, Repair Procedures
• PPL-406D, Continuing Surveillance
• VLV-102D, Pressure Limiting and Relief Devices
4.3 Pipeline Engineering Standards
• ES 0150, Maximum Allowable Operating Pressure Criteria
• ES 8350, Pipeline Defects and Repairs - General Requirements
• B31.8, 850.3, Essential Features of the Operating and Maintenance Plan

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Marking and Documentation of Materials
Doc. # ADM-105D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements to be followed for marking and documentation of
pipes, valves, flanges, fittings, pressure-containing components and major electrical and
mechanical equipment.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Marking and documentation of valves, flanges, fittings, lengths of pipe or other
component intended to contain pressure as well as major electrical and/or mechanical
equipment is essential to ensure the safety of personnel working on or around these items.
3.2 Considerations
Materials used in gathering systems must meet these requirements except as specifically
excluded below. (Refer to Engineering Standard 8707 for a definition of rural gathering.)
The following are excluded from the requirements of this guideline:
• Pipes, valves, flanges, fittings and pressure-containing components used in
non-hazardous fluid service such as instrument air and potable water.
• If the service is low pressure (<60 psig) and moderate temperature (40°F to 130°F).
(Refer to Engineering Standard 0172 for definition of a hazardous fluid.)
• Engine and compressor parts except for valves, flanges, pipe fittings, pipe and similar
components used on or with an engine or compressor.
Equipment Marking
Each valve, flange, fitting, length of pipe or other component that is intended to contain
pressure and major electrical and/or mechanical equipment, shall be marked by the
vendor, original manufacturer or fabricator. Thermoplastic fittings must be marked in
accordance to ASTM D 2513.
Detail the markings necessary on the Purchase Order, Blanket Order or Local Purchase
Order, so that an applicable item will be marked when received as prescribed in the
specification or standard to which it was manufactured.
Markings for pipe and Y-Grade fittings shall also include the purchase document number
and, for steel pipe, the heat number. These requirements do not preclude having the
vendor apply other markings in addition to the minimum normally required.
Verify that applicable items are marked as detailed on the purchasing document at the
time of receipt. Handle improperly marked items or items without markings as if they are
"wrong material".
Maintain purchase document number markings on transmission and non-rural gathering
pipe and pressurized hydrocarbon liquid pipe (excluding all 2.375" outside diameter and
smaller piping except for 2.375" and smaller used in cross country pipelines such as
branchlines) and Y-Grade fittings (fittings do not include saddles, wrap around
reinforcement and flanges) until they are installed.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Marking and Documentation of Materials
Doc. # ADM-105D

Maintain the purchase document number and any other appropriate identification
markings on the material in a manner that does not damage the material to ensure
marking remains visible until the material is installed. Renew marking as necessary.
Cross reference mill test reports and fitting certification papers with the purchase order
number. All steel pipe must have mill test reports when received and Y-Grade fittings
must have certifications. Reference Engineering Standard 4900 for fitting certification
requirements.
3.4 Records
Document material usage and submit material documentation items as required by
Engineering Standards 8706 and 8707.
4. References
• ES 0172, Documentation of Materials
• ES 4900, Purchase of High Test Y-Grade Wrought Welding Fittings
• ES 8706, As-Built Data for Transmission and Non-Rural Gathering Pipelines
• ES 8707, As-Built Data for Rural Gathering Pipelines
• CFR 192.63, Marking of Materials
4.3 ASTM 2513
4.4 American Society of Mechanical Engineers

• ASME , B31.8, 813, Marking

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Procedure Review Requirements
Doc. # ADM-108D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for reviewing work performed by Operations
personnel, covered within the Gas LDC Operating Guidelines.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
Conduct a procedure review twice each calendar year. Reviews may be conducted any
time during the half year; however, two reviews should be accomplished each year.
Select a guideline from the Gas LDC Operating Guidelines and review the preparation
and work done by personnel to satisfy that guideline. The purpose of the review is to
assess the effectiveness and adequacy of the particular guideline used with respect to
performing normal operations and maintenance functions.
Submit a brief written, either electronic or paper memo, to Asset Operations in Houston
outlining recommended modifications to a guideline whenever a deficiency is found.
3.2 Records
Retain records of procedure reviews. Prepare a brief memo or report documenting the
date and results of each procedure review. Retain a copy for 3 years.
4. References
• CFR 192.605(b)(8) and 192.605 (c)(4), Procedural Manual for Operations,
Maintenance and Emergencies
• ASME B31.8, 850.3, Essential Features of the Operating and Maintenance Plan

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Recordkeeping and Retention
Doc. # ADM-109D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for recordkeeping and record retention for all piping,
new installations and modifications to existing components.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Pipeline Physical Data
The Operator shall maintain records and maps detailing the physical characteristics of the
pipeline. At a minimum, the following information shall be retained:
• Location and identification of pipe including diameter, grade, type and nominal wall
thickness
• Location of all crossings of public roads, railroads, rivers, buried utilities and other
pipelines
• Location and identification of compressor, scraper traps, valves and associated
equipment
• Cathodically protected facilities shall be designated
• Right-of-way locations and land owner
• Location and identification of safety devices
• Maximum operating pressure of each pipeline
• Date when each segment of pipe, facility or equipment was placed in service
Existing Installations
Maintain records for every leak, opening, repair, line rupture, survey and leak testing of
all buried and aboveground piping.
Maintain a permanent record of operation and maintenance of all pipe.
New or Replacement Installations
In addition the requirements above, a complete identification of all installed materials
including valves, joints, manufactured assemblies and electrical installations, a permanent
record must be maintained. Drawings and construction records, including inspections
and testing, shall be maintained.
The number and date of the purchase order must be shown for the following articles:
• Valves, pipes, joints and supports equal or greater than 2” (Manufacturer’s testing
information should also be provided).
• All large mechanical equipment.
• All large electrical equipment.
• Each article purchased under specification that is not recognized as Industry Standard
Operations Data
Daily operations data shall be retained including the discharge pressure of stations, flow
rates on pipelines and any emergency or abnormal operations.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Recordkeeping and Retention
Doc. # ADM-109D
3.3 Records
The records for each installation, piping or section shall be maintained until the
installation, piping or section is abandoned, removed or replaced.
Operations data shall be retained for three years.
4. References
• CFR, 195.404, Maps and Records
• ASME B31.4, 455, Records

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Operator Training
Doc. # ADM-201D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements to be followed for developing the Operator Training
Program.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
Training Requirements
The Company shall develop an Operator Training program to ensure that all operations
and maintenance personnel are aware of the proper techniques, safety precautions,
requirements and the potential hazards of the products transported.
At the conclusion of the training program, each operator shall be knowledgeable in, as a
minimum, the following areas:
• Operations, maintenance and emergencey procedures
• Characteristics and flammable qualities of the hazardous liquids transported
• Detection of potentially hazardous situations and alievation of the situation
• Prevention of the release of hazardous liquids
• Proper use of firefighting equipment and breathing apparatus, if applicable
• Safe repair procedures
Review Frequency
At intervals not exceeding 15 months, but at least once each calendar year, review
personnel performance of the aspects of the training program.
At intervals not exceeding 15 months, but at least once each calendar year, review the
training program material to ensure that it is effective and reflects the requirements of
current operations.
4. References
• CFR 195.403, Training
4.2 Training Operating Guidelines

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Customer Notification
Doc. # ADM-301D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for notifying customers of their responsibility for
maintaining both the underground piping as well as the exposed or aboveground piping
downstream of the meter. This includes any potential hazards associated with such piping.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Definitions
Customer-owned buried piping consists of buried piping up to the entry of a building
downstream or, if the customer’s buried piping does not enter a building, up to the
principal gas utilization equipment or first fence (wall) that surrounds that equipment.
Notification
Notification requirements are as follows:
• Customers shall be notified in writing that the company does not maintain the
customer’s piping.
• The customer shall be informed of the potential hazards of corrosion and leakage if
the piping is not properly maintained.
• If an unsafe condition is found to exist, the periodic inspection of buried piping for
leaks, corrosion (if metallic) and repair is strongly recommended
• Customers shall provide the Company with advance notification when excavation
work is planned near buried gas piping. Safety dictates that piping shall be located in
advance and the excavation done by hand.
• Plumbers and contractors are available to assist in locating; inspecting and repairing
the customer’s buried piping.
• Notification shall be made within 90 days after the first delivery of gas for new
service.
3.3 Records
Copies of customer notices shall be retained.
4. References
• CFR 192.16, Customer Notification

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Annual Reporting
Doc. # ADM-302D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for annual reporting to the Department of
Transportation (DOT), where applicable.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Annual reports are not required for facilities not covered by U.S. DOT regulations unless
local regulations contain a similar reporting requirement.
Procedures shall be in place to fulfill annual reporting requirements to DOT each year, no
later than March 15th for the preceding calendar year.
Annual reports are not required for systems that serve fewer than 100 customers from a
single source, master meter systems or LNG facilities. (Form RSPA F 7100.1-1 is used.)
4. References
• CFR 191.11, Distribution System: Annual Report

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # ADM-801D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for the evaluation of incidents resulting in physical
damage to Company facilities and the recovery of repair costs from the responsible party external
to the Company.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Costs for repair and/or replacement resulting from damage to Company facilities shall be
collected from the responsible party as outlined by this guideline. Physical damage to
Company facilities requiring an estimated repair or replacement cost exceeding U.S.
$1000 must be reported as indicated below.
3.2 Considerations
The following items shall be considered and applied in the development of the required
procedures.
Initial Assessment
• Making an initial telephone report of damage to the Operations office and advising of
any customer service reduction or interruption.
• Taking pictures of the damage and making a written description listing the damaged
materials and equipment, complete with date and time.
• Detailing the cause of the damage, the names of all involved parties and any witnesses
observing the incident.
• Reporting loss of product.
Each facility shall develop procedures to be followed in the event of an incident in which
a third party causes physical damage to Company property or facilities. Those procedures
shall incorporate the considerations presented above.
Cost of Repair
Costs shall be accumulated during repair or replacement and an invoice shall be prepared
and sent to the responsible party including at least the following items:
• Labor costs according to current schedules with overhead costs added.
• Utilization costs for equipment.
• Materials at cost.
• Product volume lost at current billing rates.
• Miscellaneous expenses such as telephone calls, travel costs, contract or third party
costs, etc.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # ADM-801D

Invoice the Responsible Party
Call to advise the responsible party of the extent of the damage, their liability, the method
of settlement and the billing procedures. Further procedures are as follows:
• Send a written confirmation to the responsible party and retain a copy in the file.
• Upon completion of repair and replacement caused by the damage, mail the invoice
complete with cover letter to the responsible party.
• Following 30 days without response from the responsible party, prepare and send a
second cover letter with a copy of the invoice.
• Following an additional 15 days without response, forward a copy of the entire file to
the Legal Department.
• Collected monies will be forwarded to the Accounting Department.
3.4 Records
A copy of the entire file shall be retained for five years. The file shall not be destroyed
without the consent of the Legal Department. Retain appropriate records regarding
repairs.
4. References
4.1 Enron Global Asset Operation Safety Guidelines

4.3 Enron Accounting Guidelines

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Property Losses, Fraud and Theft
Doc. # ADM-802D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for reporting suspected unlawful activities that result
in losses to the Company through fraud and/or theft.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
The guideline is intended for internal Company reporting. The reportable incidents are
those caused by intentional deception or stealing of Company resources, property,
materials, equipment or other items.
3.2 Considerations
The Location Manager or Supervisor may immediately involve local law enforcement
authority when:
• unauthorized entry alarms are activated and physical evidence exists that indicates the
presence or possible presence of an intruder on or in Company property
• violent or harmful action could potentially occur.
Contact the Legal Department as soon as practical following such involvement. The Legal
Department shall follow up on all enforcement and prosecution proceedings.
Contact the applicable Safety Manager in the event of intrusion or theft of Company
facilities, equipment or materials. The Manager will assist local management in
evaluating the effectiveness of present security systems or measures and make
recommendations regarding security improvements, as warranted.
Procedures
Investigation of suspected unlawful activity shall proceed as follows:
• Any employee suspecting unlawful activity shall notify his immediate supervisor.
The suspected unlawful actions shall be investigated and documented by the
supervisor.
• The supervisor's report shall be forwarded to the District or Regional Manager, as
applicable, for their review and comments before informing the Operations Vice
President.
• The Operations Vice President shall consult with the Legal Department regarding the
course of action to be taken. The action shall attempt to recover or minimize the
losses to the Company.
• Following settlement of the case, the resolving individual shall submit a final report.
The final report shall be distributed with confidentiality, as appropriate.
• Take the necessary actions to have stolen and destroyed items removed from Property
records.
3.4 Records
Retain file at the Location/District for at least five years. Consult the Legal Department
prior to destroying a file.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Radio Equipment Operation and Maintenance
Doc. # COM-201D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for the operation, inspection, testing and maintenance
of mobile and fixed operational radio systems.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
A Radio Station Record file shall be maintained for recording service measurements and
inspections as required by all applicable regulations.
3.2 Considerations
Mobile or fixed radio equipment shall be properly authorized by the applicable federal
and/or state government entity. Transmitter adjustments, measurements, or tests of
licensed radio equipment shall be performed by or under the supervision of a qualified
radio technician.
Document all service, measurements and inspections including equipment identification
number, detailed description of the service performed, date and technician performing the
work. Keep copies of the applicable regulations accessible at base stations where
employees use radio equipment.
Inspect Radio Transmitters
Inspect and maintain radio transmitters within the technical limitations and tolerances.
Record transmitter measurements when:
• One is initially installed
• Maintenance is performed
• Any change is made
• Every three years for fixed and mobile equipment or as often as may be necessary to
ensure proper operation
• Annually for microwave radio systems
Inspection and Maintenance of Radio Towers
When inspection and/or maintenance is required for radio towers, the following steps
shall be taken:
• Visually observe all tower lighting or lighting failure indicators that are required by
current licensing at least once each 24 hours and record observations.
• Immediately report any failure of any required light on any tower not corrected within
30 minutes to the nearest Flight Service Station or office of the corresponding
aviation agency.
• Notify lighting resumptions immediately by telephone.
• Inspect automatic lighting devices, indicators and alarm systems at intervals not
exceeding three months. Record the inspection and observation.
• Visually inspect all communication tower structures a minimum of once each year.
Verify that lighting is as required by current licensing and that other license
requirements are being met.
• Record the tower inspection data in the Radio Station Record.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Radio Equipment Operation and Maintenance
Doc. # COM-201D
3.4 Records
Retain records of fixed radio systems at the station. All records shall be retained for the
life of the particular radio facility involved or as required by the corresponding
authorities, if longer.
4. References
4.1 Applicable Federal and State Regulations for Communications

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Telephone System Answering Services
Doc. # COM-301D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for receiving and responding to external calls
reporting emergencies or requesting line locations.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Callers shall not be expected to dial more than one telephone number to reach a Company
representative. Emergency calls taken by an answering service shall be returned
immediately by Company personnel. Locations that are periodically unattended shall
have the capability of rerouting calls to an attended location.
Recommended Procedure
Develop procedures to select a method for rerouting calls, depending on available local
services. If necessary, engage a “professional” quality answering service when an outside
service is required. Instruct answering service personnel to obtain the following
information:
• Identify the operating company when answering the call
• Obtain the caller's telephone number, name and town
• Ask the caller if there is an emergency
• Advise the caller that a Company employee will return the call.
• Record details if the caller insists on leaving a message but remind the caller that a
Company employee will return the call.
Annually, make quality-of-service checks by making test calls.
• Check the time taken to relay a message.
• Check the accuracy of the relayed message.
• Initiate corrective action immediately, if required.
“On-Call” Staffing
Provide the answering location or answering service with a telephone listing of
employees designated to receive messages. Revise the listing each time a change is
made. Electronic pagers may be used to provide employees with the mobility required
when performing their regular job duties.
3.3 Records
Documentation of emergency calls is required including date and time of the call, name
and phone number of the caller, nature of the emergency, name of the person responding
to the call and a brief description of the resolution of the matter. Retain documentation
for at least three years.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Telephone System Answering Services
Doc. # COM-301D
4. References
• ADM-101D, Reporting and Investigation of Pipeline Incidents
• CFR 192.614, Damage Prevention Program
• CFR 192.615, Emergency Plans
4.3 Enron Crisis Manual

• ASME B31.8, 850.4, Essential Features of the Emergency Plan
• ASME B31.8, 850.411, Written Emergency Procedures

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition Systems
Inspection and Testing Doc. # COM-401D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for the inspection and testing of Data Acquisition
Systems (DAS) and Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition Systems (SCADA).
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
A Data Acquisition System automatically gathers selected information from remote
pipeline operations for central monitoring. From a central location, a Supervisory
Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System can also direct control signals for remote
operation.
3.2 Considerations
The communications medium between central and remote locations may be leased
telephone lines, radio, satellite or a combination of these systems.
Measurement, control and equipment status information is locally conditioned by various
types of equipment at the remote location to interface through a modem with the
communication systems.
Monitoring
If a system or equipment malfunction is detected, repairs shall be performed as soon as
practical. At remote sites, all system components shall be visually inspected monthly,
with input and output data measured and compared with data indicated at the central
monitoring and control location.
Semiannual Testing and Inspections
Conduct semiannual tests and inspections that include the following:
• Local transmitter signals
• Local controller signals
• Local gas measurement microcomputer output signals
• Local contact status of the following:
a. Equipment - start/stop
b. Valves - open/close
c. Common alarm status
• Local control system as follows:
a. Power supply
b. Temperature inside cabinets
c. Check of self diagnostics
d. Check modem output signal to communication system
Check the connection to the communication system.
Check/test the proper operation of the communication systems per Guidelines
COM-201D, Radio Equipment Operation and Maintenance, or COM-501D, Microwave
Systems Inspection and Testing.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition Systems
Inspection and Testing Doc. # COM-401D

Test DAS Used in Gas Measurement
• Test and inspect all components used in gas measurement. Record the results as
referenced in those guidelines.
• Test and calibrate individual system components at the frequencies required for
compressor or pump equipment. Document the results.
• Calibrate the instruments required for tests every two years.
3.4 Records
Record test and inspection results as required by the particular procedure. Retain records
for three years.
4. References
• COM-201D, Radio Equipment Operation and Maintenance
• COM-501D, Microwave Systems Inspection and Testing
• CS-101D, Control Instrumentation Testing and Calibration
• MTR-101D, Bellows Meter Inspection and Tests
• MTR-102D, Rotary Meter Inspection and Tests
• MTR-201D, Orifice Meter Inspection and Tests
• MTR-202D, Orifice Meter Run Inspection and Tests
• MTR-401D, Turbine Meter Inspection and Tests

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Microwave Systems Inspection and Testing
Doc. # COM-501D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for developing site-specific procedures for the
inspection and testing of microwave system equipment.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
For purposes of this guideline, a Microwave System is a communications system
operating at a frequency of 1000 MHz and above.
Recommended Procedure
Inspect and maintain microwave system equipment to assure that it operates within the
defined limitations and tolerances. Inspections shall include a check of the following
system parameters:
• Carrier frequency
• Power delivered by the transmitter
• Carrier deviation
• Noise
A visual inspection of the following items shall be made:
• Shelter overall condition
• Safety equipment
• Utilities, including air conditioners
• Batteries and charger
• Standby power equipment
• Commercial power meter reading
• Tower, antenna and illumination controls
• General site conditions
Compare the inspection results against values that were determined at the initial
installation of the equipment or following subsequent adjustments or revisions. Conduct
inspections monthly.
The performance test shall include an entire microwave radio network system. Initiate
the test at the dispatchers master station and include the point-to-point and the point-to-
multi-point remote stations.
Tests shall follow procedures listed in the appropriate manufacturer's manuals. The
following items shall be included for each test.
• Check for radio noise, both for receiving and transmitting.
• Check the receiving signal for strength and clarity.
• Check for frequency shifts.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Microwave Systems Inspection and Testing
Doc. # COM-501D
The following steps apply for testing:

• For test purposes only, the emission of an unmodulated carrier is permissible for the
duration of the test.
• Instruments utilized during tests shall be checked and calibrated.
• Tests shall be made by or under the direction of a person technically qualified to
perform the tests.
• Tests shall be conducted on an annual basis.
3.3 Records
Record inspection and test results. Retain inspection results for a minimum of one year
and test records for at least three years.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Control Instrumentation Testing and Calibration
Doc. # CS-101D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for the level and frequency for verifying proper
operation of control, shutdown and various other devices as well as electrical equipment that is
not covered under Guidelines CS-301D and CS-402D
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Maintenance testing methods shall conform to the manufacturer's specifications and
Company Guidelines.
3.2 Considerations
When one or more compressor units at a station have a service category of In-service,
Backup or Standby (See Appendix A), all the tasks described in Schedule I, Group A must
be accomplished. In addition, all tasks covered by Schedule I, Group B that are
associated with a building in which one or more compressor units have a service category
of In-service, Backup or Standby must be accomplished.
When compressor units have a service category of In-service, Back-up or Stand-by, all
tasks in Schedule I, Group C must be accomplished.
When compressor units having a service category of Seasonal Available, Seasonal
Unavailable or Idled are ordered into service, all Group A, B and C tasks associated with
the unit and building that have not been previously performed within the prescribed time
period must be performed. These tasks must be performed prior to placing the unit in
service or immediately after startup if the task can not be performed without operation of
the unit.
Tasks described in Schedule I, Group D must continue to be performed at all stations
unless the station has an Abandoned service category.
Maintenance, testing intervals and record keeping for rental compressor units operated
and maintained by the Company shall be in compliance in the same manner as units
owned by the Company.
When treatment, processing or compression of gas is provided as a complete service on a
contractual basis with the facilities being connected to piping or other facilities owned
and operated by the Company, maintenance shall be performed by the vendor in
accordance with the contract as follows:
• When definitive maintenance requirements are specified in a contract, on a periodic
basis, ensure that the contractor is performing in accordance with the contract.
• If definitive maintenance requirements are not outlined in a contract, monitor the
general maintenance level to establish a confidence level in the equipment to ensure
its safety and operability.
• If lack of maintenance or incorrect installation is thought to exist that may present
unnecessary risk to the Company's personnel or property, request the equipment be
shut down. If local resolution of the risk cannot be resolved, management shall be
contacted in order to determine resolution.
Global Asset Operations Page 1 of .6

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # CS-101D

Reference Guideline VLV-102D for the inspection and testing of all regulators and relief
valves on gas, air, steam, water and product facilities. Also reference Guideline
VLV-101D which covers emergency valve inspections and maintenance.
Control and other devices as well as electrical equipment essential to safety and/or
reliable operation must be tested, observed and calibrated in accordance with this
guideline.
It is recognized that there are numerous items at most locations that do not fall in the
above categories. Each location must determine which devices fit the "essential" category
and include them in the maintenance schedule. Those devices that are nonessential will
be tested, observed or calibrated as deemed appropriate and economical. Reference
Engineering Standards 7120 and 7150 to aid in the determination of "essential" devices.
Items on the "Maintenance Testing Frequencies" listing may not be all-inclusive due to
the variety of equipment and devices installed.
3.3 Expectations/Recommendations
Inspect and test each system or device at intervals shown in the applicable schedule
group. This inspection and testing includes but is not limited to the following:
• If an inspection is intended, visually inspect the device for corrosion, moisture, loose
connections or foreign material that might interfere with its operation.
• If a test is intended, isolate items such as dump valves which, if operated, will cause
unnecessary waste of gas or chemicals or might cause an unwanted shutdown of
equipment. Replace components if a bench test is deemed necessary.
• Test the device by introducing an input signal or simulated condition that causes the
device to activate, producing an output response that will shut down or isolate
equipment or cause operation of valves or equipment. Actual equipment shutdown or
activation by the device is not a requirement.
• Clean, repair or replace parts as considered necessary.
• If calibration is intended, calibrate by adjusting the mechanism to ensure that a correct
output response or operation always corresponds to an input signal or condition
within the manufacturer's prescribed operational tolerance.
3.4 Records
Record significant actions taken and the date. Retain the records for the service life of the
particular equipment.
4. References
• CS-301D, Remote Control Shutdown Device Inspection, Maintenance and
Calibration
• CS-402D, Emergency Shutdown System Training, Operation and Testing
• PPL-408D, Abandonment of Facilities
• VLV- 101D, Emergency Valve Maintenance
• ES 7120, Design Guidelines for Emergency Shutdown Systems
• ES 7150, Engine Protective Devices

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # CS-101D
SCHEDULE I
MAINTENANCE TESTING FREQUENCIES
GROUP A
Quarterly Semi-Annually Annually

Not to exceed 4 ½ months Not to exceed 7 ½ months Not to exceed 15 months
1. Plant Control Information Devices
A. Control Rooms Gauge Board Calibrate+

B. Control Center Instruments Calibrate+
C. Data Acquisition Transmitters, Receivers Calibrate*
D. Station Control Panel Instruments Test+
E. Flow, Pressure, Temperature, Level, Calibrate*
Control Loops
2. Process Control System Devices Calibrate+
3. Electrical Distribution Switchboard
A. Contacts and Bus Bars Inspect*

B. Delta Phase Voltage to Ground Test*
C. Voltage Regulators or Generators Inspect+ Test+
4. D. C. Equipment
A. Storage Batteries - Voltage and Inspect

Specific Gravity Monthly+
B. Battery Charger Inspect+
C. Power Inverters Inspect+ Test+
D. Wiring and Connections Inspect+
5. Generators Brushes, Wiring, Slip Rings Inspect+
and Commutator
* Required Tasks
+ Recommended Tasks

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # CS-101D
SCHEDULE I
GROUP B

1. Gas Detection System Inspect+ Calibrate*
2. Fire Detection System Controls
A. Temperature Rise Type, Excluding Inspect+ Test*

Non-adjustable Types
B. Light Wave Radiation Type Inspect+ Test*
3. Motors and Starters
A. Under 100 H.P. and 500 Volts Inspect+

B. Over 100 H.P. and/or 600 Volts Test*
4. Grounding System
A. Megger for Resistance <25 ohms Test*

B. Cable Inspect+
C. Connections Inspect+
5. Electrical Wiring and Equipment Insulation
to Ground Resistance on Critical Emergency
and Essential Circuits
A. Above 600 Volts Test*

B. Above 300 Volts Test+
* Required Tasks
+ Recommended Tasks

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # CS-101D
SCHEDULE I
GROUP C

1. Alarm and Shutdown Devices for Engines,
Motors, Compressors, Pumps and
Fin Fan Coolers
A.Adjustable types, that measure Test*

Temperature, pressure, vibration, or
Equipment speed. Exclude non-
Adjustable devices such as melting
alloy types.
2. Control Devices for Engines, Motors,
Compressors and Pumps
A. Condition and cleanliness of wire, Inspect*

tubing, connections and components.
B. Actuate from as many different Test*
Shutdown devices as practical on normal
Equipment shutdowns during the year.
3. Engine, Motor, and Compressor Control
Systems
A. Ambient Controllers Test*

B. Fuel-Air Ratio Controllers Test*
C. Ignition Retard Controls Test*
D. Exhaust Temperature Controllers Test*
E. Pocket Controllers Test*
4. Ignition System
A. Power Supply Inspect*

B. Coils Inspect*
C. Wire Inspect*
5. Engine Crankcase Pressure Relief Valves Inspect+
6. Thermometers Calibrate+
7. Pressure Gauges Calibrate+
* Required Tasks
+ Recommended Tasks

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # CS-101D
SCHEDULE I
GROUP D

1. Devices That Activate Valve Operators
A. On valves not considered essential Inspect+

during an emergency, that are locally
activated and have backup operation
mechanism.
B. On all other valves. Inspect* Test*
2. Emergency Shutdown System Devices
(The device test is in addition to the
annual ESD test.)
A. Shutdown Stations (ESD, BSD, CSD) Inspect+ Test*

B. Quick Depressurizing Stations Test+ Test*
* Required Tasks
+ Recommended Tasks

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Appendix A Doc. # CS-101aD
DEFINITIONS OF BASIC SERVICE CATEGORIES FOR MAJOR MAINLINE FACILITIES
A. In-Service
These facilities shall be available at Gas Control's request. It is the District's
responsibility to keep these units available during the designated "In Service" time.
B. Backup
It is the District's responsibility to maintain the facilities in this category available for
operation within four hours of request by Gas Control.
C. Standby
operation within 24 hours of request by Gas Control.
D. Seasonal Available
operation within seven days of request. The facility can be used as a source of emergency
replacement parts beyond the seven-day period at the District's discretion and with Gas
Control's knowledge and approval.
E. Seasonal Unavailable
Facilities in this category need not be available during a specified time and will be
considered unavailable for service. The District can use the facility for emergency
replacement parts within the specified time.
F. Idled
Once a facility appears in the idled category, the facility will be available for emergency
replacement parts at the District's discretion with a six-month return to service limitation.
G. Abandoned
Facilities classified in this category are formally abandoned. Reference Guideline PPL-
408. The facility is available for emergency replacement parts at the District’s discretion.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Compressor Operating Instructions
Doc. # CS-201D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for writing procedures to start-up, shut down and
operate natural gas compressor units.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Each applicable field location shall prepare detailed procedures covering start-up, normal
operations, upset conditions and shutdown for all complex equipment and process piping
systems (e.g., engine/compressors, boiler/hot water/heating systems, dehys., fired
equipment, station sequence controls, etc.). Simple equipment such as air compressors
without external lube or small pumps, which are not part of a complex system, do not
require written procedures. Reference Engineering Standard 7120 for design details of
shutdown systems.
3.2 Considerations
The wide variety of compressor units and auxiliary equipment associated with the
compressor units, gas treatment plants, plant equipment, field compressor installations
and pipeline operating conditions precludes the formulation of a fixed set of procedures
for all installations. However, written procedures shall be provided at each plant and
compressor location containing pertinent manufacturer's instructions and local station
directives applicable to starting, operating and shutting down of all compressor units,
auxiliaries and plant equipment. The station supervisor may add other checks to the
procedures as dictated by experience.
Written Plan
Develop written detailed procedures for the start-up, operation and shut down of natural
gas compressor units and other complex equipment. Display applicable instructions
prominently near the starting controls of each item of equipment.
Familiarize all personnel involved in operating compressor units and other complex
equipment and equipment associated with such units or equipment with items contained
in the respective operating procedures. Conduct familiarization as frequently as
employee experience or equipment changes dictate.
Review detailed instructions, at least annually, and revise if necessary.
Prior to Start
Prior to starting any compressor unit or other complex equipment, the operator shall
notify all personnel in the immediate vicinity of the compressor unit or other complex
equipment that the unit is about to be started.
The operator shall ensure that the following guidelines are complied with:
• All critical operating variables such as suction and discharge pressures are within the
safe limits of the unit.
• All critical plant operating variables such as operating pressures, solution levels, rates
and percentage strengths are within the safe limits of the plant facilities.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # CS-201D

• All personnel are clear of the equipment to be started.
• All applicable valves are properly positioned for starting or operating.
• All applicable safety alarm and shutdown devices are properly set to function.
• All electrical switches required for the starting sequence are properly positioned.
During Operation
The detailed instructions shall be followed for operating the equipment after it has been
started to assure that the equipment is within safe operating limits at all times.
In addition to those instructions, the following shall be strictly adhered to:
• On all manually operated installations, daily operating log sheets shall be filled out
with the critical operating variables noted and recorded on the log sheet at prescribed
time intervals throughout the daily 24 hour period.
• On all automatic installations, the attendant shall periodically check all operating
variables such as suction and discharge pressures, lube oil pressures, temperatures,
cooling water temperatures, solution levels, rates and strength percentages, etc. This
shall be done during his/her normal shift although a log sheet shall not be required.
• Automatic installations shall be equipped with sufficient alarm and shutdown devices
to shut down the installation any time an operating variable exceeds the maximum
safe limit set by the design limitations or the equipment manufacturer. If any
operating variable is noted to be approaching an unsafe limit, every effort shall be
made to correct this situation before the equipment is automatically or manually shut
down.
• If any equipment cannot be maintained within safe operating limits or is
malfunctioning to the extent that a potential hazard to personnel and property exists, it
shall be shut down and the reason for the malfunction determined and corrected
before initiating a restart.
• The operating speed on any reciprocating engine shall at no time exceed 110% of the
manufacturer's maximum rated speed.
• The manufacturer's maximum rated speed shall not be exceeded in the operation of
any centrifugal equipment.
Unit Shutdown
In shutting down a compressor unit or other complex equipment, the recommended
procedures shall be followed and all precautions taken to ensure that no unsafe operating
limit or potential hazard to personnel and property is encountered during the shutdown.
The following guideline shall be strictly adhered to:
• A centrifugal compressor unit shall be blown down and left unpressurized for the next
restart, unless designed to remain pressurized. A reciprocating unit need not be
depressurized.
• On centrifugal stations, the compressor unit auxiliaries shall be kept running for a
predetermined time to maintain cooling of the unit bearings.
• Where applicable, fuel and starting gas valves to the compressor drives shall be
closed and maintained in a closed position until ready to initiate another start.
• The compressor unit suction, discharge and by-pass valves shall be positioned as
outlined in the written operating procedures for shutdown.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # CS-201D
3.4 Records
Gas plant or compressor station daily log sheets shall be completed as applicable. Gas
compressor log sheets, at manned units, shall include suction and discharge temperatures
and pressures. Retain these records for 12 months. Gas plant or compressor
maintenance, scheduled or unscheduled, shall be documented and retained for the life of
the equipment.
Document in short memo affirming starting, operating, and shutdown procedures for any
applicable equipment have received the annual review. Document in short memo form
that personnel are familiarized with the written detailed instructions.
4. References
• CFR 192.605(a), Procedural Manual for Operations, Maintenance and Emergencies

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Remote Control Shutdown Device Inspection,
Maintenance and Calibration Doc. # CS-301D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for the frequency of inspection, testing and
maintenance of remote-control shutdown devices.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
All unattended compressor stations except those of 1000 hp or less must have an
emergency shutdown system. The remote-control shutdown device must be capable of
shutting down a compressor station, compressor units, gas fires or electrical facilities.
3.2 Considerations
Definitions
Gas Areas as used in this guideline are areas within a compressor station that contain
major gas containment facilities. These include the compressor building, adjacent gas
headers and other concentrations of gas piping or other gas facilities.
Gas Fires as used in this guideline are the flames in combustion chambers open to the
atmosphere on equipment such as air, gas or water heaters or reboilers.
A Remote-Control Shutdown Device is a device such as a fuel gas valve, engine ignition
switch or motor control center shunt trip that is intended to react when an emergency
shutdown station outside a gas area is tripped. The remote-control shutdown device will
inactivate or shut down a compressor unit, gas fires or electrical facilities.
A test of a remote control shutdown device accomplished during an Emergency Shutdown
System test that satisfies the requirements of Guideline CS-402D will satisfy the test
requirements of this guideline provided that the time interval requirements are met.
Inspection and calibration, where applicable, must still be performed per this guideline.
Inspection, Testing and Calibration
When necessary, inspect, test and calibrate each remote-control shutdown device. The
following actions shall be included, but are not limited to, the following:
• During an inspection, visually check the device for corrosion, moisture, loose
connections or foreign material that might interfere with its operation.
• During an inspection, isolate devices such as dump valves. If operated, these devices
will cause unnecessary waste of gas, chemicals or an unwanted shutdown of
equipment. Replace components if a bench test is deemed necessary.
• Devices shall be placed in bypass mode during tsting in order to simulate shutdown
without actually having to shut down or isolate the equipment.
• Clean, repair or replace parts as required.
• Calibrate devices by adjusting the mechanism to ensure that an output response or
operation always corresponds to an input signal or condition within the manufacturer's
prescribed operational tolerance.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Remote Control Shutdown Device Inspection,
Maintenance and Calibration Doc. # CS-301D

Frequency of Inspection and Test
Perform inspections, tests and calibrations in accordance with time intervals as follows:
• Inspect each remote-control shutdown device at intervals determined appropriate
based upon operating history.
• Test and calibrate each remote-control shutdown device as required. Intervals should
be based upon operating history but shall be performed at least each calendar year not
exceeding 15 months.
• Maintain a continuing program of operating history evaluation and adjust inspection
and test intervals as determined from those results.
3.4 Records
Record the date and action taken for every inspection, test or calibration made. Retain
records or documents of operating history evaluation that support inspection and test
frequency for life of the facility.
4. References
• CFR 192.731(b) and (c), Compressor Stations: Inspection and Testing of Relief
Devices
• ASME B31.8, 843.12, Inspection and Testing of Relief Valves

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Testing of Compressor Building
Personnel Warning Systems Doc. # CS-302D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements to be followed for testing of compressor building
personnel warning systems.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Each compressor building shall have a high gas alarm as required by Engineering
Standard 7120. The alarm will be activated upon the detection of gas inside the building
at a level of not more than 25% LEL. Testing of gas sensors and alarms as a part of, and
included in, the ESD system test shall satisfy the requirements of this guideline.
Testing
Periodic testing of each compressor building personnel warning system is required.
Each team shall establish a schedule for such tests, taking into consideration such things
as equipment reliability, operating conditions, and historical test results.
The recommended interval between tests shall not exceed 24 months.
Following are requirements for this periodic testing:
• Test each gas sensor by introducing a simulated condition that causes the sensor to
produce an output response that should cause operation of the warning device.
• Test the system in each compressor building by introducing a simulated condition to a
gas sensor that results in operation of the alarms.
• Calibrate, repair or replace each sensor or alarm that does not perform as required.
Retest the system after such maintenance is performed.
3.3 Records
Record the date the sensors and system are tested and the results of the test. Maintain the
records for 5 years.
4. References
• CFR 192.736, Compressor Station: Gas Detection

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Emergency Shutdown Installation and Modification
Doc. # CS-401D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for developing procedures to safely and efficiently
install new facility protection systems and modify existing systems.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
An emergency shutdown system is required for all compressor stations, except unattended
field stations of 1000 HP or less. A station is considered unattended unless one or more
operators are assigned to the station on a continuous shift basis.
Maintain existing depressurized systems “in-service” if normal tests indicate reliability.
Convert to pressurized systems when a major revision or extension is required.
Provide emergency lighting for personnel evacuation of compressor or pump buildings
and piping areas by using one of the following as a possible example:
• Use a separate DC circuit or an inverter fed from a storage battery system sufficient to
supply thirty minutes of light.
• Maintaining electric power in at least one lighting circuit. For compressor buildings,
this circuit could be the yard lighting around building.
• Use emergency battery-powered explosion-proof lights placed at strategic locations in
compressor buildings.
Ensure that the emergency shutdown systems will open the blowdown valves on all
compressors that are not running but will not cause an actual blown-down. Develop a site
specific procedure to leave one lead line valve and a bypass valve open to assist
blowdown of the piping, in case the emergency shutdown system is activated.
3.3 Records
Provide as-built records per Engineering Standard 8706 for all new and modified
facilities.
4. References
• CFR 192.167, Compressor Stations: Emergency Shutdown


Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Emergency Shutdown Installation and Modification
Doc. # CS-401D
• ES 0052, Design Philosophy for Compressor Station ESD Systems

• ES 6001, Guideline for General Electrical Design
• ES 8706, As-Built Data for Transmission and Non-Rural Gathering Facilities
• ASME B31.8, 843.431, Emergency Shutdown Facilities

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Emergency Shutdown System Training, Operation
and Testing Doc. # CS-402D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for developing procedures for an Emergency
Shutdown System employee training program, operating instructions and testing program.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
General
A written emergency plan is required to be on file at each location (Reference Guideline
PPL-403, Emergency Plans). Documentation of each Emergency Shutdown System is
required including a description of the system's functional operation and a list of the parts
that require periodic maintenance.
Expectations/Requirements
Periodic Testing
Periodic testing of the Emergency Shutdown system is mandatory to ensure reliability. If
a system has successfully completed a full blowdown test, simulated tests may be used in
succeeding years.
A simulated annual test will involve activating the system or parts of the system until the
whole system has been tested.
Observe that all remote control shutdown devices and other necessary equipment is
properly functioning as intended, while taking appropriate actions to prevent or minimize
actual equipment shutdown or gas blowdown.
If piping or equipment modifications or additions are made to the facilities protected by
the Emergency Shutdown system, such that the full blowdown test may no longer be
valid, then the next succeeding annual test shall be a full blowdown test, after which
simulated annual tests may again be used.
If an Emergency Shutdown system has been tripped, accidentally or otherwise, during a
year and it can be determined that all associated equipment functioned as intended, this
incident may be used to satisfy the annual test requirement.
Each remote control shutdown device must be inspected and tested as required by
Guideline CS-301. The testing requirements of CS-301 may be satisfied by tests done
under this Guideline if the time interval requirements of CS-301, Remote Control Shut-
down Devices Inspection, Maintenance and Calibration, are met.
Training
Train all operating and maintenance personnel on how each Emergency Shutdown system
operates and when they are expected to actuate the system.
Train new operating and maintenance personnel to adequately operate, inspect and test
each Emergency Shutdown system within a reasonable time period after they begin work.
Retrain all personnel as necessary.
Prepare written documentation of the content of the training required above. Revise as
applicable.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Emergency Shutdown System Training, Operation
and Testing Doc. # CS-402D

Testing
Test each Emergency Shutdown system at least once each calendar year.
Include testing of the emergency communications facilities, when applicable. Submit the
results of each test and recommendations relative to each test to the regional department.
Perform the following steps for each Emergency Shutdown test:
• Advise Gas Control of the scheduled time of the test, when applicable.
• Review written plans for the operation of the Emergency Shutdown System with
appropriate employees before each test. Include items such as personnel
responsibilities, purging methods and order of equipment restart.
• Review with Regional personnel to determine if a full plant blowdown, partial plant
blowdown or some other test method is to be used based on specific location.
• Place employees at critical points of the shutdown to observe and record Emergency
Shutdown system performance.
• Actuate the system utilizing a different Emergency Shutdown station each year.
• Observe and record the timing and function of all major components. Malfunctioning
components shall be repaired and retested. Retesting the entire system is not required.
The system test shall be accepted or rejected by the Location Manager or Supervisor, who
shall determine the test and acceptance criteria of system test for each location. Criteria
shall be reviewed and approved by the Regional Director.
Records
Maintain schematic or other drawings of each entire Emergency Shutdown System. Use
these drawings, manuals or other means to document a description of system operation
and a list of the components requiring maintenance. Schedule and document each
Emergency Shutdown system test. Retain documentation for five years.
4. References
• COM-101D, Communications Systems Uninterrupted Operations
• CS-301D, Remote Control Shutdown Device Inspection, Maintenance and
Calibration
• VLV-101D, Emergency Valve Maintenance

• CFR 192.605(a)(c), Procedural Manual for Operations, Maintenance and Emergencies
• CFR 192.615(a)(6)(b)(2), Damage Prevention Program
• CFR 192.745, Valve Maintenance: Transmission Lines

• ASME B31.8, 850.411, Written Emergency Procedures
• ASME B31.8, 850.42, Training Program
• ASME B31.8, 853.41, PipelineValves
• ASME B31.8, 853.4, Valve Maintenance

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Examination of Aboveground Facilities
Doc. # COR-101D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements to be followed for the internal and external
inspection and maintenance of aboveground piping and components for corrosion control.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Each location responsible for the examination of aboveground facilities for corrosion
control shall develop written procedures for Corrosion Control Inspection Programs.
Inspection programs for atmospheric corrosion shall include areas such as under hold-
down straps, pipe penetrations of building walls; insulated pipe and headers near cooling
tower overspray.
3.2 Considerations
Whenever pipe is protected by steel wear pads or sleeves that are seal welded to the pipe
such as at pipe supports, inspection of the pad or sleeve in accordance with this guideline
is not required. Periodically check the condition of pads or sleeves that are not seal
welded on a sample basis to confirm continued protection of the pipe, especially if in
areas conducive to corrosion. Such areas would typically be those where moisture is
present on the pipe due to reasons other than normal precipitation.
The results of inspections, geographic location and pipe environment shall be used to
determine an appropriate continuing inspection level.
Valves that may be required in an emergency shall be inspected and records kept in
accordance with Guideline VLV-101D, Emergency Valve Maintenance. Aboveground
piping associated with such valves outside of plant yards is included in Guideline
VLV-101D.
Refer to the Corrosion Control Manual for guidelines for establishing an inspection
program for vessels and piping covered by insulation or other protective covering subject
to moisture penetration.
Corrosion, leaks, and defects may be safety related conditions. Reference Procedure
ADM-104D, Reporting of Safety Related Conditions, for identification and reporting of
such conditions.
Inspection Program
Consider the facility’s operating history, future anticipated operating conditions, evidence
of possible corrosion found during routine observations and actual inspection results in
establishing inspection frequencies. Develop an inspection program for piping and
pressure containing components enclosed by insulation or other protective covering and
subject to moisture penetration and retention, to ensure detection of atmospheric
corrosion before detrimental damage is sustained.
External Inspections
Inspect all noninsulated and uncovered aboveground onshore piping at intervals not
exceeding 36 months. Include non-emergency valves and any other pressure containing
pipeline components in this inspection.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # COR-101D

Inspect all offshore piping and pressure-containing components exposed to the
atmosphere at least once each calendar year, but not exceeding 15 months.
Based on the inspection program, remove selected areas of insulation or covering to
allow inspection of piping or component surface conditions. Location and size of each
insulation or covering removal should be based upon component function, size, type of
covering, surface indications of covering or insulation deterioration, leaks or corrosion
and inspection results.
If external corrosion is found, evaluate and implement repair, if appropriate, as required
by Guideline PPL-201D, Repair Procedures.
Continuous Maintenance
Maintain a continuing program of painting or installation of other protective coverings
based upon results of the external inspection program. It is necessary that intent and
practicality be incorporated into this facility protection program. The Company's intent is
to maintain safety of its facilities by controlling surface pitting and uniform general metal
loss.
A small percentage of surface area corrosion of an aboveground facility can be tolerated
on a short-term basis (years). When there is sufficient coating deterioration, repair or
replacement of the coating system shall become necessary.
Internal Inspection
Whenever any pipe section is opened or removed from a pipeline, that pipe section and
any adjacent piping section(s) shall be inspected to determine evidence and/or extent of
internal corrosion.
Vessels and other fabrications shall be inspected when opportunity to do so exists in
conjunction with other maintenance activities if deterioration is known or suspected to
exist and confirmation of its operational safety is needed.
Whenever internal corrosion or metal loss is observed in piping not being monitored,
under Guidelines COR-104D, Internal Corrosion, Onshore Gathering Facilities Outside
Incorporated Areas or COR-105D, Internal Corrosion, Offshore and within Incorporated
Areas, initiate the required actions of one of the procedures appropriate to the
classification of the involved facility.
Transition Zone Inspection
Inspect the transition zone of pipe entering the ground to confirm that it is properly
coated so that penetration of moisture between the pipe and coating is prevented.
Whenever a condition is observed where moisture may be retained between the coating
and pipe, remove the coating, inspect the pipe, evaluate the severity of corrosion (if
present), take remedial actions, if necessary, to recoat the pipe.
3.4 Records
Documentation is required when:
• External corrosion is identified and a repair or preventive maintenance action other
than painting is required.
• Pipe is opened or a section of pipe is removed or replaced.
• Fabrication or component, e.g., a meter tube, a pressure vessel, a receiver or launcher
is opened for inspection or use and previously undocumented corrosion, deposits of
corrosion byproduct, other foreign matter or any other unique or noteworthy
condition is observed.
• Maintain the above records for the life of the facility.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # COR-101D
4. References
• ADM-104D, Reporting of Safety Related Conditions
• COR-104D, Internal Corrosion, Onshore Gathering Facilities Outside Incorporated
Areas
• COR-105D, Internal Corrosion, Offshore and within Incorporated Areas
• CFR 192.479, Atmospheric Corrosion Control: General
• CFR 192 .481, Atmospheric Corrosion Control: Atmospheric
• CFR 192.709, Transmission Lines: Recordkeeping
• ASME B31.8, 863, Internal Corrosion Control
• ASME B31.8, 862.12, Atmospheric Protection
• ASME B31.8, 862.25, Atmospheric Corrosion
• ASME B31.8, 851.6, Pipeline Leak Records

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Examination of Buried Pipelines
Doc. # COR-102D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for developing a standard program and procedures
for the examination of buried pipelines for evidence of internal or external corrosion.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
A continuing program of examination of buried pipelines is mandatory for monitoring
possible internal and external corrosion and the effectiveness of internal and external
protective measures. See Guideline PPL-406D, Continuing Surveillance, for some
factors to consider.
Corrosion, leaks and defects may be safety-related conditions. Reference Guideline
ADM-104D for identification and reporting of such conditions.
3.2 Considerations
Required at all locations
Whenever buried gas piping is exposed for any reason, the exposed portion must be
inspected. Examine the exposed portion of a coated line to determine coating condition.
If a line is bare, the coating has deteriorated or the coating is removed on a well-coated
line, inspect the pipe for corrosion. In cases where the pipe is exposed several times
within a short interval, for example, bonding of Dresser couplings, it is not necessary to
do a detailed inspection at every location. Select some representative locations and do a
detailed inspection as follows.
Expose and inspect the full circumference of piping if any of the following conditions
exist.
• Tests, current requirements or surveys indicate corrosion may be occurring
• Previously unidentified coating deterioration is observed or suspected
• Active or continuing corrosion is observed
• Corrosion is observed that is of a magnitude not previously documented on the piping
or which may require repair. If repair is required, continue inspection longitudinally
until pipe condition is satisfactory.
If corrosion is observed on a coated line, a condition may exist warranting further
investigation (disbonded coating, unique soil environment, etc.). Discuss conditions
found with the applicable Corrosion Specialist to establish if further investigation is
necessary and if so, to what extent.
Whenever pipe is removed or opened for any reason, inspect the internal surface for
evidence of corrosion or other metal loss. The condition to be documented should be that
of the most corroded remaining pipe that is returned to service.
When a hot tap or stopple operation is done inspect the coupon for signs of internal
corrosion. If no corrosion is found, do not record the results of the inspection. The
coupon is probably not a very representative sample for determining the existence or
absence of internal corrosion of a pipe segment.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # COR-102D
Additional Requirements for Compressor Plant Discharge Piping
Cathodic protection surveys, inspection of piping or previous operating conditions may
indicate potential deterioration of pipeline coating downstream of the compressors.
Determine the condition of the coating and the piping by conducting applicable tests
and/or exposing the pipeline at several locations to identify if deterioration of pipe
coating or metal corrosion exists.
Actions to be Taken if Corrosion is Found
If an examination indicates that significant corrosion has occurred, initiate one or more of
the following actions:
• Refer to Engineering Standard 8350 and Guideline PPL-201D, Repair Procedures, to
determine the need for repair. Determine the acceptable corrosion limit and, if
exceeded, initiate a repair method as outlined. If repair is required, limit the
operating pressure per guideline PPL-202D, Operating Pressures and Limits Criteria,
until the repair is made. Determine if a safety related condition exists. Refer to the
Enron Global Asset Operations Safety Guidelines.
• Apply coating and/or additional cathodic protection, as necessary, where active
external corrosion is present. Reference Guideline COR-103D, External Protective
Coating and Cathodic Protection.
• Apply or confirm compliance with the requirements of Guideline COR-104D,
Internal Corrosion, Onshore Gathering Facilities outside Incorporated Areas, or
COR-105D, Internal Corrosion, Offshore and within Incorporated Areas, if internal
corrosion is noted.
If examination indicates extensive areas of deteriorated coating or corrosion, perform an
inspection for evaluation of the corrosion by RSTRNG procedure. Send a report
summarizing the findings along with recommended or intended remedial plans to the
applicable Operations Office for review and action.
3.4 Records
Complete a pipeline inspection and leak report. Document results and any actions taken.
Retain the documents for the life of the facility.
4. References
• CFR 192.459, External Corrosion Control: Examination of Buried Pipeline when
Exposed
• CFR 192.491,
• CFR 192.605(d), Procedural Manuals for Operations, Maintenance and Emergencies
4.2 Corrosion Control Manual
• Chapter 12, Evaluating the Strength of Corroded Pipe
• Chapter 13, Pipeline Inspection, Leak and Action Reporting System (PILARS)

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # COR-102D

• ADM-103D, External Protective Coating and Cathodic Protection
• COR-104D, Internal Corrosion, Onshore Gathering Facilities outside Incorporated
Areas
• PPL-202D, Operating Pressures and Limits Criteria
• ASME B31.8, 862.216, Examination When Exposed
• ASME B31.8, 850.3 Essential Features of the Operating and Maintenance Plan

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
External Protective Coating and Cathodic Protection
Doc. # COR-103D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for developing procedures for the installation of
external protective coating and cathodic protection for all buried gas pipelines.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
For the purposes of this procedure, the following definitions apply:
• Ineffectively Coated Pipeline refers to a pipeline for which cathodic protection
current requirements are substantially the same as if it were bare.
• Active Corrosion is the continuing corrosion that could result in a condition
detrimental to equipment and public safety if it is not controlled.
3.2 Considerations
External coatings and cathodic protection systems shall be installed and maintained
according to specifications set forth in Section 6600 of the Engineering Standards and in
the Corrosion Control Manual. Cathodic protection criteria are outlined in Guideline
COR-106D, External Corrosion Control.
Newly buried or submerged natural gas pipelines must be installed with external
coatings and cathodic protection. Buried or submerged natural gas pipelines with
effective external coatings except for compressor, regulator and measuring station piping,
must be cathodically protected.
Bare or coated compressor, regulator and measuring station piping and bare or
ineffectively coated other piping shall be cathodically protected in areas where active
corrosion is found. Unprotected pipeline segments shall be reevaluated at intervals not
exceeding three years (36 months) to determine if protection is required. See Guideline
PPL-406D, Continuing Surveillance. Reevaluated segments requiring protection shall be
placed under protection within 12 months.
Generally, active corrosion can only occur on “critical segments” as defined in Guideline
PPL-407D, Gas Leak Detection Survey.
On existing bare pipelines, apply a coating to supplement cathodic protection whenever
an exposed segment of cathodically protected bare pipe shows evidence of active
corrosion.
Install cathodic protection when active corrosion is found through reevaluation or by
inspection or is indicated by electrical survey on unprotected pipe.
On existing coated pipelines, an external coating shall be applied to the following piping:
• Poorly coated or bare segments of pipeline that have been exposed for repair
• Pipeline segments that replace existing pipe
Inspect all coating on replacement segments and repair defects caused by installation
activity. Upgrade existing coating or cathodic protection or install additional cathodic
protection in areas where one of the cathodic protection criteria is not being met. Refer to
Guideline COR-106D, External Corrosion Control.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
External Protective Coating and Cathodic Protection
Doc. # COR-103D

On new pipelines, apply an external coating to all newly buried pipelines. Inspect all
coating on new pipeline segments and repair defects caused by installation. Ensure that
all newly buried pipelines are cathodically protected within one year after completion of
construction.
3.4 Records
Applied coatings shall be documented following Engineering Standard 8705 and
appropriate as-built information shall be submitted to Engineering Records.
4. References
4.1 Enron Corrosion Control Manual
• COR-106D, External Corrosion Control
• PPL-407D, Gas Leak Detection Survey
• ES 6600, Corrosion and Cathodic Protection, Series
• ES 8705, Preparation of As-Built Drawings and Field Checks
• CFR 192.455, External Corrosion Control: Buried or Submerged Pipelines Installed
after July 31, 1971
before August 1, 1971
• CFR 192.461, External Corrosion Control: Protective Coating
• CFR 192.465(e), External Corrosion Control: Monitoring
• CFR 192.483, Remedial Measures: General
• ASME B31.8, 862.1, New Installations
• ASME B31.8, 862.2, Existing Installations
• ASME B31.8, 862.112, Coating Requirements
• ASME B31.8, 862.217, Operation and Maintenance of Cathodic Protection System

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Review Due:
Nov-2000
Internal Corrosion, Onshore Gathering Facilities outside
Incorporated Areas Doc. # COR-104D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for development of procedures for the detection and
monitoring of internal corrosion and required corrective actions for onshore gathering pipelines
and associated facilities that are outside incorporated areas.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Potentially corrosive natural gas transported through gathering pipelines and associated
facilities will be monitored to detect the possibility or presence of internal corrosion.
Reference Engineering Standard 0115 for the definition of potentially corrosive gas.
Reference Chapter 6 of the Corrosion Control Manual for information concerning internal
corrosion in gas gathering systems.
3.2 Considerations
Gas Analysis
Perform a gas and water (if present) analysis on all field gas sources to determine if a
potentially corrosive environment exists. Perform the following analyses in conjunction
with analysis required by producer contracts.
Include in the quantitative analysis of water samples the following:
• Chlorides (ppm)
• Conductivity (mmhos)
• PH
• Sulfates (ppm)
• Fe (ppm)
• Magnesium (ppm)
• Calcium hardness
• Total dissolved solids
• Bacteria cultures
Include in the gas analysis the following:
• H2S (grains/100SCF)
• CO2 (partial pressure)
• O2 (ppm)
For water samples refer to Guideline QC-101D (Gas Moisture Analysis Monitor
Calibration).
For H2S analysis refer to Guideline QC-204D (Hydrogen Sulfide Analyzer).

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Review Due:
Nov-2000
Internal Corrosion Monitoring
Initiate an internal monitoring program if a potentially corrosive environment exists using
the criteria from Engineering Standard 0115.
Accomplish the monitoring program by using weight loss coupons installed at locations
most susceptible to internal corrosion such as low elevation points, dead ends and drips.
Distribute the coupons at strategic points over the system.
Refer to the Corrosion Control Manual for guidelines in the selection and distribution of
monitoring points and ensure the following tasks are completed:
• Check weight loss coupons two times annually and if historical data shows no
significant mil loss, then check coupons on an annual basis.
• Prepare and maintain a schematic diagram showing physical and operating
characteristics of the system and the location of check points and weight loss
coupons.
• Inspect the internal surface of all gas pipelines for corrosion whenever a pipeline is
cut or opened for any reason.
Remedial Action
Consider remedial actions if it is determined by weight loss coupon inspections that an
internal corrosion rate in excess of 2 mils per year (MPY) is occurring after two or more
consecutive checks of the coupons.
Remedial actions to consider include the following:
• Eliminating the possibility for free water to exist by dehydration, an adequate increase
in gas temperature or an adequate pigging program.
• Removing corrosive components.
• Injecting corrosion inhibitors.
Conduct a study if internal corrosion reduces the wall thickness of a segment of pipe to
less than that required for the maximum allowable operating pressure to determine
whether a planned pipe replacement is necessary or if the working pressure needs to be
reduced.
Exceptions
On systems requiring corrosion mitigation, where there is no practical remedial action
that will mitigate the corrosion, perform gas leak surveys as required by Guideline PPL-
407D (Gas Leak Detection Survey). This guideline includes systems with low flow
velocities and would not transport an inhibitor through the pipe.
3.4 Records
Record all internal inspection results and actions. Record checks of installed monitoring
devices. Retain at the location office, all studies, reports, checks of monitoring devices
and other data that may be accumulated, for the life of the facility.
4. References
• Chapter 6 – Internal Corrosion Control

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Review Due:
Nov-2000

• QC-101D, Gas Moisture Analysis Monitor Calibration
• QC-204D, Hydrogen Sulfide Analyzer
• ES 0115, Corrosive Gas Definition for Gas Pipeline Facilities

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Internal Corrosion, Offshore and within Incorporated
Areas Doc. # COR-105D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for the detection and monitoring of internal corrosion
and the required corrective actions for offshore transmission and gathering facilities within
incorporated areas.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Corrosive gas shall not be transported unless the corrosive effect of the gas has been
investigated, established and measures have been taken to eliminate or minimize internal
corrosion. Potentially corrosive gas shall not be transported without utilizing monitoring
equipment that will detect the presence of internal corrosion. (Refer to Engineering
Standard 0115 for the definition of potentially corrosive gas).
A pipeline system includes all pipeline facilities used in the transportation of gas,
including but not limited to, line pipe, valves and other appurtenances connected to line
pipe, compressor units, fabricated assemblies, metering and delivery stations.
3.2 Considerations
Facilities covered under this guideline include:
• Offshore - Downstream from the outlet flange of each facility on the outer continental
shelf where hydrocarbons are produced or where produced hydrocarbons are first
separated, dehydrated or otherwise processed, whichever facility is farther
downstream.
• Onshore - Within the limits of any incorporated or unincorporated city/town/village
or any designated residential/commercial area such as a subdivision,
business/shopping center or community development.
Refer to Engineering Standard 0070 for terms and conditions to assist in identifying
gathering facilities. Reference Chapter 6 of the Corrosion Control Manual for
information concerning internal corrosion. Corrosion, leaks and defects may be safety-
related conditions. Reference the Enron Global Asset Operations Safety Guidelines.
Gas Sampling
If there is a reasonable potential for corrosive gas accumulation/contamination in a
pipeline system, take gas samples at approperate locations.
Test for the components listed in Engineering Standard 0115. Testing shall be done at
least twice each year with intervals not to exceed 7 1/2 months.
Design of Monitoring Systems
Identify checkpoint locations at locations most susceptible to internal corrosion such as
low elevation points, dead ends and drips.
Select and install monitoring devices such as weight loss coupons or electrical probes
considering size of pipe, type of system, operating conditions, simplicity of installation
and ease of gathering information. Install liquid sampling facilities if applicable.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999

Prepare and maintain a schematic diagram showing physical and operating characteristics
of the pipeline system, the location of checkpoints and the type of monitoring devices
used.
Monitoring and Detection
Monitor checkpoints semiannually at intervals not exceeding 7-1/2 months. Monitor
more frequently if the level of the corrosive component increases or the effectiveness of
the anti-corrosion measures needs to be confirmed.
Inspect the internal surface of all gas pipeline systems for corrosion whenever a pipeline
is cut or opened for any reason.
If liquids are present, semiannually collect and analyze liquid samples from the gas
stream.
Remedial Action
Make a study of the pipeline segments or systems to determine the scope of the possible
internal corrosion if it is determined by inspection that internal corrosion is occurring or
has occurred. Install a monitoring system for use in monitoring and controlling any
mitigation actions.
Apply at least one of the following mitigation measures if inspection reveals internal
corrosion is taking place or if previously installed monitoring equipment shows corrosion
occurring:
• Eliminate free water in the pipeline by dehydration, an adequate increase in gas
temperature or an adequate pigging program.
• Remove corrosive components.
• Inject corrosion inhibitors.
Conduct a study if internal corrosion has or may have reduced the wall thickness of a
segment of pipe to less than that required for the maximum allowable operating pressure.
Determine whether pipe repair, replacement or hydrostatic testing should be planned or if
the working pressure needs to be reduced.
If repair, replacement or operating pressure reduction is necessary, review Guideline
ADM-104D (Internal Corrosion, Onshore Geathering FacilitiesOutside Incorporated
Areas) to see if a reportable safety-related condition exists.
3.4 Records
Record all internal inspections of pipe. Retain all studies, reports and inspections of
monitoring devices and other data that may be accumulated for the life of the facility.
4. References
• CFR 192.477, Internal Corrosion Control: Monitoring
4.2 Corrosion Control Manual
• Chapter 6 - Internal Corrosion Control

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999

• ES 0070, Gathering Line Determination.
• ES 0115, Corrosive Gas Definition for Gas Pipeline Facilities

• ASME B31.8, 863.3, Existing Installations

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
External Corrosion Control
Doc. # COR-106D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for surveying and testing required to monitor the
control of external corrosion on steel piping.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Each facility shall develop site specific written procedures for the monitoring and control
of external corrosion.
3.2 Considerations
Cathodically protected pipelines are those pipelines to which direct current is applied
such that the electrical state of the entire pipeline, (as measured by applicable tests
outlined in this guideline), meets one or more of the criteria below.
• There is a minimum negative (cathodic) voltage shift of 300 millivolts as determined
with the protective current applied. All IR drops other than those across the structure-
electrolyte boundary shall be considered in determining whether the measured voltage
is adequate to provide pipe protection.
• There is a minimum negative (cathodic) polarization voltage shift of 100 millivolts.
The polarization voltage shift must be determined by interrupting the protective
current and measuring the polarization decay. When the current is initially
interrupted, an immediate voltage shift occurs. The voltage reading after the
immediate shift must be used as the base reading from which to measure polarization
decay.
• There is a voltage at least as negative (cathodic) as that originally established at the
beginning of the Tafel segment of the E-Log-I Curve.
• There is a net protective current from the electrolyte into the structure surface applied
over the entire length of the section that is considered to be cathodically protected.
An earth current technique (i.e., pipe to soil with laterals) shall be used to determine
whether a pipeline segment meets this criterion.
Pipelines that are bare or ineffectively coated and considered to be unprotected will be
maintained in a state where anodic current flow from the pipeline does not exist as
measured by a surface electrical survey technique.
The negative (cathodic) polarized potential of coated, cathodically protected pipelines
must be limited to avoid possible damage to the protective coating. On certain pipe
materials, hydrogen embrittlement or blisters may also be a consideration. The polarized
potential should not exceed -1200 millivolts. Use Location data and records to determine
where the above factors may be significant and where polarized potentials should be
determined.
Refer to Chapter 9 of the Corrosion Control Manual for information on survey
procedures and the application of cathodic protection criteria.
A non-critical interference bond is one that mitigates interference on a foreign structure.
A critical interference bond is one mitigating interference on a company pipeline or
structure.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # COR-106D
Procedure Development Outline
Minimize the interference effects of impressed current cathodic protection on adjacent
foreign and Company structures by the following methods or others as applicable:
• Installation of magnesium anodes on adjacent structures
• Bonding adjacent structures to protected piping
• Tying adjacent structures into the negative terminal of the rectifier with a current
control bond
• Coating the affected area on the Company pipeline
Establish a cathodic protection criterion for each pipeline segment to be protected
Conduct and record results of surveys and tests according to the frequency schedule of
this guideline
Take action when test results fail to meet the established criterion for the pipeline
segment as follows:
• Perform tests to determine if an alternate criteria can be met
• Promptly make plans for corrective action on those facilities which are not considered
cathodically protected.
• Complete corrective actions within a reasonable time normally not in excess of one
calendar year.
Reevaluate hot spot protected pipeline segments every 3 years, normally in conjunction
with analysis of hot spot survey results. Leak history and pipe inspection results should
also be used in that evaluation. Refer to Guideline PPL-406D (Continuing Surveillance).
3.4 Records
Develop a method for providing comparable results, for scheduling surveys and tests and
recording the dates of completion. Maintain records of cathodic surveys and tests in
electronic or hard copy format, as applicable. Maintain records of surveys and tests for
the life of the pipeline or facility.
4. References
after July 31, 1971
before August 1, 1971
• CFR 192.463, External Corrosion Control: Cathodic Protection
• CFR 192.465, External Corrosion Control: Monitoring
• CFR 192.469, External Corrosion Control: Test Stations
• CFR 192.473, External Corrosion Control: Interference Currents

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # COR-106D

• COR-103D, External Protective Coating and Cathodic Protection
• ES 0162, Notification of Construction, State Pipeline Safety Agencies
• ES 6649, Guideline for Location of Cathodic Protection Test Stations
• ASME B31.8, 862.1 New Installations
• ASME B31.8, 862.2 Existing Installations
• ASME B31.8, 862.113, Cathodic Protection Requirements
• ASME B31.8, 862.217, Operatioal and Maintenance of Cathodic Protection Systems
• ASME B31.8, 862.115, Electrical Connections and Monitoring Points
• ASME B31.8, 862.116, Electrical Interference

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # COR-106D
FREQUENCY REQUIRED ON A RECURRING BASIS

Plant Bare &
Coated Pipeline
Bare Pipelines Coated Pipelines Impressed
Inspection, Form Anode Anode Impressed Impressed Current &
Survey or Test Number Unbonded Bonded Current Current Anode Anode
1. Pipe-to-Soil Survey Ansurvey, Annually Annually Annually Annually Annually

Note 4 CPDM, or
022-2955
(40.106E)
2. Net Protective Current 3 Years 3 Years 3 Years 3 Years 3 Years 3 Years

Survey, Note 5
3. Surface Potential Ansurvey, 3 Years 3 Years
Survey for Hot Spots CPDM, or
022-2969
(40.106I)
4. Critical Interference Ansurvey or 6 Times 6 Times 6 Times 6 Times 6 Times 6 Times

Bond Test CPDM Annually Annually Annually Annually Annually Annually
5. Non-critical Ansurvey or Annually Annually Annually Annually Annually Annually
Interference Bond Test CPDM
6. Insulation Test Ansurvey or Annually Annually Annually Annually Annually
CPDM
7. Rectifier Inspection Ansurvey, 6 Times 6 Times 6 Times
CPDM, or Annually Annually Annually
022-2961
(40.203A)
8. IR Drop Survey 022-2955 3 Years
(40.106E)
Note:
1. Annually means each calendar year not to exceed 15 months.
2. Six times annually means six times each calendar year, but with intervals not exceeding 2-1/2 months.
3. Three years means an interval of three calendar years, not to exceed 42 months.
4. Recommended onshore survey interval is 1.0 to 1.5 miles. See Engineering Standard 6649. Remote and
inaccessible locations may require greater distances as approved by the applicable Corrosion Specialist.
Plants shall have a distance between readings as required to obtain reasonable representation of the cathodic
protection level of the piping. Conduct offshore tests at each riser or point where piping is accessible above
the normal water level.
5. Use net protective current criterion (3.3.5) when it is impractical to meet criteria 3.3.1, 3.3.2, or 3.3.3.
Use a close interval survey with side drains, as outlined in Section XIV, Chapter 9, of the Corrosion Control
Manual. The survey is done initially and then every 3rd year thereafter. A pipe-to-soil survey without side
drains is required in years when this survey is not done; potentials must be at least as negative as those from
previous test showing current flow to the pipe.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # COR-106D
FREQUENCY NOT REQUIRED ON A RECURRING BASIS

Plant Bare
& Coated Pipeline
Bare Pipelines Coated Pipelines Impressed
1. Foreign Crossing 022-2952 Initially & Initially & Initially & Initially & Initially & Initially &
Interference Survey (80.103B) As Req’d As Req’d As Req’d As Req’d As Req’d As Req’d
Redo if other surveys
show a need.
2. IR Drop Survey 022-2955 Initially & Initially & Initially &

Repeat when P/S survey (40.106E) As Req’d As Req’d As Req’d
shows significant
unexplainable deviation.
3. Soil Resistivity Survey 022-2953 Initially & Initially & Initially & Initially & Initially & Initially &
To be used for magnesium (40.106C) As Req’d As Req’d As Req’d As Req’d As Req’d As Req’d
anode or impressed current
ground bed installations.
4. Current Requirement Test Initially & Initially & Initially & Initially & Initially &
To determine coating As Req’d As Req’d As Req’d As Req’d As Req’d
condition, or CP needs.
5. Deep Ground Bed Data 022-2950 Initially Initially Initially

Record. To record (40.106B)
installation data.
6. Deep Well Anode Ansurvey, Initially & Initially Initially &

Performance Test CPDM, or As Req’d As Req’d As Req’d
022-2960
(40.106A)
7. Galvanic Anode Record. 022-2956 Initially Initially Initially Initially Initially

To record installation (40.106G)
data.
8. Impressed Current 022-2957 Initially Initially Initially

Groundbed Data Record (40.106F)
To record installation data.
9. Impressed Current Power 022-2958 Initially Initially Initially

Source Information (40.106D)
Record. To record
installation data.
10. 300 mV Shift or 100 mV 022-2955 Initially & Initially & Initially & Initially & Initially &
Polarization Decay Survey (40.106E) As Req’d As Req’d As Req’d As Req’d As Req’d
Use annual pipe to soil survey
results to confirm protection.
11. Rectifier Efficiency Test Ansurvey, Initially & Initially & Initially &
CPDM, or As Req’d As Req’d As Req’d
022-2961
(40.203A)

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Corrosion Specialist Responsibilities
Doc. # COR-201D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for the Corrosion Specialist or Corrosion Control
Manager, in implementing and/or monitoring the Company Corrosion Control Program.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Each Operating Company facility shall have at least one individual who is qualified by
experience and training in pipeline corrosion control methods to carry out the Corrosion
Control Program. If there is no Corrosion Specialist employed directly by the facility,
Technical Operations in the Houston office can provide support in this capacity
Responsibilities
The Corrosion Specialist shall provide overall guidance in corrosion control activities
including the following:
• Reviewing field corrosion reports and data
• Recommending corrective action when requested
It is recommended that the Corrosion Specialist perform the following:
• Prepare a report that highlights some pertinent corrosion control activities of the
Company facility.
• Submit an annual Corrosion Control Report to management.
3.3 Records
Corrosion Control records required by Guidelines COR-101D through COR-301D may
be kept at either the Regional Office or the District/Location office.
4. References
• COR-101D, Examination of Aboveground Facilities
• COR-102D, Examination of Buried Pipelines
• CFR 192.453, Corrosion Control – General
• ASME B31.8, 861, Scope

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Electrical Isolation
Doc. # COR-202D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for electrical isolation of equipment at Company
facilities.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Electrical isolation is used to control and maintain adequate cathodic protection levels by
isolating protected structures from all foreign or unprotected structures. Each location
shall develop programs and procedures necessary to ensure that facilities are correctly
isolated electrically.
3.2 Considerations
No insulating equipment shall be installed inside a closed area that could retain an
explosive mixture unless provisions are made to prevent electrical arcing.
Standard electrical isolation methods are outlined in the Corrosion Control Manual under
Appendix B.
Equipment or devices to electrically isolate locations outlined in this procedure will be
installed in all new or modified facilities.
On existing operational facilities, install these devices as necessary to maintain cathodic
protection of Company facilities, protect these facilities from damage such as fault
currents or lightning and/or reduce the cost of maintaining cathodic protection.
Existing ineffective installations shall be repaired.
Procedural Recommendations
Refer to the Corrosion Control Manual and the Engineering Standards Manuals for
guidelines and details of various situations. When new facilities are installed or existing
facilities are modified, install equipment or devices to electrically isolate Company
structures (as a minimum requirement) at the following locations.
Grounding cells are to be installed across the insulator in hazardous areas or where
required by the customer, at the point of delivery of town border or meter stations or
established insulator locations.
The following locations shall serve as a guide for grounding cell insallation:
• On the downstream side of the meter for small customer delivery facilities. If the
meter is in close proximity to a rectifier and ground bed and current interference is
detected, a bond or magnesium anode may be necessary to control return current
flow.
• Between a non-company owned bridge structure and the pipeline where current
requirements indicate excessive loss.
At the producer connection on wellheads , at purchase locations, or at established
aboveground Company facilities. Consider possible liquid retention when determining
where to place the insulating device.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # COR-202D

• Between casings and the carrier pipe.
• At all Company metallic structures not requiring cathodic protection such as metal
valve boxes, conduit, fences, etc., regardless of size or description.
• On metals of different anodic potential where corrosion can occur as a result of this
difference.
• Where fault currents or lightning can affect the pipeline such as those close to
electrical transmission tower footings or ground cables.
• At exchanges or interconnect points with other pipeline companies.
• At control, ESD and telemetering piping and electrical conduit or wiring at producers,
customers or exchange points with Company facilities.
Remedial Action
Prompt remedial action shall be taken where tests indicate a loss of electrical isolation.
This condition requires immediate action when it results in a potential problem, failure to
meet one of the cathodic protection criteria at standard test stations on protected
structures or detrimental effects to foreign structures.
The remedial action shall be restoration of isolation except in cases where other measures
can be taken that will adequately protect Company and/or foreign structures.
If the loss of isolation does not require prompt action, it shall be repaired at the earliest
opportunity in conjunction with other scheduled maintenance or modifications requiring
the facility to be taken out of service.
Pipelines in Casings
Pipelines, in casings where isolation was intended when installed, shall be evaluated and
acted upon as outlined below:
• If casing-to-soil potential is within 100 millivolts of the carrier pipe-to-soil potential,
further testing is required to determine if electrical isolation exists.
• Determine whether the situation is an "electrolytic condition" or a shorted casing by
following "Test Procedures for Suspected Shorted Casings", which is in Appendix B
of the Corrosion Control Manual. Electrolytic conditions in casings require no
remedial action.
• At a casing where the test procedures previously indicated an "electrolytic condition",
retest the casing when a future survey indicates a significant decrease in potential
separation from the previous test.
Attempt to clear a shorted casing promptly after discovery by implementing the following
actions:
• Inspect the test wires for possible direct shorts, and repair as necessary.
• Excavate the ends of the casing and inspect the clearance between the casing and
carrier pipe. If contact exists, reposition the carrier and replace damaged insulators
and end seals.
• When a shorted casing cannot be cleared by implementing the above actions, consider
installing new carrier pipe insulators when the pipeline segment is out of service for
other scheduled repair/replacement or modification. Consider filling the casing/pipe
interstice with high dielectric casing filler.
• Remove shorted casings at locations where crossings have been abandoned when
convenient.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # COR-202D
Monitor in accordance with Guideline PPL-407D (Gas Leak Detection Survey), each
casing not intended to be isolated when installed and those in III above that are
determined to be shorted and impractical to promptly correct.
3.4 Records
When testing for possible shorted casings, record the test results. Retain the completed
form until the casing is removed.
4. References
• CFR 192.467, External Corrosion Control: Electrical Isolation
• Gas LDC Operating Guidelines
• PPL-103D, Crossing of Company Pipelines by Foreign Operators
• ASME B31.8, 862.114, Electrical Isolation

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Impressed Current Power Source Inspection
Doc. # COR-203D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for inspecting and checking impressed current
cathodic protection systems.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Each facility or location shall establish a program, using this guideline, for the inspection
of impressed current power sources. Written site-specific procedures for the inspection
activities shall be developed.
Inspection of impressed current power sources shall be done six times each calendar year
at intervals not exceeding 2-1/2 months.
The following tasks shall be performed during inspections:
• Inspect each impressed current power source and its components for proper operation.
• Determine the D.C. volts and amperes as applicable.
• Compare present readings with previous readings and investigate significant
discrepancies.
• Promptly correct or make recommendations to correct any deficiencies found.
The following tasks shall be performed at intervals based on the location experience of
this type of facility:
• Determine the groundbed circuit resistance.
• Check groundbed installations for disturbance of earth above the positive and
negative cables in uncultivated areas.
• Calculate rectifier efficiency from AC power input and DC power output readings
when needed for maintenance evaluation.
• Perform necessary maintenance to restore or make recommendations to restore
efficiency of power source or groundbed.
3.3 Records
Maintain a record of power source inspections and efficiency calculations and retain for
the life of the particular power source.
4. References
4.1 Code of Federal Regulations
• CFR 192.465, External Corrosion Control: Monitoring

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Metal Storage Tanks
Doc. # COR-204D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for the recommended levels of cathodic protection
for the interior of metal water tanks and the exterior of any buried metal tanks.
2. Scope
except where superseded by more stringent local standards
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Each location shall develop a site-specific inspection/testing program and written
procedures to ensure cathodic protection systems on metal storage tanks are functioning
correctly. The need for cathodic protection of unprotected tanks shall be periodically
reviewed and protection provided where applicable. Protected tanks should meet the
following guideline criteria.
3.2 Considerations
The definition of a regulated substance for the use of this procedure means a petroleum
product such as crude oil, motor fuels, fuel oils, lubricants, petroleum solvents and waste
oils. Regulated substance also refers to other hydrocarbons such as methanol, ethanol,
and hydraulic oils and any hazardous fluid that is liquid at 60°F and 14.7 psia.
3.3 Requirements/Expectations
Water Tanks
Internal protection for water tanks shall include the following:
• Cathodically protect the internal metal walls of applicable water tanks to a potential of
-0.85 volts or more negative with reference to a copper-copper sulfate electrode.
• Durichlor anodes are preferred for the impressed anode to supply the cathodic
protection for water tanks. Remove anodes and cables during periods when water in
tanks is subject to freezing.
• Annually survey protected tanks using a submersible type electrode placed 12 inches
away from the vertical surface of the tank using the following steps as a guideline:
a. Repeat at several reference electrode locations and depths to insure that all metal
surfaces are under the influence of cathodic protection.
b. Maintain surface-to-water potential at a minimum of -0.85 volts.
External Protection for Buried Tanks Containing Regulated Substances
Tanks and associated steel piping must be cathodically protected to meet Guideline COR-
106D (External Corrosion Control), prior to being placed in service.
Such tanks must be externally coated with a suitable dielectric material.
Steel piping associated with such tanks must be coated per Engineering Standard Series
6600.
Survey and Inspect
Survey buried tank cathodic protection annually, at intervals not to exceed 15 months.
Check each rectifier and its voltage outputs every two months, but not to exceed 2.5
months.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Metal Storage Tanks
Doc. # COR-204D
3.4 Records
Document dates and results of surveys and retain records of such for the life of the
specific tank involved.
4. References
4.1 EPA Regulations 280.20, 280.21 and 280.31

• ES 0172, Documentation of Materials
• ES 6600, Corrosion and Cathodic Protection and Painting Series

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Records Maps
Doc. #COR-301D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements by which records shall be maintained showing the
location and type of cathodic protection for each pipeline.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Maintain drawings, plat sheets, maps or other records for each pipeline showing the
location of cathodically protected piping, cathodic protection facilities and neighboring
structures bonded to the system.
Utilize the following code, as applicable, to indicate the locations documentation as
follows:
• Type of Protection
a. Anode Unbonded - HSP
b. Anode Bonded - CDP
c. Impressed Current Bonded - ICP (extent of coverage from one rectifier)
• Type of Facility or Equipment
a. Rectifier - R
b. Insulation Flange - IF
c. Interference Bond - IB
d. Groundbed - Conventional – GB
e. Groundbed - Deep Well - X
f. Test Leads - T
3.3 Records
Maintain the records for the life of the facility, structure or the pipeline, whichever is less.
4. References
• CFR 192.491(a), Corrosion Control Records

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Bellow Meter Tests
Doc. # MTR-101D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for developing procedures for the testing of bellows
type displacement meters.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Meter Testing
The testing of bellow meters includes the following steps:
• Critical Flow, Transfer Prover or Bell Prover Test. Sonic nozzles are critical flow
devices
• Check the static pressure at the operating pressure and also at zero
• Test temperature recorder at the operating temperature
• Adjust or repair meters, recorders or other associated instrumentation found to be out
of tolerance limits.
• Make audible and visual inspections
3.2 Considerations
Frequency of Tests
Reference the table below to determine the required frequently for a particular meter.
If a meter is exposed to adverse conditions, more frequent testing shall be considered.
Contract or regulatory requirements may also require more frequent testing.
Capacity ratings are at 4 inch ounces pressure with 2-inch water column drop across the
meter.
Type and Capacity of Meter Interval Between Tests ~ Months
Test when placed in-service or

Custody Transfer Meter: when inaccuracy is suspected.
All Meters:
Capacity: 0 through 50 MMBTU/D 120
50 through 75 MMBTU/D 36
Greater than 75 MMBTU/D 12
Test instrument drive torque on meters during each test. Torque should not exceed
factory recommendations or 4 inch ounces, whichever is less.
Check temperature instrument span at the time of installation or when it is found
incorrect by 5°F or more.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Bellow Meter Tests
Doc. # MTR-101D
Tolerance Limits
A critical flow, bell or transfer proof test must indicate that the meter accuracy is within
plus or minus 1% at a flow rate of approximately 10, 50, and 80% of capacity.
The maximum % error spread between these tests shall not exceed 1.25%.
The 50% and 80% rates must not be slower than the 10% rate.
Clean, repair or replace the meter, as necessary, to achieve this accuracy.
If a meter and/or recording instrument is found in error beyond limits of plus or minus
1% at the operating conditions or if a measurement change is noted, (e.g., change of
clock rotation, volumetric cycle or static element that alters the static range) change the
chart and send the original chart and the appropriate reporting forms to the appropriate
department for record adjustment.
Tolerance Limits: Static Pressure Element
The pressure element shall be calibrated to plus or minus 0.5% of instrument range at all
positions.
The pressure device shall be set to record the normal operating pressure as accurately as
practical, but should not exceed a tolerance of 0.25% of reading. This may be psia or
psig, depending upon the specific location.
The static pressure element shall be spanned initially from zero to 100% of scale and
checked at 50% of scale to establish proper angle for pressure element calibration.
Span thereafter as required.
Tolerance Limits: Temperature Recording Device
Test at flowing temperature using the following standard.
• If in error 4° F or less, adjust to the correct reading.
• If error is 5° F or more, a span calibration is required.
When spanning is required, a minimum of 70° F between the low and high points shall be
used.
3.4 Records
Document the test results. Note the length of time the meter was bypassed and the
estimated volume bypassed during the test on the chart. Retain a copy at field locations
for a minimum of one year. Send a copy of the test results to the appropriate department
of the company, where applicable.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Rotary Meter Tests
Doc. # MTR-102D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for developing procedures for the testing of rotary
type meters.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Meter Tests
Rotary meter testing includes the following:
• Critical Flow, Transfer Prover or Differential Pressure Test. Sonic nozzles are critical
flow devices.
• Check the static pressure at the operating pressure and at zero.
• Test temperature recorder at the operating temperature.
• Adjust or repair meters, recorders or other associated instrumentation found
inaccurate, to within tolerance limits.
• Adjust the cycle pen on chart recorders, as necessary, to ensure that it is recording in
the proper position.
• Check lubricant levels. Change lubricant as conditions require. Change at least once
every 24 months.
• Make audible and visual inspections.
3.2 Considerations
Frequency of Tests
Use the table below to determine the frequency of conducting tests. If a meter is subject
to adverse conditions, tests that are more frequent shall be considered. Contract or
regulatory requirements may also require more frequent tests.
All Meters: Test when placed in service,

when inaccuracy is suspected,
or when differential pressure
across meter exceeds 150% of
original or the established proof
curve as defined in IV. B. below.
All Meters:
Capacity: 0 - 2,000 MMBTU/D 6
2,001 - 10,000 MMBTU/D 3
Test instrument drive torque on meters during each test. Torque shall not exceed factory
recommendations or 4-inch ounces, whichever is less.
Check temperature instrument span at the time of installation or when it is found
incorrect by 5°F or more.
Clean and inspect meter run strainers at least every 12 months. Do more frequently if
past operating history indicates a need.
Differential pressure monitoring may be used to extend the frequency of inspection.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Rotary Meter Tests
Doc. # MTR-102D
Tolerance Limits
Meter proof of the low flow rate shall comply with the following standards:
• Be as near as practical to the manufacturer’s recommended minimum flow.
• High flow rate shall be at least 20% of meter capacity.
• Checks at 50% and 80% are recommended.
• Low flow proof must be within plus or minus 1.5%.
• The higher rates must be within plus or minus 1%.
• Clean, repair or replace meters as necessary, to achieve this accuracy.
Differential pressure across a meter shall comply with the following standards:
• Shall not exceed 150% of the original differential pressure as recorded on the curve
established when the meter was new or rebuilt.
• Utilize a differential gauge to determine differential pressure.
• Differential pressure curves for individual meters shall be plotted at delivery
pressures following meter installation or during a critical flow test conducted at
delivery pressure.
• A minimum of 3 differential pressures shall be plotted, at approximately 10%, 50%
and 80% of meter capacity.
• Subsequent differential tests will be conducted at a minimum of 10% of meter
capacity.
If a meter and/or recording instrument is found in error at operating conditions beyond
the limits of plus or minus 1% or if a measurement change is noted on the test report,
(e.g. change of the clock rotation, volumetric cycle or the static element that alters the
static range), change the chart and forward with the appropriate form to the
corresponding department of the company for record adjustment.

The pressure element shall be calibrated to plus or minus 0.5% of instrument range at all
test pressure positions.
The pressure recording instrument shall be set to record the normal operating pressure. It
should not exceed a tolerance of 0% of reading. This may be psia or psig, depending
upon the specific location.
The static pressure element shall be spanned initially from zero to 100% of scale and
checked at 50% of scale to establish proper angle for pressure element calibration. Span
thereafter as required.
Test at flowing temperature using the following standards.
• If in error 4°F or less, adjust to the correct reading.
• If error is 5°F or more, a span calibration is required.
• When spanning is required, a minimum of 70°F between the low and high points shall
be used.
3.4 Records
Document the record test results and the estimated bypass volume. Retain a copy at field
locations for a minimum of one year. Send a copy to the appropriate department of the
company, where applicable.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Orifice Meter Tests
Doc. # MTR-201D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for developing procedures for the proper testing of
Orifice Meters.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
The information in this guideline shall cover the testing of orifice meter static and
differential pressure recorders, temperature recorders and orifice plates. This information
also includes electronic flow measurement devices.
3.2 Considerations
Orifice Meter Tests
Orifice meter tests shall include the following standards:
• Test of differential span accuracy
• Test of differential pen arc, if applicable
• Test static pressure at operating conditions and at zero
• Test of time lag between differential and static pens, if applicable
• Leak test of valves and connecting gauge lines and manifolds
• Test for friction in the differential pen linkage system, if applicable
• Test temperature recorder at the operating temperature
• Check tension of pen arms and inking quality, if applicable
• Adjustment of meters found inaccurate to acceptable accuracy limits
• Inspection of orifice plate
Tolerances
Differential Pressure Recorders
• Differences between the test instrument and the differential indicated shall not exceed
0.2% of instrument range (0.2" on 100" chart).
• The differential indicated zero position shall have a tolerance of 0%.
Static Pressure Element
• The pressure element shall be calibrated to plus or minus 0.5% of instrument range at
all positions.
• The pressure indicated shall have a tolerance of 0% at normal operating pressure.
• The static element shall be spanned initially from zero to 100% of scale and checked
at 50% of scale. Span thereafter as required.
Temperature Recording Device
• Test at flowing temperature.
• Span element if found 5°F or more in error.
• If error is 4 °F or less adjust reading to correct value.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Orifice Meter Tests
Doc. # MTR-201D

When spanning is required, a minimum of 70 °F between the low and high points shall be
used.
Orifice plates shall conform to AGA Report No. 3, third edition or later or API 14.3,
"Orifice Metering of Natural Gas."
Orifice Plate Inspection
Remove the orifice plate.
Determine if the plate is found with the bevel downstream.
Determine if the plate has the proper thickness, clean, flat and the edges are sharp and
free of nicks.
Test Frequency
Minimum requirements are listed below. Contract or state regulations or adverse
operating conditions may require tests that are more frequent.

All Instrumentation and Orifice Plates: When Placed In or Taken
Out-Of-Service or When an
Inaccuracy is Suspected
All Meters:
Capacity: 0 through 2,000 MMBTU/D 6
2,001 through 10,000 MMBTU/D 3
> 10,000 MMBTU/D 1
3.4 Records
Document meter tests, temperature recorder tests, and orifice plate inspections. Retain a
copy at field locations for a minimum of one year.
If a meter or recording instrument is found in error beyond the limits of plus or minus 1%
or if a measurement change is noted on the test report, (e.g. change of the clock rotation
cycle or change of the static element which alters the static range), change present charts
if applicable and forward with appropriate form(s) to Gas Measurement Services.
4. References
4.1 American Gas Association (AGA)
• Gas Measurement Committee Report No. 3
4.2 American Petroleum Institute (API)
• API 14.3, Orifice Metering of Natural Gas

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Orifice Meter Tube Inspection
Doc. # MTR-202D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for the inspection of orifice meter tubes.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
New orifice meter tube installations and modifications made to existing installations shall
conform to the American Gas Association, Gas Measurement Committee Report No. 3
(Third edition or later) or API 14.3, "Orifice Metering of Natural Gas" and Engineering
Standards 5420 and 5421. Reference MTR-201D (Orifice Meter Tests) for meter tests.
Inspection
Measure with a micrometer and inspect all new orifice tubes before initial installation.
Orifice tubes may be measured and inspected at the vendor's plant before assembly and
shipment. Re-measure used orifice tubes with a micrometer if harsh operating conditions
have caused dimension changes.
Include the following points in the inspection:
• Measure all orifice plates furnished by the vendor and confirm that the correct
diameter has been stamped on the plate.
• Check orifice plate seals for correct thickness.
• Check orifice fitting plate holder slot dimension for recommended width.
• Check tap hole location and size, and tube straightness.
• Measure tube ID, and verify required pipe lengths, at positions shown on the
Calibration Report For Orifice Meter Tube.
• Check orifice plate for concentricity in fitting.
• Check tube bore smoothness for burrs, pits, rust, and debris accumulations.
• Check straightening vane length, position in tube, and condition.
• Check the orifice fitting and other associated equipment for proper operation.
Internally view the meter tube at least every 5 years to confirm the internal condition of
the tube.
Perform more frequent inspections if conditions indicate possible need or if inaccuracy is
suspected. An approved borescope may be used provided sufficient light is emitted by
the scope to adequately view the tube.
3.3 Records
Submit the most recent orifice meter tube calibration report to Gas Measurement Services
after the installation is complete for the following:
• Measurement and inspection of tubes in the field or at a manufacturer's shop.
• On subsequent inspections.
• Retain a copy at the Location and distribute copies as required in Operations.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Orifice Meter Tube Inspection
Doc. # MTR-202D
4. References
• AGA Gas Measurement Committee Report No. 3
• API 14.3, Orifice Metering of Natural Gas
• MTR-201D, Orifice Meter Tests
• ES 5420, Design Guideline for Orifice Meter Tubes
• ES 5421, Standard for Purchase of Orifice Meter Tubes

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Ultrasonic Meters
Doc. # MTR-203D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for the handling and testing of single and multi-path
ultrasonic meters.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Ultrasonic gas meters operate by determining the difference in transit times of bursts of
ultrasonic energy travelling in the upstream and downstream direction.
All ultrasonic meters and meter piping shall be designed, fabricated and tested in
accordance with the following codes and standards, as applicable.
• AGA Report Number 9
• Code of Federal Regulations 49, Part 192
• API 1104, Standard for Welding Pipeline and Related Facilities
Testing
Perform a visual inspection of the meter equipment and adjacent piping to ensure no
corrosion or debris exists that could impact safe operations. Testing of the meter includes
the following steps:
• Compare the Sonicware Speed of sound calculation to the meter speed of sound
calculation
• Check the static pressure transmitter at operating pressure and zero
• Check the temperature transmitter at operating temperature
• Calibrate transmitters found inaccurate to within tolerance limits
• Inspect EFM-RTU configuration and operation
• Check performance percentage of pulses received
• Check and record gain values of transducers
• Record a data log of instruments operation
• Check configuration of Ultrasonic setup and verfiy accuracy
Tolerance Limits
Sonicware calculated speed of sound and meter calculated speed of sound must be within
+ 0.5%. If outside the tolerance limits, make repairs or adjustments to the meter and
retest.
Calibrate the static pressure transmitter to + 5% of instrument range in all positions. It
shall be set to recored the normal operating pressure at a tolerance not to exceed 0.25% of
the reading.
An error of 3 °F or more requires calibration of the temperature transmitter.
Record a data log of the meters current operation and compare it to the log from the
initial test and previous tests. If the levels have increased more than 50%, the transducers
shall be inspected and cleaned.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Ultrasonic Meters
Doc. # MTR-203D

Frequency
Meter tests shall be performed monthly for custody transfer meters and at least 4 times
annually for check meters.
3.3 Records
Document the date, conditions, tests performed, results and any repairs or adjustments
made. Retain the data log for future comparison studies. Retain all information for at
least one year. Copy information to the appropriate company department(s).
4. References
• ES 5440, Design Guideline For Installation of Multi-path Ultrasonic Meters for
Custody Transfer
• ES 5406, Standard of Electronic Flow Measurement Installed on the Company’s
System and Operated by Others
• AGA Report No. 9
• API 1104, Standard for Welding Pipeline and Related Facilties
• CFR Part 192

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Turbine Meter Tests
Doc. # MTR-401D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for the development of procedures for the testing of
turbine type meters.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
The regular and scheduled testing of Turbine Meters is essential for the proper operation
of process depending on the precise operation of Turbines. This can be the difference
between operating safely and efficiently or operating losses due to problems.
3.2 Considerations
Meter Testing
Testing of meters includes the following steps:
• For the Critical Flow or Transfer Prover Test, electronic proof may be used for Auto
Adjust Meters. Sonic Nozzles are critical flow devices.
• Check static pressure at the operating pressure and at zero.
• Test temperature instrument at the operating temperature.
• Adjust or repair meters, recorders or other associated instrumentation found
inaccurate to within tolerance limits.
• Make an audible and visual inspection.
• Adjust the cycle pen as necessary on chart recorders, if applicable, to ensure that it is
recording in the proper position.
Frequency of Tests
Use the table below to determine the frequency of conducting meter tests. If the meter is
subject to adverse conditions, more frequent tests shall be considered. In addition,
contract or tariff requirements may dictate tests that are more frequent.
Type and Capacity of Meter Interval Between Tests - Months
All Meters: Test when placed in service or when an

inaccuracy is suspected.
All Meters:
Capacity: 0 through 2,000 MMBTU/D 6
2,001 to 10,000 MMBTU/D 3
> 10,000 MMBTU/D 1
Clean and inspect meter run strainers at least every 12 months or more frequently if the
operating history indicates a need.
Spin testing may be conducted during the test or as deemed necessary to determine the
mechanical condition of the meter.
Test instrument drive torque during each test. Torque sall not exceed factory
recommendations or 2-inch ounces, whichever is less.
Check temperature instrument span when installed or found incorrect by 5°F or more.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Turbine Meter Tests
Doc. # MTR-401D
Tolerance Limits
Verify Flow Meters as follows:
• Meter proof of the low flow rate should be as near as practical to the manufacturer’s
recommended minimum flow.
• The high flow rate should be at least 20% of meter capacity.
• Checks at 50% and 80% are recommended.
• Low flow proof must be within plus or minus 1.5%.
• The higher rates must be within plus or minus 1%.
Clean, repair or replace meters as necessary, to achieve this accuracy.
The auto adjust percent error is based on a comparison between the electronic prover and
the original factory electronic proof curve.
Replace or repair auto adjust meters when an electronic field prover indicates a 1% or
greater deviation correction at a flow rate of 10% or greater of meter capacity.
Calibrate the pressure element to plus or minus 0.5% of instrument range at all positions.
Set the pressure instrument to record the normal operating pressure. It shall not exceed a
tolerance of 0% of reading.
Span the static pressure element initially from zero to 100% of scale. Check it at 50% of
scale to establish proper angle for pressure element calibration. Span thereafter as
required.
Test at the flowing temperature. If in error 4°F or less, adjust to the correct reading. If
error is 5°F or more a span calibration is required. When spanning is required, a
minimum of 70°F between the low and high points will be used.
Error Tolerance
If a meter or recording device is found in error at operating conditions beyond the limits
of plus or minus 1% or if a measurement change is noted on the test report, (e.g. change
of clock rotation, volumetric cycle or static element that alters the static range), change
the chart and forward the information to the appropriate company department for
adjustment.
3.4 Records
Record the test results and the estimated bypass volume. Retain a copy at the field
location for a minimum of one year. Send a copy to the appropriate internal department.
Include the chart when applicable.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Testing of Positive Displacement Meters
Doc. # MTR-402D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for developing procedures for the testing, handling
and care of positive displacement meters.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Positive displacement meters must be transported and stored in the upright position.
Avoid dropping the meter. If a meter is dropped, it must be removed from service and
returned to the testing room for recalibration.
When positive displacement meters are transported, care shall taken that the meters do
not jar or impact against each other. Meters must not be subjected to excessive or
constant vibration. New meters should be kept in the original packing until installed.
Meters removed from service shall be handled as carefully.
3.2 Considerations
Following is a list of mechanical problems that may result from the improper handling of
a meter.
• Misaligned or broken valves
• Broken valves guides
• Broken tangent
• Broken main pinion
• Broken index
• Arm connecting to the diaphragm broken
• Loose valve arms
• Loose arms of the diaphragm connector
• Internal leakage of the diaphragm
• Leakage through the outside casing of the meter
• Separation of the pinion that moves the index
The testing of meters is necessary to accomplish the following:
• Determine the precision of each meter in use
• Determine the efficiency and quality of repair techniques
• Determine the influence of climatic conditions on the meter and to take the necessary
corrective measures to increase the useful life and accuracy of the meters
• Determine the effect of the gas on the internal parts of the meter
When testing ensure that meters are at a comparable temperature. For each 5°F of
temperature difference 1% error results.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # MTR-402D
Bell Prover Method
The meter to be tested shall be connected in series with a sleeve to a calibrated prover
that has sufficient flow and pressure capacity, in this case, a bell prover. The volume
through the meter is compared with the volume recorded on the bell prover’s scale (see
Figure 1 below).
Bell Prover Operation

The air going through the meter is measured using
an inverted bell with the open part submerged in
light oil to keep it sealed. When the bell rises, it
fills with air. When the bell drops it discharges
into the sleeve connected to the meter. The bell
has a scale indicating the cubic feet of air inside
the bell over the oil level. The scale is divided
into tenths of a foot and subdivided into 0.05
cubic foot graduations. The meter has an index
consisting of several spheres recording the air
passing through it. One of the spheres is used for
the test. When the needle of this sphere
completes a revolution, it is equivalent to 2, 5 or
10 cubic feet depending on the meter capacity.
Comparing the quantity of air passing through the
meter and the quantity of air leaving the bell, it
can determine if the meter is slow or fast. The
tests are made with the diaphragm half open and
full open to determine the repair to be made.
The following table lists the meter types, capacity,

size of the test sphere and size of the orifice to be
used during the test:
Capacity (c.f.h.) Orifice size to be used in

Maximum Cubic Feet at atmospheric Test Index the tests
MAKE Type Size Class Press. pressure per cu. Full Half Diaph
(p.s.i.) Press. Differ. Ft.___ Open Open ragm
½” WC 1” WC 2” WC
Sprague 1A 175 - 5 215 325 485 2 9/64 5/64 3/64
Sprague 2A 240 - 5 240 370 530 2 9/64 5/64 3/64
Sprague 3A 305 B 5 305 425 630 2 9/64 5/64 3/64
Sprague 4A 400 C 25 410 610 900 5 9/64 5/64 3/64
Sprague 5A 675 J 25 715 1030 1500 10 ¾ 5/16 5/64
Sprague 5A 1000 D 25 1030 1500 2150 10 ¾ 3/8 5/64
A. M. AL250 250 B 5 250 250 250 2 9/64 5/64 3/64
A. M. AL425 425 C 10-25 425 250 900 2 9/64 5/64 3/64
A. M. AL800 800 D 20 800 1200 1600 5 11/64 9/32 3/64
A. M. AL100 1000 D 25 1000 600 2200 5 11/64 5/8 3/64
0
3.3

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # MTR-402D
Expectations/Requirements (Continued)
Meter Testing Sequence
Removed Meters
• Three normal tests at 2 cubic feet are performed.
• Results are documented.
• Type of repair necessary is determined.
• Repaired Counters
The following tests are performed:
• Diaphragm Test (Low Light)
• Full Open Test
• Half Open Test
• Testing for leakage in the meter.
• Pressure differential across the meter.
If the test proves the meter to more than 2% slow or fast, the meter must be adjusted.
If the test proves the meter to have an error of more than 4%, the meter must be repaired.
Equipment Tests
Temperature Equalization
Before performing the tests, allow the meter adjust to room temperature. A period of at
least 12 hours is recommended.
A 5°F difference between meter temperature and the prover temperature can result in an
error of 1%.
Bell Prover Pressure
Generally, a pressure of 1-1/2" water in the prover is accepted as the "standard" pressure.
This pressure is indicated on a type U gauge connected to the prover's outlet.
Testing for Escapes in the Prover’s Connections
This test is performed by placing the palm of the hand on the meter outlet, opening the
prover's outlet valve and then closing it. If the gauge shows a drop in pressure after the
prover's valve has been closed, a leak is present.
Leakage Test
All meters that have been repaired shall undergo a test to determine if leakage exist. This
test shall be performed taking the meter filled with air and submerging it into a water tank
that is called a hydro-pneumatic prover. See Figure No. 2.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # MTR-402D
Description of the Low Pressure Flow Test Method

Low-pressure flow test methods are used for larger capacity meters. In this test, the unit
used consists of a calibrated orifice with its special accessories, such as thermometer,
barometer and pressure gauge.
These tests are accepted as a "standard" to determine meter accuracy. This test consists in
blowing air under pressure through the meter, which is connected to a calibrated orifice.
During the test, readings of the meter are taken, as well as the air temperature, air
pressure in the orifice, atmospheric pressure and time during which air goes through the
meter.
By using tables, the quantity of gas through the orifice is determined and is compared
with the quantity recorded by the meter.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # MTR-402D

A Rockwell type 2" prover unit.
Low pressure flow test procedure is as follows:

• Connect the equipment as indicated in Figure No. 3.
• Test for escapes inserting a blind plate, without an orifice. Apply pressure and then
close the valves.
• Verify the pressure on the pressure gauge. Low readings indicate leakage.
• The orifices to be used are calibrated and marked with the time in seconds of the time
it takes to discharge one cubic foot of gas under pressure, temperature, specific
weight and barometer under "standard" conditions.
• The "standard" cubic foot is based on the flow temperature and the prover pressure.
7" of water is used when the method with an already predetermined differential is
utilized.
• The "standard" conditions are as follows:
a. Differential pressure: 7.0" WC (Water Column)
b. Barometric pressure: 29.32 inches of Mercury (14.4 lb/B")
c. Specific gravity of 0.60.
d. Place joints on each side of the orifice.
• To determine the differential to be used, multiply the factors of Tables I and II.
a. Table I provides the pressure differential that must be maintained for the various
barometric pressure and flow temperature conditions at a specific weight of 0.60.
b. Table II provides the factor for the correction of the differential for various
specific weights.
c. The value of the differential may also be obtained form the following formula H
= 206.9 X B X G
T
Where:
H = Differential in inches of water

B = Barometric pressure - inches of Mercury
G = Specific weight
T = Absolute temperature = 460 + F

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # MTR-402D
d. Once the pressure differential is determined, the larger orifice is installed and the
relief valve is opened.
e. The inlet valve is opened to produce the required pressure.
f. If the required differential pressure is not reached, the relief valve is opened
slowly until the suitable pressure differential is obtained.
g. A test is performed, using the testing sphere, recording the time with the
chronometer in such a manner that the test lasts longer than 100 seconds, thus
counting complete turns.
h. During the test, verify that the temperature does not change.
• The meter test percentage may be calculated using the formula
Test (%) = (ts Vm - Tw) x 100
Tw
Where:
ts = time marked at the orifice

Vm = volume recorded on the meter
Tw = time measured with the chronometer
a. If the result is negative, the meter is slow. If it is positive, the meter is fast.
b. In this test, the prover measures a pressure of 7" of water over the atmospheric
pressure. Therefore, if the meter pressure is much higher, the results from the above-
mentioned computation must be corrected. This correction results in +1% for every
4" of water the meter pressure is over the 7".
c. This correction may be obtained in Table VI.
d. Whenever air is used for the test, the test may be simplified using only Table II to
determine the differential through the orifice. The "standard" time of the orifice shall
be multiplied by 1.291 in order to obtain the air discharge.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # MTR-402D

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Installation of Household Meters
Doc. # MTR-403D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for the development of procedures for the installation
of household meters.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Household meter connections must be as compact and inconspicuous as possible. Install
the meter on a meter bar or foundation that is plumb and level in order to reduce the wear
and tear of the internal parts. A meter bar provides a rigid structural connection between
the inlet and outlet piping isolating the meter from stresses in the piping.
To ensure greater accuracy in meter readings, a gauge must be used to adjust the pressure
of the regulator. Meters installed at the same location should be removed, tested and
repaired as specified by a meter accuracy monitoring program, but not to exceed a 10
year interval.
When possible, install the meter outside the structure to facilitate meter reading and
removal of the meter, if necessary. If a meter must be installed inside a customer’s
facility, it must be installed in such a way that the meter and piping are protected from
accidental damage and/or tampering.
3.3 Records
Keep a running record of all meters installed, including make, model, location and date
installed.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Protection of Aboveground Pipe
Doc. # MISC-101D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for the protection of above grade appurtenances and
pressurized facilities from damage by mobile equipment and vehicular traffic.
2. Scope
This guideline applies to all “Company” operated facilities, its employees, and its contractors
3. Guideline
3.1 General
The need for protection shall be considered for all above grade appurtenances and
pressurized facilities but specifically for the following installation locations:
• System facilities on property not controlled by the Company.
• Unattended installations.
• Remotely located installations.
3.2 Considerations
When identifying facilities to be protected, the following considerations shall be
evaluated:
• The strength of the facility to withstand external forces without sustaining damage.
• The probability of injury to the general public or employees due to leaks or ruptures
caused by damage to these facilities.
• The impact on product deliveries, supply or operations if a facility must be taken out
of service when it is damaged.
• The frequency of use and size of mobile equipment and vehicles in the immediate
vicinity of these facilities.
• The lack of visibility of the installation due to vegetation, physical features, color, etc.
Procedure
Install piping guards during the construction phase, as required. Reference Engineering
Standard 7123 for a typical piping guard.
Monitor changing conditions surrounding above grade appurtenances and pressurized
facilities to determine if new, improved or additional piping guards are needed.
Changes can result from the following:
• Variations in height of crop or vegetation surrounding the facility.
• Increased and more frequent activities of mobile equipment.
Install new piping guards where necessary.
4. References
• ES 7123, Typical Drawing for Power Gas and E.S.D. Systems - Quick E.S.D.
Depressuring Station

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Vaults Maintenance
Doc. # MISC-301D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for providing an outline for procedure development
for the inspection and maintenance of vaults.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Inspection Requirements
Each vault shall be inspected annually, at intervals not to exceed 15 months, in order to
determine if it is in good physical condition, adequately ventilated and free of gas, water
and debris.
The atmosphere in the vault shall be tested for the presence of gas. If gas is found, all the
equipment and pipe shall be inspected for leakage.
Any leaks found shall be repaired immediately.
Ventilating equipment shall be inspected to ensure proper functioning.
The vault cover shall be inspected to ensure it does not present a hazard to public safety.
3.2 Records
Results and actions taken during a vault inspection shall be documented and retained as
long as the facility is in service.
4. References
• CFR 192.749, Vault Maintenance
• CFR 192.603(b), General Provision, records
4.2 American Society for Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
• ASME, B31.8, 850.2, Basic Requirements, 853.5, Vault Maintenance

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Class Location
Doc. # PPL-101D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for surveys to be made of all pipeline right-of-ways
to determine class location.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Surveys shall be performed for all pipeline rights of way to determine class locations.
Performing Class Location Determination
At least once a calendar year with intervals not to exceed 15 months, surveys shall be
conducted along pipelines to determine the location of each building intended for human
occupancy and the locations of any high occupancy areas.
Monitor pipelines where class changes are likely to occur more frequently.
Enter the survey data into the appropriate computer database or plot buildings and high
occupancy locations on an alignment sheet or class location map to determine class
location.
All class location changes must be approved by the Senior Operations Officer.
If a class change occurs review and compare the original pipeline design, construction
and testing with that currently required. Review pipeline inspection, leak surveys and
corrosion control records to assess the physical condition of the affected segment.
Review available operating and maintenance data to verify the pipeline can safely operate
in the new class location.
Follow-up facility modifications, hydrostatic testing or pressure reductions required by
class changes.
Modifications, pressure reduction or testing must be completed within 18 months from
the time the class location change occurred.
3.3 Records
Record applicable buildings and high occupancy locations in the applicable computer
database, alignment sheet or class location map.
Schedule and document survey dates in the applicable computer database.
Document the reviews required with calculations, data sheets, or a brief memo.
Retain all class location survey records for at least five years.
4. References
4.1 American Society of Mechanical Engineering (ASME)
• ASME B31.8, Chapter V, Section 854, Location Class and Changes in Number of
Buildings Intended for Human Occupancy
• ASME B31.8, Chapter IV, Section 845, Control and Limiting of Gas Pressure
• ASME B31.8, Chapter V, Section 856, Pipelines Service Conversions

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Class Location
Doc. # PPL-101D
4.2 Code of Federal Regulations, 49

• CFR 192.5, Class Locations
• CFR 192.605(e), Procedural Manual for Operations, Maintenance and Emergencies
• CFR 192.609, Change in Class Location: Required Study
• CFR 192.611, Change in Class Location: Confirmation or Revision or Maximum
Allowable Operating Pressure
• ES 0068, Class Location Determination

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Damage Prevention Program
Doc. # PPL-102D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for the development and implementation of a
program to prevent damage to Company facilities in the vicinity of excavation activities.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
A program shall be in place to prevent possible damage to buried pipeline facilities by
excavation activities.
“Excavation activities” include any of the following:
• Excavation
• Boring
• Tunneling
• Back filling
• Removal of above or below ground structures
• Blasting
• Plowing (installation of flexible pipe, such as drain tile, or cable without open
trenching)
• Other earth digging, disturbing or moving activities
3.2 Considerations
Pipelines excluded from the requirements of this guideline are offshore pipelines and
those to which the operator physically controls access. Physical control includes
enclosing the facility within a six-foot or higher chain link fence with lockable gates or
posting of guards.
Each operating location must have a Damage Prevention Program. The program may be
conducted locally or centrally and must contain, at a minimum, the items included in the
sections below.
Identification of Excavators
Develop and maintain a list of contractors and other persons who are normally engaged in
excavation activities within the location. Reference Guideline PPL-405D, “Public
Education Program”.
Notification of Excavators and the Public
Contact the excavators identified and the public in the vicinity of the pipeline and advise
them of the Damage Prevention Program. Reference Guideline PPL-405D, “Public
Education Program”.
Receiving and Recording Notices of Planned Excavation Activities
Provide for the receipt of routine notices of planned excavation activities.
Accomplish this through the use of a "one call" notification system if available. If a
“one-call” system is not available, a Company employee or an answering service shall be
available to receive notices during normal working hours.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # PPL-102D

As a minimum, have an answering service receive calls during all other times. Reference
Guideline COM-301D “Telephone System Answering Services”.
Document requests for line marking using printouts from a “one-call” system when
available. If printouts are not available, make arrangements for the excavator to
outline/mark the area to be excavated with paint that will not be disturbed by rain or other
elements.
Document those notifications that actually require line marking or other significant
activity. Document the activity required, when it was accomplished and by whom.
Responding to Each Notice of Planned Excavation Activities
Respond to each notice received.
Inform the requestor if a Company pipeline is located near the planned excavation
activity.
Inform the requestor when the pipeline shall be marked, what marking shall be provided
and how to identify the marking.
If a Company pipeline is not located near a planned excavation, inform the requestor.
Determine when excavation activity is planned near the Company's pipeline and advise
the requester that a Company representative must be present during this activity. If the
precise timing is unknown, request specific notification when it has been established.
Pipeline Location and Marking
Locate and mark pipelines in areas where excavation activities are observed, anticipated,
or shall occur as indicated by notification and take the following steps:
• Mark pipelines within 48 hours of receipt of notification, unless the notifying party
agrees to extend this time.
• Always mark pipelines before any excavation activities begin.
• Use temporary flags or other more permanent markers, at least as visible, if the type
and duration of the activity so dictates.
• Mark bend areas and other changes of direction so that the pipe's location is clearly
delineated. Set markers on straight pipeline sections at intervals required by
conditions of the site and job, but not to exceed 100 feet.
• If practical, locate and mark pipelines when a requestor’s representative is present.
• Remove markers upon completion of the work, when practical.
• The minimum length of pipeline to be marked shall be as required by conditions of
the site and job.
Inspection and Monitoring of Excavation Activities
Assign a Company representative to be present when excavation activities occur within
25 feet of the pipeline.
In the event that parallel encroachments or other circumstances require that a Company
representative be present for a long duration and there is to be no crossing of the
Company's pipeline, other provisions may be made to prevent damage to the pipeline.
If the Company’s pipeline is to be crossed, determine its depth at the point of the intended
crossing using the best available method. Obtain, from the outside party, the intended
excavation depth. Reference Guideline PPL-103D, “Crossing of Company Pipelines by
Other Operators”.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # PPL-102D

If at least 18" of clearance (undisturbed soil) exists from the bottom of the excavation to
the top of the Company pipeline, take the following steps:
• Advise outside party(s) of the depth of the pipeline

• Advise the outside party(s) that excavation may proceed across the pipeline in a slow
and controlled manner
• Monitor the excavation as it occurs to ensure that the depth of excavation is
maintained as planned and is at least 18" above the Company pipeline.
If less than 18" of clearance exists from the top of the Company pipeline to the bottom of
the excavation or the crossing will be below the Company's pipeline, take the following
steps:
Advise outside party(s) of the depth of pipeline and prohibit outside party(s) from
approaching the unexposed pipeline closer than 18" from the top or 36" from the side or
bottom of the pipeline with mechanical equipment.
All excavation within 18" of the unexposed pipeline shall be by hand. After exposure,
excavation up to 12" from the side or bottom of the exposed pipeline may proceed by
mechanical means if the “Company” representative is satisfied it may be done safely with
the equipment and operator available.
Excavation Activities Identified in Progress
If an outside party is seen approaching or working over the Company's pipeline,
immediately delay the excavation activities until the Company facilities have been
located.
If excavation activities are identified on or near the Company's pipeline that are not
allowed by the pipeline easement or permit agreement, delay the activities through
mutual agreement with the outside party, if possible.
Advise the outside party(s) that the Company does not allow encroachments without prior
agreement and any such encroachment must be within requirements specified by the
Company. Reference Guideline PPL-103D, “Crossing of Company Pipelimes by Other
Operators”.
Advise the outside party(s) that if the excavation activities cause damage that have an
adverse effect on the future maintenance and operation of the Company's facilities, they
can be held responsible. This shall include current and future damages. The relocation of
the Company's facilities could also be required.
If a mutual agreement cannot be reached or excavation activities continue, contact the
Operations Management at the Location and Company's Legal Department.
Blasting
In the case of planned blasting near Company pipelines, refer to Engineering Standard
7155 to determine if possible damage may result. If blasting takes place and the
possibility of damage exists, conduct a leakage survey immediately to verify the integrity
of the pipeline. Refer to Guideline PPL-407D, “Gas Leak Detection Survey”.
"One Call" Participation and Usage
The Company shall support and participate in "one call" organizations if available.
Supporting one system, where more than one exists, is adequate.
Whenever procedure requirements are satisfied by a "one call" organization and
subsequently not directly carried out by Company personnel, periodic testing of the “one
call” process is recommended.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # PPL-102D

At least once annually, conduct a mock scenario to confirm efficient, correct performance
of the “one call” system.
Annually, verify that the “one-call” facility database is correct.
Ensure that facility additions and removals are reported to the “one call” service.
3.4 Records
Retain the original “one-call” record for one year after completion of the project. If no
“one-call” record is available, record pertinent information and retain for one year.
Maintain detailed records when Company representative’s request that excavation
activities be delayed or stopped because of unauthorized excavation or other problems.
Each time a buried pipeline is exposed or when above or below grade pipeline is
damaged or hit by an outside party, record the details of the event, actions taken and
retain the information for one year. Reference Guideline COR-102D, “Examination of
Buried Pipelines”.
In the event of litigation or other unresolved situations, do not destroy records without the
Legal Departments approval.
4. References
• COM-301D, Telephone System Answering Services
• PPL-103D, Crossing of Company Pipelines by Foreign Operators
• PPL-405D, Public Education Program
• ES 7155, Allowable Blasting Near Buried Pipelines

• CFR 192.614, Damage Prevention Program

• CFR 192.605(b), Procedural Manual for Operations, Mainteance and Emergencies

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Crossing of Company Pipeline by Other Operators
Doc. # PPL-103D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for developing site-specific procedures for the
crossing of Company facilities by above grade or buried facilities such as electric power, gas, oil,
water or communication cables or when new or relocated pipelines are being installed.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Preference
Crossings of Company pipelines are preferred to be under an existing Company pipeline.
If the review of specific job conditions concludes that this requirement is unreasonable or
impractical, allowing the crossing above the Company pipeline is acceptable.
Separation
A minimum of 12" of separation must be maintained between other underground
structures and the Company pipeline.
3.3 Records
Document all activities associated with the crossing of Company pipelines complete with
drawings. Retain documentation for the life of the Company pipeline or the foreign
facility, whichever is less.
4. References
• CFR 192.325(a), Underground Clearance
• ES 0065, Encroachment Guidelines for Natural Gas Pipelines
• ES 4775, Typical Undercrossing of Present Pipeline by Foreign Pipeline
• ES 4880, Guidelines for Sizing and Location of Blow-offs
• ES 6651, Typical Cathodic Portection Test Stations by Type
• ASME B31.8, 841.143, Clearance Between Pipelines or Mains and Other
Underground Structures

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Repair Procedures
Doc. # PPL-201D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for the development of repair procedures for
pipelines.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Take immediate measures to protect life and property from hazards resulting from a
leaking, defective or damaged pipeline. Repair the pipeline as soon as possible when a
hazardous condition is found. All repair methods established by this guideline are
considered permanent. The use of mechanical sleeves and leak clamps, when not
specified by Engineering Standard 8350, are considered temporary measures that shall be
immediately taken to protect life and property.
3.2 Considerations
Inspect any pipeline that is “exposed” for any reason.
Expose and inspect any pipeline suspected of leaking or being struck or hit.
Use the nonpressurized repair alternate of Engineering Standard (ES) 8350 if either of the
following two conditions exist:
• Pipe geometry is deformed preventing proper installation of a pressurized repair.
• Leakage makes pressurized repair unsafe.
Definitions
An "Injurious Damage Condition" is one that impairs the safety and serviceability of a
pipeline and requires repair according to Engineering Standard 8350.
A "Non-injurious Damage Condition" is one that does not impair the safety and
serviceability of a pipeline and therefore is not required to be repaired according to
Engineering Standard 8350. Any action taken to minimize the effects of the condition or
to prevent it from becoming injurious is considered preventative maintenance.
Inspection
Inspect any exposed pipeline for coating condition, external corrosion, impact damage
and leaks. Visually inspect welds on exposed buried pipelines whenever coating has been
removed for any reason. Reference Engineering Standard 8352 for pipe seam and body
defect inspection criteria.
Preliminary Investigation when Damage or Defects are Found
Make a preliminary assessment to determine the extent of the damage or defect. In most
cases a visual inspection is sufficient. Use X-ray or other forms of inspection if
conditions warrant.
Follow the requirements of the Preventive Maintenance section, if inspection concludes
that damage is non-injurious.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Repair Procedures
Doc. # PPL-201D

Initiate a complete evaluation of the damage, as outlined in the following section, if the
preliminary investigation does not confirm that the damage is non-injurious.
Investigate to determine the cause of any leaks found.
Formal Evaluation of Damage Extent
Make a thorough evaluation of the extent of any damage or defect. Take measurements
and conduct tests as necessary. Compare the extent of any damage or defect against the
limits shown in Engineering Standard 8350 as follows:
• Confirm the damage as non-injurious if its extent does not exceed the limits
established. Follow the requirements in the “Preventive Maintenance” Section, when
such confirmation occurs.
• Confirm the damage as injurious if its extent exceeds the limits established. Follow
the requirements in the “Repairs” Section, , when such confirmation occurs.
Preventive Maintenance
Take any preventive measure considered appropriate to minimize the effects of a non-
injurious condition or to prevent it from becoming injurious.
Use a patch as a preventive maintenance method only if it is allowed as a repair when
there is an injurious condition.
Repairs
Determine the repair method for an injurious condition according to the type of damage
or defect listed in Engineering Standard 8350.
Transmission replacement pipe and components must be designed and constructed to
accommodate a smart pig, reference Engineering Standard 0075.
Reference Engineering Standard 8301 for welding specifications and repair details.
Contact Gas Control and coordinate, as necessary, if there is an immediate or future
change in the operating conditions of the line as a result of the repair.
If a pressurized repair is made, reduce the pressure of the line to the limits established by
Guideline PPL-202D “Operating Pressures and Limits Criteria”.
Verify the leak has been contained and no additional leaks exist in the immediate area.
Removal of Pressurized Repair Sleeves
Following the removal of pipe with a pressure-containing repair sleeve that has the
potential of containing pressurized gas (for instance, a pumpkin on a Dresser coupling),
vent the cavity between the sleeve and pipe before removing the sleeve for disposal.
3.4 Records
Document each inspection of a buried pipeline for each leak or repair or for preventive
maintenance other than painting. An escape of substance that can be stopped by
tightening bolts, nuts, packing or some other mechanical device is not considered a
"Leak".
Document repairs and replacement of valves, relief valves and pipeline components
affecting maximum allowable operating pressure (MAOP) and retain at least five years.
Follow the as-built and other documentation requirements of Engineering Standards

Series 8700, if pipe or any component affecting MAOP is replaced.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Repair Procedures
Doc. # PPL-201D
4. References
4.1 Enron Corrosion Control Manual, Chapter 13

• PPL-202D, Operating Pressure Limit Criteria
• ES 0075, Design Philosophy for Onshore Gas Pipelines
• ES 0162, Notification of Construction, Federal and State Agencies
• ES 8301, General Welding Specifications
• ES 8350, Pipeline Defects and Repairs General Requirements
• ES 8352, Longitudinal Seam and Pipe Body Evaluation
• ES 8700, Drafting and Surveying - Engineering Standards
• CFR 192.150, Passage of Internal Inspection Devices
• CFR 192.485, Remedial Measures: Transmission Lines
• CFR 192.605, Procedural Manual for Operations, Maintenance And Emergencies
• CFR 192.703, Maintenance, General
• CFR 192.709, Transmission Lines: Record keeping
• CFR 192.711, Transmission Lines: General Requirements for Repair Procedures
• CFR 192.713, Transmission Lines: Field Repair of Imperfections and Damages
• CFR 192.715 Transmission Lines: Permanent Field Repair of Welds
• CFR 192.717, Transmission Lines: Permanent Field Repair of Leaks
• ASME B31.8, 862.213, Repair of Corroded Pipe
• ASME B31.8, Essential Features of the Operating and Maintenance Plan
• ASME B31.8, 851, Pipeline Maintenance
• ASME B31.8, 851.4, Repair Procedures for Steel Pipelines or Mains Operating at or
Above 40% of the Specified Minimum Yield Strength
• ASME B31.8, 851.41, Permanent Field Repairs of Injurious Gouges, Grooves, and
Dents
• ASME B31.8, 851.42, Permanent Field Repair of Welds Having Injurious Defects
• ASME B31.8, 851.43, Permanent Field Repair of Leaks and Non-Leaking Corroded
Areas

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Operating Pressures and Limits Criteria
Doc. # PPL-202D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes requirements for the development of site-specific procedures for the
determination of maximum pressures at which a steel pipeline is operated while excavation,
maintenance, repairs or other such activities are performed.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Establishing Pressure Limits
Warning
Pressure higher than those listed below SHALL NOT be maintained unless the
activity can be conducted without compromising the safe operation of the pipeline
and the safety of operating personnel.
3.2 Considerations
Select the lowest maximum operating pressure from Table 1 based on activities planned
and the presence or absence of damage. Values shown are a percent of the MAOP.
Reference Guideline PPL-401D, “Establishing Maximum Allowable Pressure”.
TABLE 1
PRESSURE CRITERIA
Damaged from External Force or Corrosion
Not Damaged
Not Leaking Leaking
Type of Activity
Acetylene or Acetylene or Acetylene or Electric
Electric Welded Electric Welded
Coupled Coupled Coupled Welded
No Activity
Pipe Backfilled 100 100 65 65 65 65
Pipe Exposed 65 100 65 65 65 65
(4)
Excavation (5) 50 80 50 (1) 65 (1) 50 (1) 65 (1)
Welding 50 100 (2) 50 (2)(3) (2)(3) 50 (2)(3) (2)(3)
Hot Tapping 65 100 Not Applicable Not Applicable
Stoppling 65 65 Not Applicable Not Applicable
Any Other 65 80 50 (1) (1) 50 (1) (1)
Activity
(1) Not more than 80% actual pressure at time of damage or leak
(2) P = 2s (t - .100) F
D
P = Pressure
s = Specified Minimum Yield Strength
t = Nominal Wall Thickness
D = Diameter
F = Design Factor
(3) Not more than 60% actual pressure at time of damage or leak

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Operating Pressures and Limits Criteria
Doc. # PPL-202D

(4) This is not intended to apply to creek crossings and similar "normal" instances
where pipe may be exposed. It applies when listed or similar activities are
discontinued or completed and the line has not been backfilled. Acetylene welds
and dresser couplings in and adjacent to exposed creek crossings and similar
instances shall be reinforced following the concepts for tie-ins in Guideline PPL-
205D, “Acetylene or Dresser Coupled Pipelines”.
(5) Excavation restrictions do not apply when the pipe is exposed for three feet or less
of pipe length, to allow for dresser coupling bonding, over or under crossings of
utilities, drain tile or other similar operations.
(6) Design Factors are determined by Class Location.
Class 1 D = 0.72
Class 2 D = 0.60
Class 3 D = 0.50
Class 4 D = 0.40
4. References
• PPL-205D, Acetylene or Dresser Coupled Pipelines
• PPL-401D, Maximum Allowable Operating Pressure
• CFR 192 Subpart C – Pipe Design

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Tapping Pipelines
Doc. # PPL-203D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for the development of procedures and the
identification of qualifications for the installation of hot taps and stopple fittings.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Personnel performing hot taps or taps on plastic pipe shall be qualified by training and/or
experience.
Records or maps about the pipe to be tapped shall be reviewed.
Valves and control fittings to be permanently connected must have pressure ratings
equivalent to the maximum design pressure of the pipeline being tapped.
Tapping and flow control equipment must have pressure ratings equal to the maximum
pressure at which the pipeline will be operated during the tap.
Control fittings or side connections attached to a pipeline shall be pressurized and
checked for leaks before the tapping operation is started.
Valves that open with a quarter turn and control high pressure shall be opened slowly.
Stay out of the gas path when bleeding lines or draining a high pressure line.
Pressurized piping shall never be struck.
3.2 Considerations
Safety Precautions
Only personnel necessary to perform the tap will remain in the immediate area.
Spark-producing equipment, in the immediate area of the tapping operation, shall be
prohibited.
A fire extinguisher shall be provided at the tapping site.
Inspect trench banks with Combustible Gas Indicators for presence of gas.
After the tap has been made, necessary precautions shall be taken to eliminate any
possible source of ignition at the time the Low Pressure Tapping Tool is removed.
When increasing the pressure on a line, personnel shall vacate the area until normal
operating pressure is reached.
Tapping Steel or Cast Iron Pipe
Procedures shall be in place outlining the steps taken in performing a pipeline tap safely.
All exposed pipelines shall be inspected to verify proper identification and condition.
Follow the steps outlined by the manufacturer for the tapping machine used in
performing the hot tap.
Tapping or drilling machines shall not be used in tunnels, manholes or other places, that
cannot be vented.
When mains or fittings are removed from live mains, the openings shall be plugged as
soon as possible.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Tapping Pipelines
Doc. # PPL-203D

Tapping Plastic Pipe
Procedures shall be in place outlining the steps taken in performing a tap on plastic
piping safely.
All exposed pipelines shall be inspected to verify proper identification and condition.
Tapping saddles shall be installed according to guidelines on plastic joining methods.
Reference guideline WLD-105D, “Joining of Plastic Pipe”.
Installing Taps
Taps shall be performed by personnel qualified by training and/or experience.
Design and install hot taps in accordance with Engineering Standard 8312.
If installation of a tap could impact system flows, it shall be necessary to schedule and
coordinate the job with Gas Control.
TABLE 1
HOT TAP
Pipeline Size Equipment Support Personnel
2” none special 2 Team members
3” & larger one side boom 1 operator & 2 other Team members
TABLE 2
STOPPLE
Pipeline Size Equipment Support Personnel
2” none special 2 Team members
3” -8” one side boom or 1 operator & 2 other Team members
equivalent
10” - 12” one side boom 1 operator & 3 other Team members
14” & larger one side boom w/25-foot 1 operator & 3 other Team members
boom length, minimum
3.4 Records
Update as-built information as referenced in the Engineering Standards 8700 Series. No
hot tap qualification documentation is required in the permanent project records.
For buried pipelines, the necessary external inspection shall be done. Inspect the hot tap
coupon for internal corrosion and document any internal corrosion found.
Retain records of hot tap training for all Company personnel. Retain contractor
qualification evidence in the project files for the project duration.
4. References
• ES 8312, Design and Installation of Hot Taps and Stopples
• ES 8700, Drafting and Surveying Series, As-Built Documentation
• PPL-205D, Acetylene or Dresser Coupled Pipelines
• CFR 192.627, Tapping Pipelines Under Pressure

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Repair and Maintenance – Plastic Pipe
Doc. # PPL-204D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes requirements for developing procedures for maintaining, repairing and
mechanically coupling plastic pipelines.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Design and install plastic pipeline systems per the following standards:
• Engineering Standard 0110.
• Heat fusion of polyethylene pipe shall comply with Engineering Standard 7550.
• Jointer and Inspector qualifications for heat fusion of polyethylene shall comply with
Engineering Standards 7560 and 7565, respectively.
3.2 Considerations
Permanent repairs shall be allowed on non-pressurized pipelines.
Only temporary repairs shall be allowed on pressurized pipelines.
Evaluate damage to plastic pipe and fittings per Engineering Standard 0110.
The use of mechanical couplings is restricted to the replacement of damaged sections of
plastic pipe. Mechanical couplings shall conform to ASTM D 1248 as Type III or IV,
Class C, Category 5, Grade 34.
Install mechanical couplings according to the manufacturer's recommendations.
Store and handle plastic pipe per Engineering Standard 0110.
These static charges present a hazard during hot-tapping, purging and tie-in operations
because they are potential sources of ignition if a gas-air mixture is present.
Static electrical charges are developed by friction on the surface of plastic pipe in two
ways:
• By physical handling of the pipe in storage, shipping, and installation
• By the flow of gas containing dust, rust, scale, or dirt particles
Limitations on Use
The following are some of the limitations on the use of plastic pipe:
• Plastic pipe shall not be permanently installed above ground without proper
protection and authorization.
• Plastic pipe shall not be installed in basements
• Plastic pipe shall not be permanently installed in locations where it is exposed to
sunlight.
• Plastic pipe shall not be installed in areas contaminated with gasoline or other
hydrocarbons.
• Plastic pipe shall not be connected directly to steel valves.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # PPL-204D

• Plastic pipe is limited to operating temperatures from 20 ºF to 120 ºF. Avoid placing
it near sources of heat. Pipe coatings or coverings that require heat cannot be used at
points where there is a transition from plastic to steel.
• Plastic pipe shall not be installed under a railroad track unless it is placed inside
another larger diameter pipe or jacket.
Control of Static Electricity
Remove possible static charges by wiping the entire outer surface of all plastic piping and
fittings in the work area with an absorbent cotton cloth saturated with a water and liquid
dishwashing detergent solution. While wiping the piping or fittings, drape a cloth on the
ground to drain the collected charge.
Type of Repair
Damaged fittings shall be replaced as a unit; for example, a section of pipe along with the
damaged fitting shall be removed and replaced with a new section of piping and fitting.
Damaged pipe shall be repaired or replaced in accordance with the following instructions:
• If the longitudinal extent of damage is less than one-half the distance between seals of
the repair sleeve (such as Rockwell Style 258), a sleeve may be used.
• If the longitudinal extent of damage is greater than one-half the distance between the
seals, a new section of plastic pipe must be installed.
• Whenever a mechanical coupling or repair sleeve is installed it shall be cathodically
protected with a magnesium anode when applicable. Determine anode weight by
milliampere drain or soil resistivity methods.
Closing with a Clamp
All plastic referred to in this procedure shall be steel pipe size (IPS) unless it is specified
as copper pipe size (CTS).
When possible, excavate in an area separate from where the plastic pipe is broken in
order to minimize the danger of an electrical discharge at the site of the gas leak. When a
separate excavation cannot be made, eliminate the danger of electrical discharges using
the method described above in “Control of Static Electricity”.
Insure that the clamp is free of damage.
Insure the clamp used corresponds to the diameter of the plastic pipe according to the
following table:
For Squeezing Pipe With Minimum Diameter of the Clamp
a Diameter of:
½” CTS 1”
½”-3/4” IPS 1”
1”-2” 1 ¼”
3”-6” 1 ½”
If the clamp is adjustable, insure it is adjusted for the specific pipe size. If it cannot be
adjusted to provide a minimum clearance or “gap”, use the following table to determine a
minimum gap.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # PPL-204D

Minimum “Gap” Between
Nominal Pipe Size Bars of Clamp
½" CTS (SDR11) 0.135”
½" IPS (SDR11) 0.155”
¾" IPS (SDR11) 0.160”
1" IPS (SDR11) 0.200”
1 1/4" (SDR11) 0.270”
11/2" (SDR11) 0.280”
2 " IPS (SDR11) 0.340”
3" IPS (SDR11.5) 0.475”
4" IPS (SDR11.5) 0.610”
The following steps address the clamp and repair of plastic piping:
• Place the clamp at least 3 pipe diameters from the nearest fitting or if there is a break,
at least 2 feet from the damaged part.
• Place the clamp on the pipe in a position which shall allow you to squeeze the pipe
freely without striking the guide rods.
• Squeeze or flatten the pipe until the flow of gas has been completely closed off. If the
pipe is damaged by closing it, repair the damaged section.
• Squeeze the pipe by bringing the bars of the clamp as close together as possible,
making sure that the minimum clearance or “gap” is maintained.
• To re-establish service, loosen the bars of the clamp slowly and remove the clamp.
• Visually inspect the pipe in the area where is was squeezed. Be sure that the pipe is
free of defects.
• Repair any damage that could affect the serviceability of the pipe.
Location Wire
Install a continuous wire (No. 14 or larger copper wire ) on plastic services and mains.
The main line wire or tape shall be connected to each branch line wire or tape at the
branches. When the plastic pipe ends and steel pipe begins, then the wire or tape shall be
connected to the steel pipe. The wire shall be terminated by welding it to the steel pipe or
to a riser which is protected by an anode. The wire shall not be terminated by tying into
the plastic pipe.
If the locating wire has been severed, make repairs by using crimp or bolt style
connectors or the use of rosin core solder. Wrap or coat the connection to prevent
corrosion.
Prior to backfilling, test the integrity of the location wire by hooking up pipe locating
equipment and locate the pipe within 100 feet of the damaged area. This is especially
important if the plastic pipe has been stretched.
Backfilling
Provide a firm support under the exposed pipe prior to backfilling by using either manual
or mechanical tamping techniques. Backfill material shall be free of all rocks, clumps or
hard soil and any trash or rubbish items.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # PPL-204D
Post Installation Maintenance

Plastic pipe that has been exposed due to loss of cover shall be either provided with
adequate cover or lowered as soon as possible to prevent degradation caused by
ultraviolet light and/or elevated temperatures.
Monitor the settlement around newly installed valve settings or newly repaired areas for
settlement that might cause higher than normal stresses on mechanical couplings or
plastic to steel transitions. If settlement occurs, excavate the area and provide firm
support.
3.4 Records
Retain pipe inspection, leak survey and action reports for the life of the facility.
4. References

• CFR 192.273, Joining of Material Other Than Welding – General
• CFR 192.281, Plastic Pipe
• CFR 192.283, Plastic Pipe: Qualifying Joining Procedures
• CFR 192.285, Plastic Pipe: Qualifying Persons to Make Joints
• CFR 192.287, Plastic Pipe: Inspection of Joints

• ES 0110, Design and Installation Guidelines for Plastic Pipe
• ES 7550, Heat Fusion Procedures For Polyethylene Pipe
• ES 7560, Jointer Qualifications for Heat Fusion of Polyethylene Pipe
• ES 7565, Inspector Qualifications For Heat Fusion of Polyethylene Pipe

• ASME B31.8, 842.39, Plastic Pipe and Tubing Joints and Connections
• ASME B31.8, 842.392, Joint Requirements
• ASME B31.8, 842.42, Inspection and Handling Provisions

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Acetylene or Dresser Coupled Pipelines
Doc. # PPL-205D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for developing procedures for when maintenance or
construction work is performed on Dresser coupled or acetylene welded pipelines.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Extra precautions must be taken to safeguard life and property when work is performed
on pressurized Dresser coupled or acetylene welded pipelines.
3.2 Considerations
This guideline applies to any pipeline originally installed with Dresser couplings or
acetylene welds regardless of the quantity. Where safety is dependent on the existence of
previously installed joint reinforcement, no work shall be initiated until the existence of
this reinforcement is verified by its exposure.
The stability of the soil is an overriding factor for safe exposure of a pipe under pressure
or for developing adequate anchoring capacity in an anchor block.
Location of Excavation Activity
Look for factors that may cause instability such as water saturated soil or the water table
in contact with the pipeline. Whenever the kind of activity planned makes it possible,
select another location where firm soil exists if the soil in the area under consideration is
found unstable.
Location of Joints and Determination of Geometry of Pressurized Lines
If soil is found to be stable, limit the pressure of the line as specified in Guideline PPL-
202D, “Operating Pressures and Limits Criteria”.
Determine by means of a prod, the approximate horizontal and vertical alignment of the
pipe within the limit of the intended work area. Excavate a side ditch as close as possible
to the pipe without removing the soil directly on top of it as shown in Attachment A,
Figure 1A. If it was determined that a horizontal bend exists, locate the side ditch at the
inner side of the bend as shown in Attachment A, Figure 1B.
Locate all unreinforced couplings or acetylene welds, determine the length of the pipe
joints and after exposing short sections of the side of the pipe, determine a more precise
horizontal and vertical alignment. Extend the ends of the side ditch beyond the proposed
excavation limits, as considered necessary, to obtain the pertinent information about the
line.
Backfill those sections of the side ditch where no other work is expected to take place.
Criteria for Location of Stopple Connections and Anchor Blocks (See Figure 4)
Stopples may be used on Dresser coupled or acetylene welded pipelines only when
continuous service is mandatory and there is no other way of maintaining service. In all
other cases, the pipeline must be blown down (reference Guideline PPL-203D, “Tapping
Pipelines”). Place stopples only in Class 1 locations and at least 500 feet from any
inhabited building.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # PPL-205D

When a bypass line is used in conjunction with stopples, install the bypass connections in
a separate bell hole, whenever possible, if the size of the bypass is 4" or larger.
Locate an anchor block at either side of the stopple connection.
Verify that any disturbed soil within the first 30 feet from the anchor block to the tie-in
point is recompacted to its original compaction level before the block is loaded.
Reference Engineering Standards 4802 and 4803 for details of anchor block size,
construction and concrete cure time.
Determine another location for the anchor block where adequate bearing capacity exists if
soil conditions in the proximity of the tie-in point are not satisfactory.
When an existing unanchored valve is used instead of a stopple to block the gas flow and
the valve is within 500 feet of the tie-in point, install an anchor block.
Reinforce the couplings using the same criteria recommended for a stopple connection.
Excavation on Top of a Coupled or Acetylene Welded Pipeline
If the soil within the limits of excavation is found unstable, take the following steps:
• Depressurize the pipeline before starting any excavation.
• Reinforce any exposed coupling or acetylene weld that is to remain (reference
Engineering Standard 8354).
• Follow the applicable criteria of “Criteria for Location of Stopple Connections and
Anchor Blocks” and “Common Tie-In Operations”.
If the soil is stable, take the following steps:
• Limit the line pressure before starting any activity in accordance with Guideline PPL-
202D, “Operating Pressures and Limits Criteria”.
• Limit the length of continuous exposed pipe to that necessary for reinforcing joints.
• Do not expose more than one unreinforced coupling or acetylene weld (adjacent to
each other) at a time, except for the installation of cathodic bonding cables where the
joint is only partially exposed.
• Reinforce any exposed coupling or acetylene weld that is to remain.
• Backfill, to the recommended compaction level, those areas of exposed pipe that shall
not be disturbed by further excavation.
• Follow the applicable criteria of “Criteria for Location of Stopple Connections and
Anchor Blocks” and “Common Tie-In Operations”.
Common Tie-In Operations
Non-pressurized Tie-in: New Pipe Less than 200 Feet without Offsets
An offset shall be determined to exist where the horizontal or vertical alignment of the
pipe changes and its angular rate of change in any 50 feet is greater than 1 degree. See
Attachment A, Figure 2.
For tie-in operations on non-pressurized lines less than 200 feet with no offsets, take the
following steps:
• Establish safe pressure level for excavating the pipeline
• Determine the location of the tie-in points
• Expose and reinforce any coupling or acetylene weld within the first 50 feet beyond
the tie-in points at both ends of the installation

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # PPL-205D

• Reinforce any coupling or acetylene weld to remain if it becomes exposed
• Depressurize line, if pressurized
• Excavate, expose and replace the section of pipe
• Pressurize the line after all backfill is in place
Non-pressurized Tie-in: New Pipe More than 200 Feet or Any Length if it Contains An
Offset
An offset shall be determined to exist where the horizontal or vertical alignment of the
pipe changes and its angular rate of change in any 50 feet is greater than 1 degree. See
Attachment A, Figure 3.
For tie-in operations on non-pressurized lines more than 200 feet, take the following
steps:
• Establish safe pressure for excavating the pipeline.
• After determining the location of tie-in points, determine the location of anchor
blocks according to the criteria established.
• Expose and reinforce the following:
a. Any coupling or acetylene weld between the location determined for the anchor
blocks and the tie-in points at both ends of the installation
b. Any coupling or acetylene weld within the first 50 feet beyond the anchor blocks
at both ends of the installation
• Reinforce any coupling or acetylene weld to remain if it becomes exposed.
• Excavate and cast anchor blocks.
• Depressurize line, if pressurized.
• Excavate, expose and replace section of pipe.
• Backfill all openings. If any soil has been disturbed within the first 30 feet from the
anchor blocks to the tie-in points, it must be recompacted to its original compaction
level.
• Pressurize the line after the recommended curing period for anchor blocks.
Pressurized Tie-ins with or without Bypass
• Establish safe pressure for excavating the pipeline.
• After determining the location of tie-in points, determine the location of stopple
connections and anchor blocks according to the criteria established.
• Expose and reinforce the following:
a. Any coupling or acetylene weld between the location determined for the anchor
blocks and the tie-in points at both ends of the installation.
b. Any coupling or acetylene weld within the first 100 feet of the stopple connection
excavation at both ends of the installation.
• Excavate and cast anchor blocks.
• Excavate, expose pipe and install stopple fittings.
• If any soil has been disturbed within the first 30 feet from the anchor blocks to the tie-
in point, it must be recompacted to its original compaction level.
• Backfill and compact to the original compaction level of the bell hole for the stopple
fitting up to the centerline of pipe.
• Backfill without compacting any other areas of exposed pipe where no further activity
is expected to take place as shown in Attachment A, Figure 4.
• Insert the stopple plug only after the anchor block has been properly cured.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # PPL-205D
4. References
• PPL-202D, Operating Pressures - Limit Criteria
• PPL-203D, Tapping Pipelines
• ES 4802, Concrete Anchor Block Type A Installation Details
• ES 4803, Concrete Anchor Block Type A Fabrication Details
• ES 8354, Full Encirclement Repair and Reinforcement Sleeves
4.3 Attachments
• Attachment A, Couplings (Excavated and Backfilled)

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # PPL-205D
Attachment A
A B
Figure 1
Figure 2

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # PPL-205D
Attachment A
Figure 3
Figure 4

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Marking Pipelines
Doc. # PPL-301D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for developing procedures for the marking of
pipelines and associated facilities.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Procedures shall be developed and in place to ensure that buried lines are properly
marked and for the maintenance of the line markers.
3.2 Considerations
Buried and aboveground pipelines must be clearly marked with a warning sign
designating the product transported, the operator name and a telephone number where the
operator can be reached 24 hours a day.
Line markers shall be placed along the route of the mains in sufficient number to identify
the location of the buried pipe. Line markers will be placed at each public road crossing
and railroad crossings or wherever necessary to prevent damage and interference. Marks
shall be placed where above ground facilities is accessible to the public.
Line markers are not required for buried mains in Class 3 and 4 locations covered by a
damage prevention program. Line markers are not required offshore or at crossings of
under waterways.
Signs visible to the public shall be placed around compressor stations, pump stations and
breakout tanks. Included on the signs shall be the Company name and emergency
telephone numbers.
4. References
• PPL-501D, Patrol Program
• CFR 192.707, Line markers for mains and transmission lines
• ASME B31.8, 851.7, Pipeline Markers

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Establishing Maximum Allowable Pressure
Doc. # PPL-401D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for developing procedures for the determining the
maximum allowable operating pressure (MAOP) of each pipeline segment.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
The MAOP of each pipeline segment shall be determined and communicated to the
appropriate parties per Engineering Standards 0150 and 8702.
The MAOP of existing and new pipeline segments and facilities shall be determined and
documented based on an evaluation of the materials, tests, class locations, condition of
pipe and piping components. The MAOP of a section shall not exceed the lowest MAOP
component in the section. No person shall operate a jurisdictional pipeline segment at
internal pressures that exceed the established maximum allowable operating pressure for
that segment.
3.3 Records
Documentation procedures shall be developed and established to retain MAOP
determination information. This documentation shall be the official record. However,
this does not prevent the use of plat sheets, alignment sheets or historical data files as
secondary record sources. These records shall be retained for the life of the facility.
4. References
• ES 8702, Engineering Records - Maximum Allowable Operating Pressure
• CFR 195.406, Maximum Operating Pressure
• CFR 195.106, Internal Design Pressures
• CFR 195.104,Variations in Pressure
• ASME B31.8, 402.3, Allowable Stresses and Other Stress
• ASME B31.8, 402.2.5, Ratings – Consideration for Different Pressure Conditions
• ASME B31.8. 451.1, Operating Pressure

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Odorizing Gas
Doc. # PPL-402D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for the development of procedures for the odorization
of natural gas facilities, including but not limited to transmission and gathering pipelines.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Procedures and facilities shall be in place to odorize gas within distribution lines, Class 3
or 4 and within at least 50% of the line downstream from that location if it is Class 1 or 2.
Natural odorant or commercial odorant may be used.
3.2 Considerations
In the concentrations used, odorants are not harmful to persons, materials or pipe and
shall be such that the products of combustion are not toxic when breathed or
corrosive/harmful to materials the products of combustion come into contact with.
Odorants shall not be soluble in water to an extent greater than 2.5 parts to 100 parts by
weight.
Conduct periodic sampling and testing of gas requiring odorization to ensure the proper
concentration of odorant is present. Sample and test at least every twelve months.
Equipment shall be checked for proper operations at least once a month.
Record or verify as applicable, at least every three months, the following information for
all odorization equipment except farm tap odorizers.
3.4 Records
Retain the odorization records for at least 5 years and include the following information:
• Odorizer location
• Brand name and model of odorizer
• Name of odorant and is it concentrate or dilute
• Quantity of odorant at the start of the time period
• Amount of odorant added during the time period
• Quantity of odorant at the end of the time period
• Quantity of gas odorized during the time period
• Odorant injection rate during the time period
4. References
• ES 7160, Guideline for Odorization of Natural Gas in Pipelines
• CFR 192.625, Odorization of Gas

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Emergency Plans
Doc. # PPL-403D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for a written emergency plan to provide a pre-
planned response and method of operation in the event of a facility failure or other emergency.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
An emergency plan shall be developed to ensure that prompt response to emergencies is
made, prompt action is taken to protect people/property and safe/rapid restoration of
service is made to customers.
The emergency plan shall cover at least the following items:
• Receiving emergency calls and prompt notification of management, emergency
response teams and personnel.
• Prompt and effective response to emergency situations, including gas detected inside
or near a building, fire located near or directly involving a pipeline facility, an
explosion occurring near or directly involving a pipeline facility, a natural disaster,
service outage, significant gas leaks or ruptures on the pipeline system and the release
of hydrogen sulfide gas.
• Availability of personnel, equipment, tools and materials required at the scene of an
emergency.
Personnel shall be trained on proper emergency response. Periodic reviews of the plan
and refresher training shall be conducted.
3.3 Records
The written emergency plan shall be retained at each field location as well as in the
operations office. Documentation of personnel training and the results of any emergency
simulations conducted shall be retained for minimum of 5 years. Documentation of
periodic emergency plan reviews and revisions shall be retained for a minimum of 5
years. Documentation of the emergency plan in action, including details of the
emergency and actions taken shall be retained for a minimum of 5 years.
4. References
4.1 Enron Crisis Management Manual

• ADM-101D, Reporting and Investigation of Pipeline Incidents
• ADM-102D, Notification of Emergencies
• ADM-103D, Investigation of Accidents and Failures
• PPL-405D, Public Education Program
• CFR 192.615, Emergency Plans
• CFR 192.603 (b), Procedural Manual

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Emergency Plans
Doc. # PPL-403D

• ASME B31.8, 850.4, Essential Features of the Emergency Plan

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Public Education Program
Doc. # PPL-405D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for the development of a Company public education
program.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
The Company shall promote a program to provide customers, the public, appropriate
government organizations and persons engaged in excavation related activities, an
information source to assist in the location of underground pipelines and how to
recognize and report a pipeline emergency.
Each location that operates gas pipeline facilities, such as piping, measurement stations,
and compression, shall carry out a public education program. The program shall be
continuously monitored to determine its effectiveness and any areas for improvement.
Revisions shall be made accordingly in order to maintain a high level of public
awareness.
The program shall be carried out in English as well as the dominant language of the area.
3.3 Records
Public education efforts shall be documented and retained with the Operator.
4. References
• ES 0070, Gathering Line Determination
• CFR 192.614(b)(2), Damage Prevention Program
• CFR 192.615(c), Emergency Plans
• CFR 192.616, Public Education
• ASME B31.8, 850.43, Liaison
• ASME B31.8, 850.44, Educational Program

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Continuing Surveillance
Doc. # PPL-406D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for the continuing surveillance of the pipeline in
order to identify segments requiring evaluation and remediation.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Conduct periodic on-site inspections of pipeline facilities. In addition, monitor records
developed in the operation and maintenance of the pipeline to identify line segments that
may be in unsatisfactory condition or operating at an inappropriate stress level for the
environment in which they are located. The records to be monitored shall include, but
not necessarily limited to the following:
• Patrol records
• Class Location Survey records
• Pipeline inspection records
• Repair records
• Test records
• Corrosion control records
• Pipeline historical records
Surveillance of Unprotected Pipe
Reevaluate non-critical segments on unprotected pipelines at intervals not exceeding 3
years (36 months) to determine if active corrosion exists. Include a review of the records
listed above in the reevaluation. Pay particular attention to the following:
• The possibility that such factors as a new building or road construction can cause a
non-critical segment to become a critical segment
• Corrosion control factors such as the leak history and installation and replacement of
anodes at hot spots.
• Reference Guideline COR-103D, “External Protective Coating and Cathodic
Protection”, for cathodic protection requirements and the definition for active
corrosion.
• Reference Guideline COR-407D, “Gas Leak Detection Survey”, for definitions of
critical and noncritical segments.
• Take immediate action if a condition is detected that can be a hazard to property or
persons in the area. Advise Management of the conditions, the actions taken and the
proposed future actions to resolve the condition.
Frequency of Surveillance
Initiate, through routine actions, a program to recondition, replace or abandon any line
segment found to be in unsatisfactory condition. See Engineering Standard 0200 for
reconditioning guidelines. Reduce the maximum allowable operating pressure, if no
immediate plans to recondition or phase out the segment are made. Unprotected pipeline
segments that require protection after reevaluation must be placed under protection
within 12 months.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Continuing Surveillance
Doc. # PPL-406D
3.3 Records
All surveillance records, findings and actions taken shall be documented and retained for
the life of the facility.
4. References
• CFR 192.465(e), External Corrosion Control: Monitoring
• CFR 192.613, Continuing Surveillance
• ES 0200, Philosophy for Reconditioning Pipelines
• ES 8709, Pipeline Historical Database (PHD) Report Instructions
• COR-301D, Record Maps
• PPL-101D, Class Location
• ASME B31.8, 851.1, Continuing Surveillance of Pipelines

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Gas Leak Detection Survey
Doc. # PPL-407D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for the development of procedures for the conducting
gas leak detection surveys.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Definitions
A Gas Leak Detection Survey is a survey conducted utilizing leak detector equipment to
detect methane or combustible gas.
Facilities means any gas containing facility, including town border or city gate stations.
Detectors are instruments that display gas concentration in part per million (PPM).
Maintain the regular and scheduled calibration of detection equipment, following the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
3.2 Considerations
On facilities under vacuum, using instruments to detect oxygen or other foreign gas
entering the pipeline is satisfactory. Increased frequency shall be scheduled if the leak
history warrants.
Conducting Periodic Inspections
When performing "Gas Leak Detection Surveys" at casings on cathodically protected
pipelines, check for gas at the casing vents or above each casing end if no vents are
present.
At uncased road crossings of cathodically protected pipelines, check for gas across the
entire right-of-way.
At cased or uncased road and railroad crossings of unprotected pipelines, check for gas
along the critical length as established by the following outline.
• Check all casing vents or casing ends within this critical area.
• Establish test points for uncased pipelines crossing under concrete or asphalt surfaces,
which extend 50' or more on each side of the pipeline, as follows:
a. If practical, install automatic sealing test holes whenever new construction
results in a concrete or asphalt surface extending more than 100 feet along an
unodorized pipeline.
b. Install holes equidistant apart with a maximum distance of 100 feet between test
points (0).
Example: 125′′ Long Surface
Test
Test Hole Test

Point 0 62.5′ 0 62.5′ 0 Point

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # PPL-407D

c. On existing installations, check for gas at surface joints or cracks over or
adjacent to the pipeline in lieu of installing test holes.
When a pipeline is under and parallel to a concrete or asphalt road or highway pavement
or less than 50' from the edge of other concrete or asphalt surfaces, conduct surveys along
the nearest pavement or surface edge instead of installing test holes.
If personnel safety allows, also check for gas at joints and cracks immediately over the
pipeline.
When a pipeline is under a hard surface that adjoins a building, use leak detection
equipment at all joints and cracks between the pipeline and the building.
Determining Critical Areas on Unprotected Pipe
Unprotected pipelines are divided into two categories according to the following criteria.
Refer to the frequency table in Section 2.4.
• Critical segments on unprotected pipelines are in Class 2, 3 or 4 locations or in Class
1 location and meeting one of the following criteria:
a. Within a corridor at each hard surfaced road (concrete or asphalt) or railroad,
whose limits are 10D feet (D is nominal diameter in inches) outside of and
parallel to the right-of-way lines. For example, if a 12" pipeline makes a crossing
90 degrees to a 66' right-of-way, the critical segment length is 66'+(2x10x12)=
306 feet.
b. Within a given distance of a building intended for human occupancy or an outside
area where people periodically meet or that is open to public use. Reference
Appendix A of this Guideline for determination of distances for various pipe
diameters.
c. Warrant survey in the judgment of the location based upon operating history. In
determining these segments, consideration may include line size, operating
pressure, line function and projected pipeline life. These segments typically have
a higher rate of recent leaks or identification of anodic areas during electrical
surveys than the average for a pipeline in that given geographic area.
• Noncritical segments are those in Class 1 locations not included above.
Frequency of Conducting Leak Detection Surveys
Conduct Gas Leak Detection Surveys on gas pipelines per the frequency table included in
this guideline.
On odorized pipelines (refer to Guideline PPL-402D, “Odorizing Gas”) it is only
necessary to monitor shorted casings.
Perform "Gas Leak Detection Surveys" during frost-free and low-velocity wind
conditions to insure valid surveys.
Pipeline leak surveys do not need to be conducted, nor leak survey records maintained,
on portions of the system that have been abandoned or deactivated by cutting, purging or
evacuating, or capping.
3.4 Records
Document survey information including, but not limited to, the beginning and ending
mile post for each partial segment surveyed, the date, person conducting the survey,
findings, actions to be taken and results of the actions taken.
When a pipeline is exposed or a leak is confirmed or repaired, document the inspection
and any repair activity.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # PPL-407D
3.4 Records (Continued)

Retain all survey related records for five years or until the next survey is completed,
whichever is longer.
GAS LEAK DETECTION SURVEY FREQUENCY TABLE
Survey Frequency
Cathodically Protected Unprotected
Facility Coated Bare Bare/Hot Spot
A. Class 1 location - all facilities except E. & F.
1) Transmission and
Jurisdictional Gathering
a) Critical segments, see NOT APPLICABLE 3 Yrs.
GENERAL: 1.4.5., excluding
road and railroad crossings.
b) Shorted casings. 2 Yrs. 1 Yr. 1 Yr.
c) Nonshorted casings. 5 Yrs. 5 Yrs. 3 Yrs.
d) Uncased concrete or None 5 Yrs. 3 Yrs.
asphalt roads.
e) All not included in a) None 10 Yrs. 9 Yrs.
through d) above.
2) Nonjurisdictional, gathering Each calendar year not to exceed
lines where internal corrosion 15 months.
is not being effectively
controlled based upon leak history.
B. Class 2 locations - all facilities except E. & F.
1) Shorted casings. 2 Yrs. 1 Yr. 1 Yr.
2) Nonshorted casings. 5 Yrs. 3 Yrs. 3 Yrs.
3) All not included in 1) & 2) above. 10 Yrs. 5 Yrs. 3 Yrs.
C. Class 3 locations - all facilities Two (2) times each calendar year at
except E. & F. intervals not exceeding 7-1/2 months.
D. Class 4 locations - all facilities Four (4) times each calendar year at
except E. & F. intervals not exceeding 4-1/2 months.
E. Plant Yard Piping
A plant in this instance means a Each calendar year not to exceed
facility such as a compressor station, 15 months.
dehydration plant, liquid extraction
plant, or gas treating plant that are
manned or is considered operationally
significant by the location Team.
F. All Locations-All Facilities See Procedure PPL-102 and
After blasting Engineering Standard 7155
Note: When a frequency above is stated in years, 1 Year means 1 calendar year or 12 months, not to exceed 15 months.
Two years and up means two calendar years or 24 months not to exceed 30 months.
4. References
• PPl-402D, Odorization of Gas

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # PPL-407D

• ES 7155, Allowable Blasting Near Buried Pipelines
• CFR 192.706, Transmissin Lines: Leakage Surveys.
• CFR 192.723, Distribution Systems: Leak Surveys
• CFR 192.605(b), Procedural Manuals for Operations, Maintenance and Emergencies
• CFR 192.603(b), General Provisions, Records

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # PPL-407D
Examples for using the graph in Appendix A.
Unprotected Pipeline Gas Leak Detection Survey Requirements
1. A 10” pipeline is normally operating at 250 psig. How close must a structure be to the pipeline
before the pipeline is considered to have a critical segment and a Gas Leak Detection Survey is
required on a 3-year cycle? Refer to the graph included in Appendix A.
a. Enter the chart on the nominal pipe diameter axis, 10” and project a vertical line to the
intersection of the normal operating pressures. (Because operating pressures are shown in
100-psi increments above 50 psig, you shall need to interpolate or estimate the 250 psig
operating pressure between the plotted lines for 200 and 300 psig.)
b. From this point, project a horizontal line to the left (vertical) axis and read approximately 200
feet. This distance establishes the dividing line on how close a structure needs to be to the
pipeline before the pipeline is considered to have a “critical segment”. Structures closer than
200 feet shall result in a segment of line being surveyed every 3 years.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # PPL-407D
2. If a structure is located 100 feet from the pipeline noted in example 1 above, how much pipeline
must be surveyed? Refer to the graph included in Appendix A.
a. As already determined in example 1 above, 200 feet establishes the break point for surveying.
b. By drawing a semicircle from this point on the vertical axis or estimating where it shall be
based upon the curves that are shown, a relationship is established between the distance from
the pipeline to the structure and the survey distance.
c. In this example, enter the vertical axis at 100 feet and project a horizontal line to the point of
intersection with the 200 feet semi-circle.
d. Project a line downward to the low scale, titled “Total Survey Distance”, and read
approximately 350 feet for the total survey distance. As noted, this is the total survey
distance.
e. The survey shall be 350/2=175feet on either side of the perpendicular projection of the
structure onto the pipeline.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Abandoning Facilities
Doc. # PPL-408D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for developing procedures for the abandonment of
pipeline facilities and all inactive facilities.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Pressurized pipelines that are maintained in accordance with the Operating Guidelines are
not considered inactive even though there is no flow through the pipeline.
Deactivation or Abandonment of Gas Lines
Facilities abandoned under this guideline shall be disconnected and isolated from all
sources of supply by a physical barrier. Pipeline facilities shall be purged of all
combustible material and sealed by a welded plate.
Inactive Facilities
Inactive facilities, those which have ceased operation, but may be returned to service in
the future, shall be protected by cathodic protection, remain filled and pressurized above
atmospheric pressure. Lines not in service or have been abandoned will be considered
dangerous unless proved otherwise.
Pipeline Facilities
Physically remove all abandoned facilities, if practical. If this is not feasible, sever below
grade and remove all above ground piping and equipment. When "pits" or vaults are
abandoned, the vault shall be filled with earth and compacted. Any abandoned pipe that
remains will be separated from the distribution system, purged and its ends plugged.
When a regulator station is removed, all equipment will be removed.
3.3 Records
Documentation of activity shall include the location, a description of the facility, the type
of service, the type of abandonment, the purging fluid and a brief explanation of the
procedure followed.
4. References
• ES 0190, Disposition of Non-Operational Pipeline Facilities
• ES 8706, Engineering Drawings and Records - As-Built Data for Transmission and
Non-Rural Gathering Facilities
• ES 8707, Engineering Drawings and Records - As-Built Data for Rural Gathering
Pipelines
• CFR 192.727, Abandonment or Deactivation of Facilities

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Blowdown and Purging Safety
Doc. # PPL-409D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for developing procedures for identifying obstruction
blow-offs and establishes safety practices to follow when purging or blowing down gas facilities.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Procedures shall be in place to prepare a plan, identify potential hazards, notify local
authorities, notify customers affected and the surrounding community, monitor and
control pressure, monitor gas exhaust and move personnel and vehicles if affected.
3.2 Considerations
Establish procedures to document activities and estimated gas lose due to purging.
Prior to blowing down or purging a gas facility, precautions shall be taken for the safety
of the personnel and the surrounding community
4. References
• PPL-404D, Pipeline Purging Methods
• PPL-410D, Air Movers
• ES 4880, Guidelines for Sizing and Avoidance of Overhead Hazards for Blowoffs
• CFR 192.751, Prevention of Accidental Ignition
• ASME B31.8, 850.6, Prevention of Accidental Ignition

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Air Movers
Doc. # PPL-410D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for developing procedures for safety practices when
using pipeline air movers to purge gas from pipelines in conjunction with cutting and welding.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Pipeline air movers are intended to improve the safety of welding and cutting on
pipelines by using a positive air purge of the pipeline thus providing a non-
flammable/combustible welding atmosphere.
3.2 Considerations
Air movers shall be used whenever possible. They can be positioned both up and down
stream of the welding site or positioned such that one air mover moves air past the work-
site from a dead end. Certain precautions must be observed to ensure that the use of air
movers enhances the safety of the situation.
Hot tie-ins are acceptable if they provide a safer operation.
When air movers are used, cutting and welding is limited to the following:
• Cutting of access holes only in preparation of air mover use after precautions have
been taken to ensure there is no explosion/fire hazard.
• Cutting or welding after the air movers are in operation and it has been established
that an explosive mixture is not present.
4. References
• PPL-404D, Pipeline Purging Methods
• PPL-409D, Blowdown and Purging Safety
• CFR 192.751, Prevention of Accidental Ignition
• ASME B31.8, 850.6, Prevention of Accidental Ignition

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Uprating Maximum Allowable Operating Pressure
Doc. # PPL-411D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for developing procedures for identifying the
necessary actions and approvals required before the Maximum Allowable Operating Pressure
(MAOP) of any piping segment is uprated.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
A procedure shall be developed to ensure that all steps are followed in uprating the
MAOP of a pipe segment in excess of the previously established MAOP.
3.2 Considerations
The original design, pipe specifications, operating and maintenance history and previous
tests shall be reviewed in the procedure
Procedures shall be established detailing the actions and approvals required for uprating
the MAOP of any pipeline segment or system.
Any repairs or replacements of pipeline facilities shall be made to ensure safe operations.
The appropriate strength tests shall then be conducted.
3.4 Records
Documentation shall include conclusions from the historical evaluation, details of any
repairs or equipment replacements made and the test results.
4. References
• PPL-401D, Maximum Allowable Operating Pressure
• ES 0162, Notification of Construction, State Pipeline Safety Agencies
• ES 8702, Engineering Records - Maximum Allowable Operating Pressure
• CFR 192 Subpart K, Uprating
• ASME, Guide for Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping Systems

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Abnormal Operations
Doc. # PPL-413D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for developing procedures for responding to,
investigating, correcting and documenting abnormal operations.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Procedures shall be developed and in place for the documenting of abnormal operations,
whether received from an outside third party or operating personnel.
3.2 Considerations
Abnormal operations shall include, but not limited to, the following:
• Exceeding Maximum Allowable Operating Pressure (MAOP)
• Significant decreases in pressure below normal operating limits
• Unintended opening or closing of valves
• Operation of the Emergency Shutdown (ESD) System
• Significant unscheduled increases or decreases in flow rates outside of the normal
operating limits
• Significant loss of DAS communication
• Any component malfunction from normal operation
• Personnel error that may be considered a hazard to either people or property
Detailed site-specific procedures shall be developed and in place for the safe control of
abnormal operations, whether the procedures are developed by an outside third party,
operating personnel or Gas Control.
3.3 Records
Documentation shall include details of the condition and the name and telephone number
of the person reporting the condition. Include the company personnel notified to correct
the situation and the action taken. Documentation shall be retained for three years.
4. References
• ADM-108D, Procedure Review Requirements
• CFR 192.605(c), Procedural Manual for Operations, Maintenance and Emergencies

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Pipeline Startup and Shutdown
Doc. # PPL-414D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for the development of site-specific procedures for
pipeline start-up and shutdown activities to ensure proper operating and pressure ranges.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
A written plan shall be developed outlining the proper series of steps taken for start-up or
shutdown of pipeline facilities. All personnel shall be trained on this plan. Periodic
reviews of the plan shall be made to ensure continued effectiveness. A review shall be
conducted whenever changes to piping or equipment are made. The plan shall be revised
as necessary.
Prior to pressurizing or depressurizing a pipeline segment, determine if the action will
result in pressures over the established MAOP. If it determined that the pressure will
exceed MAOP, actions shall be taken to maintain the segment below MAOP. Review the
plan with all the personnel involved prior to making any pressure changes.
3.3 Records
Establish a file for retaining records of pipeline start-up and shutdown activities at each
applicable location. Document each occurrence when a pipeline segment exceeds
MAOP. Retain a copy of the written plan and any other documentation for three years.
4. References
• CFR 192.605(b)(5), Procedural Manuals for Opertaions, Maintenance, and
Emergencies

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Reinstatement of Service
Doc. # PPL-415D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for the development of procedures for the
reinstatement of previously abandoned gas lines.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Detailed site-specific procedures shall include complete information to ensure the safe
and efficient reactivation of pipelines and all related equipment and facilities.
Test Requirements
Reactivated mains are subject to the same test requirements as a new line, prior to
returning to service. Tests are performed on the entire section starting at the point of
disconnection.
Steel or cast iron mains deactivated by cutting, purging or evacuating and capping that
have not been maintained per all the requirements shall not be reactivated unless replaced
or recertified.
3.3 Records
Documentation from pressure tests must be retained for as long as the line is in service.
4. References
• CFR 192.725, Tests Requirements for Reinstating Service Lines

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Patrol Program
Doc. # PPL-501D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes requirements for the development of procedures for the pipeline patrol
program.
2. Scope
This Guideline applies to all “Company” operated facilities, its employees and its contractors
except where superseded by more stringent local standards
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Site-specific procedures and “Patrol Program” shall be developed to ensure the safe and
efficient operations of pipeline right-of-way.
3.2 Considerations
Pipeline Patrol
A patrol program shall be in place to observe surface conditions on and adjacent to the
pipeline right-of-way. Indications of construction activity, erosion, exposed pipe, leaks or
other factors that could adversely affect the safety and operation of the pipeline shall be
check regularly. Patrols may be aerial, ground or a combination. Frequency of pipeline
patrols varies with type and class location as per the table below.
Class/Location At Highway * and Railroad Crossings At All Other Places

1&2 Twice each calendar year with intervals
Once each calendar year
not exceeding 7 1/2 months with intervals not
exceeding 15 months.
3 Four times each calendar year with Twice each calendar year
intervals not exceeding 4 1/2 months with intervals not
exceeding 7 1/2 months
4 Four times each calendar year with Four times each calendar
intervals not exceeding 4 1/2 months year with intervals not
exceeding 4 1/2 months.
* Highway is defined as any public road surfaced with concrete or asphalt paving.
Leak Survey
Leak surveys shall be conducted at regular intervals not to exceed 15 months, but at least
once each calendar year. For transmission lines transporting odor free gas leakage
surveys shall be conducted as follows:
• Class 3 locations at intervals not exceeding 7.5 months, but at least twice each
calendar year.
• Class 4 locations at intervals not exceeding 4.5 months, but at least four times each
calendar year.
3.4 Records
Documentation of patrols shall include date, location and personnel responsible for
patrol, results, recommended action, personnel responsible to correct problem, date action
taken and description of action taken. Retain records for five years or until the next
patrol, survey, inspection or test, whichever is longer.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Patrol Program
Doc. # PPL-501D
4. References
• PPL-101D, Class Location
• PPL-408D, Abandoning Facilities
• CFR 192.705, Transmission lines: Patrolling
• CFR 192.706, Transmission lines: Leakage surveys
• CFR 192.709, Transmission lines: Recordkeeping
• ASME B31.8, 851.2, Pipeline Patrolling
• ASME B31.8, 851.3, Leakage Surveys

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Waterway Crossings
Doc. # PPL-502D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for the development of site specific procedures for
the inspection of pipeline bridges and submerged crossing or spans of waterways.
2. Scope
This guideline applies to all "Company" operated facilities, its employees and its contractors
except where it is superseded by more stringent local standards.
3. Guideline
3.1 General
All pipeline bridge structures and submerged or span waterway crossings shall be
periodically inspected in detail to ensure safety and operational continuity.
Annually, with intervals not exceeding 15 months, inspect each pipeline bridge to ensure
proper support for the pipeline and to confirm that no deterioration of the pipeline or
structure has taken place.
At intervals not to exceed ten years, qualified personnel shall review the condition of all
major suspension bridges.
Inspect the surface conditions adjacent to each submerged waterway crossing or pipeline
span annually, with intervals not exceeding 15 months, to detect bank erosion or other
environmental change that might indicate damage or loss of cover to the pipeline. Make
additional inspections if floods or waterway channel changes have occurred.
Perform channel elevation surveys of submerged waterway crossings as necessary
considering channel changes, water flow past history, flooding or other factors that may
indicate potential loss of pipeline cover.
3.3 Records
Retain the results of all surveys, inspections or outside consultant investigations for the
life of the facility involved.
4. References
• COR-101D, Examination of Aboveground Facilities
• PPL-301D, Marking Pipelines
• CFR 192.705, Transmission Lines: Patrolling
• ASME B31.8, 851.2, Pipeline Patrolling

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Testing Requirements – Steel Pipe
Doc. # PPL-701D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the test requirements for developing site specific procedures for all
piping installations and repairs.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
All facilities require leak and/or strength testing before being placed in service, regardless
of whether they are temporary, permanent, new or the relocation of a facility previously
in service.
Non-destructive testing of weldments is required when specific criteria are met.
Variables include such things as pipe size, design stress level and number of welds.
4. References

• ES 8100, General Requirements for Pressure Testing
• ES 8155, Nondestructive Testing and Inspection, All Transmission Nonrural
Gathering Facilities
• ES 8156, Nondestructive Testing and Inspection, Rural Gathering Facilities
• ES 8176, Welding Inspector's Duties Visual Weld Requirements
• CFR 192.241, Inspection and testing of welds
• CFR 192.243, Nondestructive testing
• CFR 192.501-517, Subpart J – Test requirements
• CFR 192.719, Transmission lines: Testing of repairs
• ASME B31.8, 826.1, Inspection of Welds on Piping Systems Intended to Operate at
Less Than 20% of the Specified Minimum Yield Strength
• ASME B31.8, 826.2, Inspection and Tests for Quality Control of Welds on Piping
Systems Intended to Operate at 20% or More of the Specified Minimum Yield
Strength
• ASME B31.8, 841.31-841.326, Testing
• ASME B31.8, 851.5 Testing Repairs to Steel Pipelines or Mains Operating at Hoop
Stress Levels at or Above 40% of the Specified Minimum Yield Strength
• ASME B31.8, 851.51, Testing of Replacement Pipe Sections
• ASME B31.8, 851.52, Nondestructive Testing of Repairs, Gouges, Brooves, Dents
and Welds

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Testing Requirements – Plastic Pipe
Doc. # PPL-702D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for developing site specific procedures for pressure
testing of plastic pipe.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 Considerations
All plastic pipe shall be pressure tested. When a main or service line is installed, the new
section of pipe must be tested before making the tie-in.
Procedures
• End caps shall be utilized to seal pipe ends during the test.
• The tie-in joint(s) shall be soap tested at line pressure.
• When a short section (approximately 25 feet or less) is used in repairs, it must either
be tested at the time of installation or be a section from a pretested roll.
• All mains and service lines must be tested with compressed air, water or another inert
test medium to a pressure of at least 150% of the MAOP or 50 psig, whichever is
greater.
• Each roll of plastic pipe shall be tested with air before and after installation.
• The pre-installation test shall be performed for at least 15 minutes at 100 psig.
• Post-installation testing shall follow the guidelines stated above.
• Maximum pipe temperature during the test is 100° F (38 deg C) or the temperature
determined by the material manufacturer under a long-term hydrostatic test.
• Each service line taken out of service or temporarily disconnected from the main shall
be tested in the same manner as a new line before reinstatement of service.
3.3 Records
All pre-installation pressure tests performed on rolls of plastic pipe must be documented
with the factory lot number, date of receipt, testing date, diameter of the pipe, number of
feet tested and the results obtained with each test.
Tests of mains and service lines shall be documented and retained for the life of the
facility.
All pressure tests results must be permanently filed with the construction records.
4. References
4.1 Code of Federal Regulations
• CFR 192.513, Test Requirements for Plastic Pipelines
• ASME B31.8, 842.5. Testing Plastic Pipe Construction
• ASME B31.8, 850.2, Basic Requirements

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Cast Iron and Ductile Iron Pipelines
Doc. # PPL-703D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for developing site specific procedures for the
operation, maintenance and replacement of cast and ductile iron pipe.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 Considerations
Monitoring Requirements
Annually review leak repair records for all cast iron pipe.
When possible during repair of a cast iron pipe segment, remove a coupon or sample of
the pipe wall and test it for graphitization.
A graphitized cast iron pipe is one in which iron has been converted to corrosion
products, leaving graphite with the pipe seemingly intact. When graphitization occurs,
the strength of the cast iron pipe is reduced. Graphitization cannot always be determined
by field analysis. Field methods only provide a quick check of pipe condition.
Field methods include shall include the following:
• Determining if the pipe is soft by shaving the surface with a knife or blade.
• Tapping the pipe lightly to determine if a dull sound is produced.
If any activity occurs, such as construction, earth movement or excavations which may
disturb the pipeline, perform a leak survey to ensure that the pipeline is in tact.
Ensure the pipeline is supported, protected and monitored as necessary to prevent damage
and ensure safe operation.
Replacement
If the pipe wall exhibits graphitization (carbon content greater than 11%) replace the
segment with steel or plastic piping.
If the leak history shows a large concentration of leaks, the pipe segment shall be
replaced with steel or plastic piping.
If activity such as vibration, demolition or construction occurs across, parallel to, under
or near the pipe, replacement of the pipe should be considered as follows:
• If a parallel excavation is made and is close enough to cause more than half the pipe
diameter to lie within the zone of possible soil movement.
• Do not attempt to realign cast iron pipe if it is disturbed. Due to the mechanical
properties of cast iron pipe, uneven stress may result in a failure by a circumferential
break. If the pipe is misaligned replace it with steel or plastic pipe.
Periodically evaluate customer loads in order to determine if any section of cast iron pipe
shall be removed from service.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Cast Iron and Ductile Iron Pipelines
Doc. # PPL-703D

Consider replacing cast iron mains/service piping buried less than 24”/12” deep.
NOTE: The ability of cast iron pipe to withstand external loading decreases as
pipe size decreases.
Smaller diameter pipe is more susceptible to failure due to the lower beam strength.
3.3 Records
Investigation results, maintenance and repair work made on pipelines shall be
documented and retained for the life of the facility.
4. References
• CFR 192.489, Remedial Measures: Cast Iron and Ductile Iron Pipelines
• CFR 192.755, Protecting Cast Iron Pipelines
• ASME B31.8, 862.222, Corrective Measures

• ASME B31.8, 852.74, Cast iron Pipe Maintenance
• ASME B31.8, 850.3, Essential Features of an Operations and Maintenance Plan

Revision: 0
LDC Operating Guidelines
Issued: Nov-1999
Caulked Bell and Spigot Joints
Doc. # PPL-704D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for developing site specific procedures for the safe
utilization of caulked bell and spigot joints.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
Caulk bell and spigot joints subjected to 25 psig or more shall be sealed by a mechanical
leak clamp, material or device that permanently bonds but does not reduce the flexibility
of the joint.
If a caulk bell or spigot joint operating at pressures less than 25 psig is exposed, it shall
be sealed by a means other than caulking.
4. References
• CFR 192.753, Caulked Bell and Spigot Joints
4.2 American Society of Mechanical Engineering (ASME)
• ASME 31.8, 852.7, Cast Iron Pipe Maintenance

• ASME 31.8, 850.3, Essential Features of the Operating and Maintenance Plan

Revision: 0
LDC Operating Guidelines
Issued: Nov-1999
Pigging Program
Doc. # PPL-801D
1. Purpose
periodic internal sweeping of the lines to insure efficiency and prevent slugging of liquids.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
A program and procedures shall be developed for the internal cleaning of pipelines to
keep the lines free of liquids and help to prevent internal corrosion. Timing of the
program will be at the discretion of the individual Operating Company.
Reference the Enron Global Asset Operations Environmental Implementation Guidelines
for proper disposal of pipeline debris.
4. References

Revision: 0
Gas LDC Guidelines
Issued: Nov-1999
Gas Moisture Analysis and Monitor Calibration
Doc. # QC-101D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for developing site specific procedures for
determining the moisture content of natural gas at field locations.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Measurement of the moisture content of gas entering the transmission system is essential
for the following reasons:
• Contract compliance
• Monitoring of dehydration facilities
• Guiding operating personnel to prevent loss of customer service due to freezing
conditions caused by free water
• Determining the need for injection of inhibitors into the gas stream to prevent hydrate
formation and internal corrosion
3.2 Considerations
Testing
The following are accepted test methods and equipment for determining the moisture
content of natural gas:
• Continuous or spot monitoring by electrolytic type analysis
• Continuous monitoring using wet chemistry instrumentation
• Spot monitoring using reactive tubes
Moisture Limits
The allowable moisture content of all gas received shall be determined by contract limits,
local experience and/or management decision. The maximum moisture content of gas
processed by dehydration facilities shall not exceed tariff or contract limits.
Sampling Locations
Locations for moisture determination include mainline inputs from gathering systems or
plant residue gas, transportation interconnects, exchange points, discharge from all
dehydration units and others as required.
The following steps outline some of the considerations for moisture determination:
• Evaluate each potential location for its effect at saturated water input conditions, on
the total throughput of the system involved.
• Determine the method of monitoring needed (continuous or spot).
• Position moisture monitoring at strategic points on the system downstream of large
input volumes.
• Sample points may use automatic insertion type probes when on line pigging is used.
Spot tests at input points shall be taken as required. Unusual conditions or contract
provisions may require more frequent testing.

Revision: 0
Gas LDC Guidelines
Issued: Nov-1999
Gas Moisture Analysis and Monitor Calibration
Doc. # QC-101D
Installation
• Sample lines shall be 1/16" or 1/8" stainless steel tubing with heat tracing and
insulation.
• Sample lines shall be as short as possible. Refer to Guideline QC-102S, Gas Sample
Collection,
• Use a stainless steel sample probe inserted into the center 1/3 of the gas stream.
• Install the probe in a straight run of horizontal pipe.
• Avoid turbulent areas downstream of pipefittings and installations that involve
vertical piping runs.
Monitoring Equipment Test Procedure
On-line, test moisture monitor for accuracy every 12 months or more often if operating
conditions dictate.
Test for moisture using one of the following methods:
• Portable Moisture Generator
• Calibrated Moisture Monitor
• Reactive Tube
• Known Moisture Content Sample
Instrument moisture readings must be within plus or minus one lb. per MMSCF or 10%
of the calibration standard whichever is greater.
3.4 Records
Immediately report any moisture limit violations to Gas Control.
Maintain adequate documentation at the Location or Area/Region office.
4. References
4.1 Gas Pipeline Operating Guidelines
• QC-102D, Gas Sample Collection

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Gas Sample Collection
Doc. # QC-102
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for developing site specific procedures for collecting
natural gas samples for heat value determination and component analysis.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Samples must be as follows and representative of gas only:
• Sample must be in the gaseous phase only.
• Free/condensed liquids must be separated and removed prior to the filling of the
sample container.
• Samples containing liquids when readied for testing in the laboratory shall be
discarded and a resample requested.
• Laboratory personnel shall compare the received sample tank pressure to the pressure
recorded on sample tag. If the sample pressure has decreased by more than the
following, a resample will be requested.
Specific Gravity The Greater of
0.590 or less 100 psi or 20%
0.591 to 0.600 75 psi or 15%
0.601 and greater 50 psi or 10%
3.2 Considerations
Sampling Frequency
• The maximum interval between samples may be set by contract.
• Samples may be taken more frequently if required, due to changing conditions as
determined by field operations.
• All locations requiring sampling shall be sampled at least annually.
Sampling Methods
• Sampling methods are included as appendices to this guideline for reference
• Evacuated Tank Method, Appendix B.
• Constant Pressure Cylinder Method, Appendix C.
• Purge and Fill Method, Appendix D. This method is used only when the sample
container vacuum has been lost.
Equipment
Sample probe location as follows:
• Use a stainless steel probe, inserted into the center 1/3 of the gas stream.
• Install the probe in a straight run of horizontal pipe.
• Avoid turbulent areas downstream of pipe fittings and vertical piping runs.
• A stainless steel straight pattern ball valve or equivalent is recommended on the probe
outlet connection.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # QC-102
Sample system equipment as follows:

• Use 1/8” stainless steel tubing to connect the sample tank to the sample source.
• If necessary, install a gas filter or the equivalent in the connecting line immediately
downstream from the probe valve.
• Construct the sample inlet system as per the figure in Appendix B.
• Use 1/8" high-pressure tubing and a needle valve connected to the sample tank outlet
valve when using the Purge and Fill Method. See Appendix D.
• Construct mobile laboratory sample systems of 1/8" stainless steel tubing, that has
been heat traced and insulated.
• Sample systems that will be used at temperatures lower than the hydrocarbon
dewpoint of the gas being sampled shall be constructed with insulated tubing and
fittings.
• Contact the applicable Measurement Specialist regarding hydrocarbon dewpoint
information.
Sample Collecting – Procedure Example
• Follow the procedure steps outlined below and in the Appendices.
• If flowing conditions are not normal, for example, higher than normal flowing
temperature or if the possibility of excess liquid carryover exists either in the free
state or vapor state due to separation equipment failure, the sample shall not be taken
until the flowing conditions have been normalized.
• Obtain the sample.
• A field specific gravity determination of the gas stream sampled is required when a
spot sample is taken. The field determined specific gravity must be noted on the
sample report.
• The laboratory analyzed specific gravity and the field specific gravity must compare
within the tolerances listed below or a resample will be requested. Reference
Guideline QC-401, “Specific Gravity and Heating Value Determinations”.
Specific Gravity Tolerance

0.500 to 0.600 ± .004
0.601 to 0.650 ± .006
0.651 to 0.700 ± .008
>0.700 ± .010
Shipping Instructions
Pressurized cylinders shall be shipped in accordance with local regulations.
3.4 Records
Retain sample documentation including the date, location and source of sample, gas type,
pressure, temperature, flow, required tests and tests results. Note any unusual operating
conditions existing at the time of sampling.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # QC-102
4. References

• CFR Part 172, Hazardous Materials Table, Special Provisions Hazardous Materials
Communications, Emergency Response Information and Training Requirements
• CFR Part 173, Shippers – General Requirements for Shipping and Packagings
• CFR Part 175, Carriage by Aircraft
• CFR Part 177, Carriage by Public Highway
4.2 Gas Pipeline Operating Guidelines and Appendix

• QC-401, Specific Gravity and Heating Value Determinations
• Appendix B, Evacuation Tank Method
• Appendix C, Constant Pressure Cylinder Method
• Appendix D, Purge and Fill Method

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # QC-102
Appendix B
Key
1. Sample Source
2. Sample Tank
3. Source Valve
4. Purge/Vent Valve
A. Sample Tank Inlet Valve
B. Sample Tank Outlet Valve
C. Filter
D. Probe
E. Quick Connects
(Optional - see Note 1)
1
B
3 E C E A
D
2
PROCEDURE USING AN EVACUATED SAMPLE TANK

1. Attach the sample line and the Sample Tank to Valve 3. All valves are closed.
2. Open Valve 3 fully. Partially open Valve 4 to slowly purge the sample line.
3. Close Valve 4. Open Valve A fully to fill the Sample Tank to the following pressure.
Specific Gravity Tank Pressure
a. ≤ .600 line pressure
b. .601 - .650 400 psig max
c. > .650 100 psig
4. Close Valves 3 and A.
5. Open Valve 4 to vent the sample line.
6. Disconnect the Sample Tank.
Note 1: Use swagelok QF series (full-flow) or equivalent.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # QC-102
Appendix C
FIGURE 2
PRELOAD VALVE
SAMPLE GAUGE
PRELOAD GAUGE
CONSTANT PRESSURE CYLINDER
BURSTING RELIEF
FILL VALVE “A”
OPERATION OF DISPLACEMENT TYPE SAMPLE CYLINDER
1. Install pressure gauges on both ends of cylinder.
2. Connect the high hydrocarbon dew point gas to be sampled to the pre-load end of the cylinder
using 1/8” stainless steel tubing. Allow gas to slowly flow into the pre-load end by slightly
opening the pre-load valve.
3. Displace gas from the previous sample through the slightly opened fill valve.
4. The indicator rod or tracker tube indicates when the piston has fully displaced all of the gas in the
sample end.
5. Close the pre-load valve and disconnect the 1/8” stainless steel tubing from the pre-load end and
connect to the sample end using the same 1/8” tubing.
6. Allow gas to flow into the sample end by slightly venting gas from the pre-load end. When the
indicator rod shows that the sample end is approximately 80% full, close the valves and remove
the cylinder from the sample line.
7. This type of cylinder requires a DOT exemption. See Procedure 100.102, Section 5.5.1, Sample
Cylinder Requirements.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # QC-102
Appendix D
F
4 FIGURE 3
A Key
1. Sample Source
2. Sample Tank
3. Source Valve
1 4. Vent Valve
5. Pressure Gauge
D A. Sample Tank Inlet Valve
B. Sample Tank Outlet Valve
2 C. Sample Tank Bleed Valve
F D Filter
E. Probe
E F. Quick Connects
3 (Optional - see Note 2
B
5 C
PROCEDURE USING THE PURGE AND FILL METHOD

01. Attach the sample line and the Sample Tank to Valve 3. Sample tank should be in upright position.
02. Attach pressure gauge and 4-foot small I.D. Pigtail to Valve B.
03. Attach Valve C to the end of pigtail. Close Valve C.
04. Open Valve 3 fully. Partially open Valve 4 to slowly purge the sample line.
05. Close Valve 4.
06. Open Valves A and B to fill system to full line pressure.
a. ≤. 600 Line Pressure
b. .600 - .650 400 psig max.
c. >. 650 100 psig
07. Close Valve A.
08. Partially open Valve C and lower tank pressure to 10 psig.
09. Close Valve C and open Valve A.
10. Repeat steps 7, 8, and 9 according to the pressure schedule below.
11. Close Valves A and B and then Valve 3.
12. Open Valves 4 and C to vent all lines.
13. Disconnect the Sample Tank.
Less than 20 psig 10 times
From 20 to 65 psig 7 times
From 66 to 125 psig 6 times
Greater than 125 psig 3 times
Note 1: Use ball or equivalent large ported valve, avoid the use of needle valves.
Note 2: Use swagelok QF Series (full-flow) or equivalent.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Continuous Sampling
Doc. # QC-201D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for developing site specific procedures for the use of
a continuous gas sampling apparatus and cylinder to secure a representative sample of a
particular gas source over a given period of time.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Gas sampling is performed to determine the properties of a gas stream. Continuous
sampling is required when significant variations in gas composition are experienced. A
sampler proportional to flow is preferred over a timed model.
3.2 Considerations
If the sample cylinder pressure at the time of analysis is 50 psig or 10%, whichever is
greater, less than that recorded on the sample identification tag, the sample analysis may
not be used for billing calculations.
Sampling Equipment
• Continuous sampling devices shall be of the positive displacement type.
• A proportional sampling unit attached to the electronic flow measurement (EFM)
device shall be used whenever possible.
• Non-proportional to flow type units shall be equipped with a differential activation
switch.
• A chart recorder shall be installed on all accumulated sampling devices. The chart
shall display the date installed/removed, the meter number and the Station name. The
chart shall be retained at the appropriate Operations office for one year.
Sampling Equipment Installation
Use a stainless steel probe placed in the center one third of a straight run of horizontal
pipe so that the sample is representative of the actual flowing gas. Avoid turbulent areas.
The probe shall be installed in the primary device or as close to the custody point as
possible. Use full opening valves in the sample connection line.
Connecting line shall be as short as possible, to reduce sample lag time and be insulated
or heat traced as required. Swage Lock or equivalent fittings shall be used. Follow the
manufacturer's instructions for installation, pressure limits and maintenance.
Set the sample cycle frequency so that an adequate total sample approaching the line
pressure is obtained by the end of the complete sampling period. An exception to this is
for very high BTU gas where a final sample pressure lower than the line pressure is
desirable to reduce liquid fallout in the sample tank. Refer to Measurement Guidelines
for sample sizing.
Inspect the automatic sampling installation each time a full cylinder is replaced with an
empty cylinder and repair all leaks and malfunctions.
Sampling and handling of samples shall be done in accordance with Guideline QC-102D,
Gas Sample Collection.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Continuous Sampling
Doc. # QC-201D

Sample Cylinder
For continuous sampling, use a 300 cc minimum size cylinder. Use a constant pressure
sample cylinder for gas samples having C5+ content of 2 Mol% or greater.
3.4 Records
Complete the identification tag and attach it to the sample cylinder when the sample is
taken.
4. References

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Gas Chromatographs
Doc. # QC-202D
1. Purpose
operating, calibrating, inspecting and testing of gas chromatographs used for gas composition
analysis.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
A gas chromatograph is used to measure the individual components in a natural gas
mixture and to calculate the specific gravity and heating value from these components.
This data is then used to calculate the volume and energy for a measurement station.
There are three main types of chromatographs used within the pipeline system.
Portable chromatographs - These are transported in or installed in a vehicle and used to
perform analysis of the gas stream at field measurement locations.
On-line chromatographs - These are installed at a single measurement station and
usually connected directly to an electronic flow measurement (EFM) flow computer.
System chromatographs - These are installed along the pipeline system to provide
analysis information that is then used for volume and energy calculations on sales
facilities located on the same segment of pipeline as the chromatograph.
3.2 Considerations
Observe the following limits for quality control. If the limits are exceeded, take
appropriate correction measures.
Un-normalized Mole% ± 1.0%
Response Factor Shift ± 5.0%
Retention Time Shift ± 1.5%
Calibration Gas Minimum Pressure 20 psig
Carrier Gas Minimum Pressure 75 psig
Procedure
Follow the manufacturer's recommendations for the necessary details on installation,
initial start-up and operation. The sample system is of primary importance in obtaining
the most accurate analysis.
Pay particular attention to the following items. Refer to Guideline QC-102D, “Gas
Sample Collection”.
• Follow the manufacturer's recommendations on sample system requirements.
• An external particle (membrane separator) filter shall be installed in the gas stream,
after regulation and upstream of the gas chromatograph.
• Use a stainless steel sample probe inserted into the center one-third of the gas stream.
Install the probe in a flowing gas stream, preferably in a straight run of horizontal
pipe. Avoid turbulent areas such as near a valve or bend. Do not use any device, that
will allow contaminants near the pipeline wall to enter into the sample stream.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Gas Chromatographs
Doc. # QC-202D

• Pressure cuts shall be taken as close as possible to the sample source. Use a sample
probe with built in regulation that reduces the pressure inside the gas stream and aids
in the prevention of liquid formation whenever possible.
• A heat traced sample line shall be used to assure the gas remains in its vapor state.
Calibration Gas Standards
A gas chromatograph is only as accurate as the calibration standard. Therefore, careful
attention shall be paid to the purchase and use of the calibration gas as follows.
• The gas composition of the standard shall closely match that of the gas stream, that
the chromatograph will be analyzing.
• To calculate the heating, specific gravity and liquid values for the C6+ component,
assume 50% C6 and 50% C7, i.e. a 50/50 split.
4. References

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Hydrogen Sulfide and Total Sulfur Analyzers
Doc. # QC-204D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for developing site specific procedures for the use,
installation and testing of hydrogen sulfide analyzers.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Photocells, gas chromatographs, electrochemical cells and titrators are types of
instruments approved for the continuous detection and recording of hydrogen sulfide.
Instruments utilizing tubes containing dry chemical reacting materials that change color
on contact with hydrogen sulfide are approved for spot measurement of hydrogen sulfide
in sample gas streams.
3.2 Considerations
Hydrogen sulfide content must be determined from a flowing stream. Special precautions
may be necessary when working with gas that contains hydrogen sulfide.
Apparatus Calibration
Instruments shall be tested quarterly using a calibrated test gas. For photocell-type
instruments, calibration strips furnished by the manufacturer shall be used for testing on a
monthly basis. A known calibration gas or permeation unit shall be used for calibration
of all analyzers.
Apparatus Tolerance
The range of tolerance for continuous recording analyzers shall not exceed +0.1 grain/100
standard cubic feet.
3.4 Records
Results of all apparatus tests shall be recorded on the appropriate test form or analyzer
printout, as applicable. The original copy shall be retained in the location files for 12
months with copies distributed as required.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Specific Gravity and Heating Value Determinations
Doc. # QC-401D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for developing site specific procedures for
determining heating value and specific gravity of natural gas for use in contract calculations and
the determination of Company fuel use.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 Considerations
Acceptable Methods for Determining Heating Value
Gas Chromatography is an acceptable method with calculations based on Gas Processors
Association (GPA) Standard 2172 unless required otherwise by contract. Sampling may
be continuous, spot or by use of an on-line chromatograph.
Acceptable Methods for Determining Specific Gravity in Order of Preference:
• Gas Chromatography - with calculations based on GPA Standard 2172
• Gravitometer - Momentum Method
• Gravity Balance - Indirect Weighing Method
• Kinetic Energy Method
Reference the American Gas Association (AGA) Gas Measurement Manual for additional
information on these methods.
Test Method
Use Gas Chromatography to determine both the heating value and specific gravity unless
otherwise required by contract.
Test Frequency
Well heads and production units shall test at intervals as follows:
• As specified in the contract or at intervals not exceeding twelve months.
• Test new wells by the analysis method as soon as a representative sample can be
assured after 72 hours of flow or after the well has been flowing for at least 1 month
Gas Receipts, Deliveries, and Company Use Fuel.
The specific gravity and heating value shall be determined from the gas analysis. It shall
be applied according to company procedure, contract or tariff requirements.
3.3 Records
When field-determined specific gravity is required, record tests results and submit it to
Gas Measurement Services. For all samples analyzed by on-line chromatographs, the
data is transmitted electronically to Gas Measurement Services, or as otherwise provided.
For samples analyzed by others the results should be identified as to time of sample and
station number and transmitted to Gas Measurement Services.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Specific Gravity and Heating Value Determinations
Doc. # QC-401D
4. References
4.1 Gas Processors Association (GPA)
• Standard 2172
• Gas Measurement Manual

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Vehicle Operating Standards, Permits and Licenses
Doc. # TRN-101D
1. Purpose
permitting and licensing of Company owned or leased highway vehicles and automotive
equipment.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
The following permits and licenses may be required depending upon the type of vehicle
and the specific federal, state or local requirements:
• Registration of vehicle or automotive equipment
• Operator license, regular or special, depending on the vehicle class
• Highway permits
• Motor fuel importers permit
• Carrier certificate of registration
Compliance with all applicable local, State and Federal regulations and requirements is
mandatory.
3.2 Considerations
Traffic Rules
Drivers of vehicles shall comply with federal, state and local traffic rules. Fines resulting
from traffic violations while driving a Company vehicle shall strictly be the responsibility
of the driver.
Operations
Each Company will maintain written policy/procedures for the use of company-owned or
leased vehicles. This policy shall include the consequences an employee will face if the
policy is violated.
It is recommended that employees acknowledge in writing having received and read the
Company’s procedures for vehicle usage.
Company vehicles shall normally be used for Company business only. Reference the
Enron Global Asset Operations Safety Guidelines for safety items related to vehicle
operation.
Maintenance
Company personnel assigned a Company vehicle, and frequent and regular drivers of
Company vehicles, are responsible for:
• Ensuring that a program of scheduled maintenance is performed on their assigned
vehicle in accordance with the manufacturer’s service recommendations.
• Inspecting all vehicles at least quarterly and making repairs affecting safety
immediately.
• Taking resonable precautions to prevent theft of the vehicle or its use by unauthorized
personnel.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Vehicle Operating Standards, Permits and Licenses
Doc. # TRN-101D

Permits and Licenses
Drivers of vehicles must possess and carry a valid driver’s license issued for the
corresponding class of the vehicle or equipment. The Company shall reimburse the driver
for the cost of any special operator license required. This does not include a regular
operator’s license.
Vehicles shall be registered in the state(s) of intended operation.
Company vehicles assigned for transport exceeding state or local limitation shall obtain
and carry the appropriate permit.
Company vehicles with an assigned duty to cross state or province borders shall be
provided with the necessary motor fuel import permit(s) in accordance with the
applicable state requirements.
Locations are responsible for obtaining individual trip import permits for vehicles when
the trip frequency does not justify an annual permit.
The permit, license or facsimile shall be carried in the vehicle cab at all times.
Return permits and licenses to the appropriate department when the units are traded or
sold.
3.4 Records
Retain maintenance records and vehicle inspection reports at the location office for the
life of the particular vehicle involved.
4. References
4.2 All Applicable State and Federal Transportation Regulations

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Volume Bottles
Doc. # TRN-301D
1. Purpose
inspection, maintenance, marking, operation and testing of specific volume bottles used for the
transportation of natural gas or liquefied petroleum gas on public highways.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
This guideline will address uniform requirements for operators and for equipping,
marking, operating, and placarding tractors and trailers used to transport these volume
bottles.
The volume bottles addressed in this guideline are those permanently mounted to a trailer
and used for transporting natural gas or liquefied petroleum gas, either on a planned or an
emergency basis.
When a volume bottle trailer is connected to a pipeline facility; for example, when it is
being loaded or unloaded, it is treated like any other natural gas or liquefied petroleum
gas facility. When a trailer is not connected, it is treated as a trailer used for the
transportation of natural gas or liquefied petroleum gas.
Transportation of natural gas or liquefied petroleum gas on public roads in containers, not
authorized by the appropriate state or federal agency, is not acceptable.
3.2 Considerations
Driver Training and Licensing Requirements
Volume bottle truck drivers must meet the following requirements:
• Posses a commercial drivers license with hazardous material and tanker endorsements
• Be qualified to totally operate the vehicle, including loading, unloading and on-site
repairs
• Be knowledgeable of the requirements of this guideline, Safety guidelines and all
applicable state and federal motor vehicle regulations
Cargo, Driver and Vehicle Documentation
Drivers, cargo and the vehicle shall always carry the following documentation:
• A copy of Exemption DOT-E 10741, if applicable
• Shipping papers listing the quantity of empty or loaded bottles
• Proof of annual vehicle inspection for the tractor and trailer
• Hazardous material Emergency Response Guidebook
• Applicable driver’s log book
Loading and Unloading Considerations
• Volume bottles shall be loaded and unloaded from a qualified facility.
• Ensure that the volume bottle and station maximum allowable operating pressures
(MAOP) are not exceeded.
• Place appropriate warning signs and barricades around hazardous areas.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Volume Bottles
Doc. # TRN-301D

• Electrically ground volume bottles before loading and unloading. If connecting
piping does not provide a continuous ground path, install a temporary ground rod and
attach grounding cables prior to flowing gas. Use bonded cables and a minimum size
10 AWG wire.
• When volume bottles contain natural gas or liquefied petroleum gas, lock or
otherwise secure discharge valves and block valves upstream of relief valves against
unauthorized operation.
Emergency, Safety, and Other Equipment
• Provide three bi-directional emergency reflective triangles on the truck.
• Install an Ansul HF-K-30-E dry chemical portable fire extinguisher on both the truck
and trailer.
• Carry any other equipment required by the Enron Global Asset Operations Safety
guidelines, as well as any other equipment or small items that may be needed, such as
the following:
a. A ground rod and the applicable wire and clamps
b. Hand tools, a regulator(s), connecting fittings, pipe dope, etc.
Vehicle Inspections
In addition to the requirements of the Enron Global Asset Operations Safety Guidelines,
inspect the following truck and trailer items prior to each trip and daily when the vehicle
is in use. Items to be regularly inspected are as follows:
• Service brakes, including the trailer brake connection and the parking (hand) brake
• Steering mechanism and tires
• All lights and reflectors
• Horn
• Windshield wipers and washers
• All mirrors
• Coupling devices
• Required emergency equipment and placarding
• All valves and hoses on the bottle trailer manifold
Considerations During Transport
Select routes with the least amount of vehicular traffic. Avoid or minimize travel through
residential and business districts. When practical, select travel routes to minimize the
distance of highway travel with filled bottles.
Close each bottle’s discharge valve while transporting on a roadway.
CAUTION:
Relief valves must be piped such that they are operational during transportation.
Remove all temporary purge/fill valves, fittings and piping prior to transporting.
Except for one permanent fill/discharge line, all bottle openings shall be plugged
during transportation. During transportation, all valves and piping must be
within the confines of the roll over cages.
If the city is served by railroad service, stop the truck within fifty feet of, but no closer
than fifteen feet of, any railroad tracks to listen and ascertain that no trains are
approaching. Cross railroad tracks in a gear that permits the trailer to complete the
crossing without changing gears.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Volume Bottles
Doc. # TRN-301D

Do not park within five feet of the traveled portion of a street or roadway, unless it is
impractical to park elsewhere. A vehicle so parked must be attended by a licensed,
qualified driver. Do not park within 300 feet of an open fire or allow smoking or open
flames within 25 feet of the vehicle.
Do not transport non-company personnel without written supervisor approval. Except in
an emergency; do not allow unauthorized personnel to drive the vehicle.
Check the tires every 100 miles or two hours of operation, whichever is first. Make the
appropriate entries in the logbook.
Emergency Vehicle Parking
If a situation occurs requiring the vehicle to be temporarily parked on or near a public
roadway, take the following actions:
• Stop the vehicle as far from other traffic as safely possible
• Turn on the vehicle emergency warning flashers
• Place the emergency reflective warning devices at hazardous roadway areas
Vehicle Marking and Placarding
Display flammable gas placards with the identification number UN 1954 for refrigerated,
compressed flammable gas, UN 1705 for liquefied petroleum gas and Hazard Class 2.1.
Reference the Enron Global Asset Operations Safety Guidelines. Locate placards as
follows:
• Display at the front, rear and on each side of the trailer.
• Place a temporary placard on the front of any truck or liquefied petroleum gas
coupled to a volume bottle trailer.
• Securely attach placards so they are readily visible.
• Mark two traffic side bottle, two curb side bottle and the top rear member of the roll
cage with “Natural Gas Compressed” also applicable to Liquefied Petroleum Gas.
Use 2” minimum letters.
• If applicable, display a standard 3" x 36" reflective sign, stating "We Stop At All
Railroad Crossings", on the rear of all trailers.
Bottle Identification and Marking
Attach a durable identification plate near the rear of each bottle. Mark the following
items on the plate:
• The maximum allowable operating pressure; "MAOP is 867". Use characters at least
5/16" high.
• A unique bottle serial number. Use characters at least 5/16" high. The serial number
is composed of at least six characters as follows:
a. First Identifier - the accounting numbers that are assigned to the District where
the bottle is fabricated, at the time of fabrication
b. Second Identifier - the last two digits of the year in which the bottle is fabricated
c. Third Identifier - a letter identifying the series of bottles fabricated and
hydrotested at the same time
d. Fourth Identifier - a number assigned sequentially to each bottle in a series to
identify it from the rest.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Volume Bottles
Doc. # TRN-301D

• "DOT-E 10741 (CNG)" , if applicable in letters at least one inch high.
• The month and year of the latest date of each of the three following required tests.
Markings must be in letters at least one inch high.
a. Pressure tests are identified by a "P", for example, a pressure test in May 1994
shall be identified by "05-94 P".
b. Thickness tests by a "T"
c. Visual atmospheric corrosion inspections by a "V"
Bottle Inspections and Tests
Thoroughly inspect all volume bottles and the associated trailer for physical damage and
external corrosion that could affect the safe operation, transportation or storage of the
bottles at least once a calendar year, with intervals not over 15 months.
Mark the date of this inspection as "V", as described in “Bottle Identification and
Marking” above. Perform a cursory inspection before and after each use.
Using electronic leak detection equipment, at least once each calendar year with intervals
not over 15 months, perform a leak survey on each bottle while pressurized.
Test all relief valves as required in guideline VLV-102D, “Pressure Limiting and Relief
Devices”. Set pressure is 954 psig.
Hydrotest or pneumatic (natural gas, liquefied petroleum gas, if applicable, or nitrogen)
test each bottle every calendar year with intervals not over 15 months. Minimum test
pressure is 1300 psig for water and 1084 psig for natural gas, liquefied pertoleum gas or
nitrogen. Test duration is 8 hours. Test procedures must follow Engineering Standards
8100 and 8101.
Bottles transported pressurized after September 20, 1994 must have been tested within
the past 15 months. Mark the date of this test as "P" as described in “Bottle Identification
and Marking” above.
Ultrasonically check the wall thickness of the bottom of each bottle each calendar year,
with intervals not over 15 months. Take readings at a minimum of six locations along the
bottle length. Mark the date of this inspection as "T" as described in “Bottle
Identification and Marking” above.
Bottle Maintenance
Repair leaks in the bottle connections only.
Bottle bodies requiring repair shall be replaced.
Twice each calendar year, with intervals not over 7 1/2 months, drain any accumulated
water from each bottle via a bottom drain connection located near the discharge end of
the bottle.
Sampling and Testing of Gas
If volume bottles are used for continuous storage, sample the gas and analyze it for water
at least every 12 months.
Monitor the bottles per Guideline COR-105D, “Internal Corrosion, Offshore and within
Incorporated Areas” if moisture or other conditions can cause significant corrosion.
Bottles may not be transported containing pressurized gas with over 6 pounds of water
per million standard cubic feet or with more than 0.5 grains of hydrogen sulfide per 100
standard cubic feet of gas.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Volume Bottles
Doc. # TRN-301D

Accidents, Emergencies and Reporting Requirements
In the event of a vehicle accident, follow the requirements outlined in the Enron Global
Asset Operations Safety Guidelines.
In the event of an emergency involving a release of gas, initiate the appropriate action
based on the Location Emergency Plan.
In addition to reporting the release of gas or Hazardous Materials incidents per Procedure
ADM-101D, Reporting and Investigation of Incidents, report any significant situations
involving unintentional loss of gas or volume bottle failures as soon as practicable after
occurrence.
3.4 Records
Use the serial number of each bottle as the reference identifier for all documents, tests,
inspections and maintenance. If conditions are found that require corrective actions,
document the findings.
Maintain all as-built data required by Engineering Standard 8706.
Maintain test records required by Engineering Standard 8100 for the life of the bottle
involved.
4. References

• ES 8100, General Requirements for Pressure Testing
• ES 8101, General Specifications for Pressure Testing
• ES 8706, As-Built Data Requirements and Disposition for Transmission and Non-
Rural Gathering Facilities
• Part 150
• Part 177, Carriage by Public Highway
• CFR 192.605(b)(10), Procedural Manuals for Operations, Maintenance, and
Emergencies
• Part 390, Federal Motor Carriage Safey Regulations - General
• Part 392, Driving of Commercial Motor Vechiles
• Part 394
• Part 397, Transportation of Hazardous Materials; Driving and Parking Rules
• Parts 171, 172, 173, 177 and 178, Hazardous Materials Regulations
• Parts 301 through 399, Motor Carrier Safety Regulations

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Emergency Valve Maintenance
Doc. # VLV-101D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for the development of site specific procedures for
the safe, effective and economical inspection and maintenance of any valve required in an
emergency.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Procedures shall be developed for the periodic inspection and testing of system valves.
Any valve required in an emergency must be inspected and partially operated at intervals
not to exceed 7.5 months, but at least once each calendar year.
Valves required in an emergency shall be determined by each location.
Gas Control shall be notified prior to operating any valve that may significantly affect
system flow.
Those responsible for measurement or plant facilities shall be notified if the inspection of
a valve might affect the normal operations of those facilties.
Gas Control and other concerned personnel shall be notified when the inspection is
complete.
When above ground piping or fabrications associated with a valve outside of a plant yard
is inspected as a part of proper maintenance, it shall also be inspected for atmospheric
corrosion.
Operating Guideline COR-101D, Operation of Aboveground Facilities shall be followed
when the valve is given inspections and maintained as appropriate.
Valves and operators that are operated in compliance with Operating Guildeline
CS-402D, Emergency Shutdown System Training, Operations and Testing at intervals not
over 15 months, but at least once each calendar year, do not need to be operated again
under this guideline.
Valve Inspection and Maintenance
The valve inspection and maintenance shall include, but not be limited to the following:
• Grease or lubricate valve, if applicable.
• Fully operate the valve, if possible. If not, partially operate the valve to verify its
operation.
• If the valve is positioned by an operator, operate the valve by introducing the normal
power source to the operator, if practical.
• Ensure the valve environment shall not interfere with the operation of the valve or
prevent safe personnel access at any time of the year.
• Check for possible blow down obstructions and related signs if applicable. Reference
Operating Guideline PPL-409D, Blowdown and Purging Safety, and Engineering
Standard 4880.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Emergency Valve Maintenance
Doc. # VLV-101D

• Maintain valves and operators in operating condition. Protect normally closed valves
from conditions that can affect proper operation or cause deterioration.
• Perform inspection and maintenance on frequently operated valves more
often,especially in times of inclement weather when valves could be hard to locate.
Reference Operating Guideline VLV-103, “Valve Security” for valve security
measures.
• When valves are in boxes, sumps, pits or similar locations, review the Safety Manual
to determine if the location is considered a confined space. Take any precautions
determined necessary. Consider filling or partially filling such boxes to eliminate the
need for precautionary measures.
3.3 Records
Results of all valve inspections and any repairs made are retained as long as the
equipment is in service.
4. Reference
• CFR 192.745, Valve Maintenance: Transmission Lines
• CFR 192.605(b), Procedural Manuals for Operations, Maintenance, and Emergencies
• ES 4880, Guidelines for Sizing and Location of Blowdowns
4.3 Gas LDC Operating Guideline
• VLV-103D, Valve Security
• COR-101D, Examination of Aboveground Facilties

• ASME B31.8, 853.4, Valve Maintenance

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Pressure Limiting and Relief Devices
Doc. # VLV-102D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for the developing site-specific procedures for
capacity verification of relief devices and inspection/testing of pressure limiting and relief
devices.
2. Scope
This guideline applies to all “Company” facilities, its employees and its contractors except where
superseded by more stringent local standards.
3. Guideline
3.1 General
The most common pressure limiting devices are regulators. The most common pressure
relief devices are relief valves. While some of the wording below refers to regulators and
relief valves, for simplicity, the provisions of this guideline apply to any pressure limiting
or relief device unless specifically excluded.
The requirement for inspection of pressure limiting and relief devices does not imply that
it be disassembled for internal inspection.
3.2 Considerations
Abandoned Devices
Installed pressure limiting and relief devices deemed no longer necessary due to changes
in system operations that have eliminated the requirement, do not need to be maintained,
inspected or tested.
Tag each device indicating it is no longer necessary and is not being maintained.
Document why the device is not necessary.
Consider removing such devices when other scheduled or required work provides an
opportunity. When such a device is removed, applicable records may be discarded.
Equipment Owned by Others
When Company facilities are protected from overpressure by facilities owned and
operated by others, request information on the equipment and related maintenance records
in order to evaluate the adequacy of the equipment.
If the equipment is determined to be inadequate and the inadequacies cannot be corrected,
Company facilities shall be installed as necessary to provide protection.
Installation of such protection is discretionary. Reference Engineering Standards 0080
and 4401 for design guidelines.
Inspection and Testing
Calculate the required capacity or review a previous calculation of each relief device to
determine if it has sufficient capacity to limit the pressure as intended.
Compare the calculated value to the rated capacity of the device.
Require all field personnel to document any changes to the system including, but not be
limited to, station modifications and/or system modifications.
Review all applicable parameters to ensure new calculations or past calculations are valid.
Rupture discs are not required to be tested, but shall be inspected to ensure proper
functioning.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # VLV-102D

Frequency
Inspect and test each pressure limiting and relief device as outlined below:
• Inspect and test town border or city gate sales facilities, compressor stations, pipelines
and similar facilities, once each calendar year with intervals not to exceed fifteen
months
• Pipelines transporting highly volatile liquids, at intervals not to exceed 7.5 months,
but a least twice each calendar year
• Test relief valves on pressure break-out tanks at intervals not to exceed 5 years
• If equipment or physical conditions change between scheduled inspections and tests,
perform the appropriate tests as required to ensure equipment is sufficient
Regulators, Inspection Requirements
Inspect and test pressure regulators to ensure that each functions as follows:
• Is in good mechanical condition
• Is adequate from the standpoint of capacity and reliability of operation for the service
intended
• Opens and closes at the set pressures
• Is properly protected from external conditions or environment that might prevent
proper operation
• Has the control system piping properly designed, supported and protected and the gas
conditioned if applicable. See Engineering Standard 4710 for guidelines.
• Vent line is terminated properly and protected to minimize possible plugging with
items, such as snow, ice, or insects
• Repair or replace defective or inadequately sized equipment or components.
Relief Valves, Inspection Requirements
Inspect and test relief valves to ensure that each functions as follows:
• Is in good mechanical condition.
• Opens at the proper pressure. Actuate the "pilot operated" valve piston (main valve)
in addition to the pilot.
• Vent is free of obstructions and protected to prevent harmful accumulations of
moisture or debris. Ensure that weepholes are clear of debris.
• Control line is properly designed, supported and protected.
Make an on-site review and check of the facilities and pressures when the relief valve is
inspected and tested.
Verify that the correct valve is installed, no changes have been made to the valve or
piping and operating and/or relief flows/pressures are the same as in the calculations.
Increase or reduce relief capacity if the existing capacity does not meet requirements.
Reference Engineering Standards 0125 and 4401. Initiate appropriate measures promptly
to provide adequate overpressure protection if an unsatisfactory situation is found.
Secure isolating valves, when installed, in the open position after each relief device
inspection and test to avoid accidental or malicious closing.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Doc. # VLV-102D

Lock each isolating valve not located within a locked building or on Company property,
that is not continuously manned. Refer to Operating Guideline VLV-103D, Valve
Security.
Establish relief device set points so that the maximum allowed overpressure shall not be
exceeded. Allow for the pressure buildup required for the device to open fully, when
applicable. See Engineering Standard 4401 for set point criteria.
Exceptions to Testing Requirements
Exceptions to the above requirements are as follows:
• Pressure limiting or regulating equipment in domestic water systems
• Individual instrument or gas sampling regulators or relief devices
• Tool air regulators or relief devices
• Burner or engine control devices including last cut regulator prior to the carburetor or
the engine fuel header
• Fuel gas regulators and relief valves associated with facilities such as town border and
city gate station heaters, wellhead heaters, typical domestic hot water heaters and
heating furnaces
• Process control valves operated from a central panel
3.4 Records
Retain manual, relief device capacity calculations for the life of the particular relief
situation. Retain verifications of previous calculations until the subsequent year's
confirmation is completed.
More frequent visual observations of equipment performance either scheduled or
unscheduled, need not be permanently documented unless a problem is identified
requiring repair, maintenance or replacement of equipment.
4. References
• CFR 192.731 (a) and (b), Compressor Stations: Inspection and Testing of Relief
Devices
• CFR 192.739, Pressure Limiting and Regulating Stations: Inspection and Testing
• CFR 192.743, Pressure Limiting and Regulating Stations: Testing of Relief Devices
• ES 0080, Design Philosophy for Rural Gathering Pipelines
• ES 0125, Design Philosophy for Regulator and Sales Facility Stations
• ES 4401, Design Guidelines for Overpressure Protection Devices
• ES 4710, Design Guideline for Small Diameter Gas Piping for Instrument, Control
and Supply Lines
• VLV-103D, Valve Security
• ASME B31.8, 853.12, Inspection and Testing of Relief Valves
• ASME B31.8, 853.3, Maintenance of Pressure Limiting and Pressure Regulatory
Stations.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Valve Security
Doc. # VLV-103D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for developing site specific procedures for the safe,
effective and economical locking and/or securing of valves.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
The purpose for securing valves is to prevent accidental or malicious operation,
tampering or unauthorized operation.
3.2 Considerations
Valve Securing
All valves shall be secured at remote locations, unrestricted plant or facility locations and
meter stations.
All valves shall be secured that allow natural gas to be released to the atmosphere, could
cause an overpressure condition, cause a significant disruption of flow or cause a safety
device (relief valve) to become inoperative.
All valves shall be secured on the control boxes of all valves at unattended locations, with
powered valve operators to prevent unauthorized manual operation. This shall not
interfere with the remote or automatic operation of valves including those involved in
ESD and line break systems.
Valves at attended or restricted locations may be secured as deemed necessary by
operations.
Methods
It shall be determined which valves require locking or securing using the method
appropriate for the particular situation. Typical methods shall include, but not limited to,
the following:
• Locks or lock and chain combinations
• Removal of valve handles or hand-wheels
• Car seals or similar devices
• Location inside a locked building or enclosure
Valves that are normally secured in the open position shall include, but not limited to, the
following:
• Mainline and major gathering line block valves
• Branchline block/side valves and delivery station isolation valves.
• Isolation valves under relief valves

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Valve Security
Doc. # VLV-103D
Valves that are normally secured in the closed position shall include, but not limited to,
the following:
• Blow-off valves or valves that open to atmospheric pressure
• One valve in each bypass line around a station
Lock valves isolating systems having different MAOPs. Reference Engineering Standard
0150.
4. References
• CFR 192.179(b)(1), Transmission Line Valves
• CFR 192.195(a), Protection Against Accidental Overpressuring
• CFR 192.199(h), Requirements for Design of Pressure Relief and Limiting Devices
• ES 0150, Maximum Allowable Operating Pressure (MAOP) Criteria
4.5 Enron Security Guidelines

• ASME B31.8, 845.1, Basic Requirement of Protection Against Accidential
Overpressuring
• ASME B31.8, 846.11, Valves: Transmission Lines
• ASME B31.8, 845.3, Requirements for Design of Pressure Relief and Pressure
Limiting Installation

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Welding and Welder Qualifications
Doc. # WLD-101D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for developing site specific procedures for welding
and identifying the qualifications for welders.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Proper welding training and certification in essential to ensure efficiency and safety when
maintaining a quality maintenance program.
3.2 Considerations
Qualification of Welders
All welding performed by Company employees and contractors shall comply with API
1104 or Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Refer to Engineering
Standard 8315.
Test welds must be qualified by using a destructive test.
A welder may perform welds on pipe operating at a pressure that produces a hoop stress
less than 20% of SYMS by performing a weld test in accordance with Appendix C,
Section I of CFR 192.
Only properly qualified welders are permitted to make welds on the types of facilities
listed below:
• Facilities that will transport or contain natural gas, pressurized liquid hydrocarbons,
steam or condensates, compressed air or other compressed gasses
• Equipment or facilities on which a failed weld will endanger life or property
If a welder has been qualified under an issue of Engineering Standard 8315, he retains
such qualification when a later issue of Engineering Standard 8315 is released. However,
to remain a qualified welder after the date of the latest issue, he must satisfy the timing
and continuing qualification requirements of the latest issue.
Welding Procedures
Detailed welding procedures shall be developed and in place for each type of weld used.
Reference Engineering Standards Series 8400 and 8500 for information on welding
qualifications.
Limitations on Welders
Only welders qualified by destructive testing shall weld on compressor station piping or
components.
After qualifying, each welder must re-qualify once each calendar year at intervals not
exceeding 15 months or have a production weld pass a qualifying test at least twice each
calendar year at intervals not exceeding 7.5 months.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Welding and Welder Qualifications
Doc. # WLD-101D
3.4 Records
Records of the welding test methods used and the test results shall be retained for the life
of the facility.
4. References
• API Specification 1104, Welding of Pipelines and Related Facilities
• ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes
• ASME B31.8, 821.2, Welding
• ASME B31.8, 823, Qualification of Procedures and Welders
• ASME B31.8, 823.3. Welder Requalification Requirements
• CFR 192.225, Welding – General
• CFR 192.227, Qualifications of Welders
• CFR 192.229, Limitations on Welders
• ES 8150-8195, Standards for Radiographic Examination
• ES 8301-8310, General Welding Specifications
• ES 8315, Welder Testing, Pipeline Facilities
• ES 8320, Welding Inspector
• ES 8350-8364, Defect Removal and Repairs
• ES 8365-8390 Application Drawings and Procedures
• ES 8400 Series, Welding Procedures
• ES 8500 Series, Welding Procedures

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Weld Inspection and Testing
Doc. # WLD-102D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for developing site specific procedures for the safe
and effective performance of visual inspections and mechanical tests on welds by both
destructive and non-destructive methods.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Protection from Weather
All welding performed shall be protected from weather conditions that are unsafe and can
result in a defective weld.
3.2 Considerations
Miter Joints
Limitations on steel pipe deflection exist depending upon the percentage of SMYS under
which the pipe operates. Miter joints shall not be used for pipeline or station facilities.
Welding Preparation and Specifications
Surfaces to be welded shall be clean and free of debris. Alignment must be in a position
favorable to depositing the weld bead. Reference Engineering Standards 8301-8310 for
general welding specifications.
Inspection and Testing
All welds must be tested according to the requirements of API 1104 using destructive or
non-destructive tests.
Perform visual inspection and non-destructive testing of welding in accordance with
Engineering Standards 8150-8195.
Where welding inspectors are required, use inspectors qualified per Engineering Standard
8320.
Inspection of and Welding on Pressurized Pipelines
Reference Engineering Standard 8308 for general requirements, including pipe defects,
seams and girth welds and pressure reduction before welding.
3.4 Records
Record in detail and retain the welding procedure qualifications, including the results of
qualifying tests for as long as the welding procedure is in use. Retain welder
qualification records. All test results shall be documented and retained for as long as the
facility is in service.
4. References

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Weld Inspection and Testing
Doc. # WLD-102D
4.1 Code of Federal Regulations (49)

• CFR 192.231, Protection from Weather
• CFR 192.233, Miter Joints
• CFR 192.235, Preparation for Welding
• CFR 192.241, Inspection and Tests of Welds
• CFR 192.243, Nondestructive Testing

• ES 8301-8310, General Welding Specificatons
• ES 8150-8195, Visual Inspections and Nondestructive Testing
• ES 8320, Welding Inspector Qualifications
4.3 American Petroleum Institute

• API 1104, Welding of Pipelines and Related Facilities

• ASME B31.8, 822, Preparation for Welding
• ASME B31.8, 826.1, Inspection of Welds on Piping Systems Intended to Operate at
Less Than 20% of the Specified Minimum Yield Strength
• ASME B31.8, 826.2, Inspection and Tests for Quality Control of Welds on Piping
Systems Intended to Operate at 20% or More of the Specified Minimum Yield
Strength

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Welding Repair and Removal of Defects
Doc. # WLD-103D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for developing site specific procedures for the safe,
effective and economical repair/removal of weld defects.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
Each unacceptable weld must be removed or repaired. Except for offshore pipelines, a
weld is unacceptable if it has a crack that is more than 8% of the weld length.
Each weld repaired must have the weld removed down to sound metal.
The segment must be preheated if conditions exist that adversely affect the repair. Each
repaired segment must be inspected and tested.
A repair of a crack or other defect in a weld must be made in accordance with written
procedures and must provide the minimum mechanical properties specified to make the
original weld.
Reference Engineering Standards 8350-8364 for defect removal and repair requirements.
4. References
• CFR 192.225, Welding - General
• CFR 192.245, Repair and Removal of Defects
• ES 8350-8364, Weld Defect Removal and Repair
• ASME B31.8, 821, Welding
• ASME B31.8, 827, Repair or Removal of Defective Welds Intended to Operate at
20% or More of the Specified Minimum Yield Strength

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Joining of Pipeline
Doc. # WLD-104D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for developing site specific procedures for the joining
of pipeline materials by means other than welding.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 Considerations
Pipe expansion and contraction shall be taken into consideration in the design such that
temperature changes shall not cause excessive stress in any part of the system.
Procedures that outline proper methods for joining pipeline materials and the
qualifications of persons performing the work shall be developed and in place.
Each joint shall be inspected and tested to insure it complies with the written procedures.
4. References
• CFR 192.273, Joining Pipeline Materials By Means Other Than Welding - General

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Joining of Plastic Pipe
Doc. # WLD-105D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the requirements for developing site specific procedures for joining
plastic pipe components.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
When joining plastic pipe, the mating surfaces must be clean, dry and free of debris. A
clean cotton cloth shall be used to obtain a proper mating surface.
When joining plastic pipe the joint must be protected from the weather. Considerations
shall be made to mitigate the effects of extreme cold temperatures and high wind chill.
Only individuals qualified by training and experience shall complete any type of joint on
plastic pipe.
Manufacturer recommended written standards and directions for joining plastic pipe shall
be followed.
3.2 Considerations
Solvent Cement
When utilizing solvent cement, the mating surfaces must be clean, dry and free of debris.
The solvent must conform to ASTM Designation D 2513. Heating may not be used to
accelerate the bonding of the joint.
Heat-Fusion
Butt heat-fusion, socket heat-fusion or electrofusion joint methods may be utilized with
the proper equipment.
This equipment shall be inspected annually to insure proper mechanics and alignment.
All heating apparatus shall be inspected for temperature accuracy twice daily when
utilized.
Any equipment found to be malfunctioning shall be removed from service immediately.
Heat may not be applied with torch or open flame.
Adhesive Joints
Materials to be joined must be compatible with adhesive used. Adhesive must conform
to ASTM Designation D 2517.
Mechanical Joints
When utilizing compression type mechanical joints the gasket material must be
compatible with plastic and a rigid internal tubular stiffener used in conjunction with
coupling. Ensure that the correct SDR of stiffener to pipe is utilized.

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Joining of Plastic Pipe
Doc. # WLD-105D
4. References
• CFR 192.281, Plastic Pipe
• ASME B31.8, 842.39, Plastic Pipe & Tubing Joints and Connections
4.3 American Society of Testing & Materials (ASTM)
• ASTM Designation D 2513

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Qualifying Joining Methods
Doc. # WLD-106D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the qualifications for developing site specific procedures for methods
of joining plastic pipe.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 General
Before joining plastic pipe through heat fusion, adhesive or cement solvent methods, the
procedure must be qualified by subjecting sample joints to the burst tests requirements of
ASTM D 2513.
3.2 Considerations
For lateral pipe joints, subject the sample to a force on the lateral section until failure
occurs. If the failure is outside the joint area, the procedure qualifies. For non-lateral
pipe joints follow the test requirements of ASTM D 638.
To qualify mechanical joint procedures, use the apparatus specified in ASTM D 638 with
a sample of sufficient length such that the stiffener does not affect the joint strength.
Speed of testing is 5.0 mm per minute, plus or minus 25%.
Pipe less than 4” (102mm) in diameter is qualified if the elongation is no less than 25%
or if failure occurs outside the joint.
Pipe larger than 4” (102 mm) in diameter shall be subjected to a tensile stress greater than
or equal to the maximum thermal stress produced by a temperature change of 38° C (100°
F) or until the pipe is pulled from the fitting.
If the pipe pulls from the fitting, the lowest of 5 test results or the manufacturer’s
specification shall be used in design calculations for stress.
4. References
• ASME B31.8, 842.392, Joint Requirements
4.3 American Society of Testing & Materials (ASTM)

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Qualification of Personnel Performing Plastic Pipe
Fusion Doc. # WLD-107D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the qualifications for developing site specific procedures for personnel
to follow in the joining of plastic pipe and components by fusion.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 Considerations
Sample Testing
Persons performing fusion of plastic piping shall be properly qualified by prior
experience and appropriate training. Each person will produce test samples of fusion
joints to demonstrate their qualification.
The test samples shall be visually examined during and after the fusion process. The
acceptability of the test samples will be determined by comparison with manufacturer
examples of acceptable fusion joints.
Each test sample shall be examined by means of ultrasonic inspection to ensure that it is
free of defects.
If this is not practical, then three longitudinal coupons will be cut from each test sample
and visually examined to ensure no voids or discontinuities are found.
The sample shall also be tested by deforming it through bending, torque or impact. If a
break occurs during any one of these tests, the sample is unacceptable.
Recertification
A person qualified to perform plastic fusions will be re-certified if during any 12-month
period:
• The person does not perform a fusion
• Three fusions or three percent of the person’s production fusions, are found to be
unacceptable according to the requirements of 49 CFR 192.513.
3.3 Records
A system of documentation and tracking of personnel qualifications will be maintained.
4. References
• CFR 192.285, Plastic Pipe: Qualifying Persons to Make Joints
• CFR 192.513, Test Requirements for Plastic Pipe
• ASME B31.8, 842.392, Joint Requirments
• ASME B31.8, 842.5, Testing Plastic Pipe after Construction
Issued: February 5, 1999 Page 1 of 1

Revision: 0
Issued: Nov-1999
Qualification for Joint Inspectors
Doc. # WLD-108D
1. Purpose
This guideline establishes the qualifications for developing site specific procedures for persons
responsible to inspect pipe joints.
2. Scope
3. Guideline
3.1 Considerations
No person shall carry out an inspection of pipe joints unless qualified through training or
experience in inspecting pipe joints.
Qualified person(s) must be educated in the various procedures utilized in joining pipe.
3.3 Records
A copy of the certification of inspector qualifications shall be retained in the project file
as long as the facilities are in service.
4. References
• CFR 192.287, Plastic Pipe: Inspection of Joints
• ASME B31.8, 842.42, Inspection and Handling Provisions

Exceptions to defer implementation of specific standards and
guidelines may be granted on a case-by-case basis with approval by
regional Human Resources.
Human Resources
Standards/Guidelines Exception Process
Develop Approved by Review at Next

Need for Document and
Justification and Regional Yes Corporate
Exception Distribute
Submit Exception Human Audit
Identified
Request Resources
No • Requesting Management
• Management • Management Business Unit
• CEO / COO (if applicable)
• HR files
Communicate Develop
Denial Compliance Plan
and Implement
• Requesting • Management
Management
Business Unit
• CEO / COO (if
applicable
Exceptions to defer implementation of specific standards and
guidelines may be granted on an asset basis with approval by regional
management and Asset Operations.
Standards/Guidelines Exception Process
Management Standards / Guidelines Management Standards / Guidelines
Exception Request Exception Request
Global Operations Date: Global Operations
Submission Asset: Region: Request

Information Asset President: Extension: For Plant Manager
Approval Name Signature Date
Plant Manager: Extension:
Prepared by: Extension:
Exception Asset President

Management Standard Number:
Requested Name Signature Date
From Guideline Manual:
Title:
Page Number: Commercial Manager
Name Signature Date
Description
Of
Exception Regional This exception is approved at the regional level.
Approval
CEO
Name Signature Date
COO
Name Signature Date
Exception requested until:

Date This exception is denied.
Justification
CEO
Name Signature Date
COO
Name Signature Date
Global This exception is approved by Asset Operations.

Asset
Impact Yes No
Operations
Assessment
Approval
• Will this exception pose any safety hazards?
• Will this exception pose any safety hazards to personnel health?
Name Signature Date
• Does this exception create any environmental impacts?
• Is there a significant financial impact if this exception is granted?
• Does this exception create any operations impacts?
• Does this exception create any maintenance impacts?
This exception is denied by Asset Operations.
• Are there other significant impacts associated with this exception?
If the answer to any of the above questions is yes, describe plans to mitigate the impacts.
Name Signature Date
Page 1 Page 2
A six-step process for submitting, evaluating, and issuing revisions
to the Management Standards and Guidelines will be followed.
Submission Revision Distribution
Document Submit Evaluate Make Revision Issue Revision Communicate

Recommended Recommended Change Revision
Change Change
• Obtain revision • Submit revision • Suggested change is • Standard or • Revised standard • Send e-mail
form. form to Global evaluated versus guideline is or guideline is notification to
• Fill out revision Asset criteria. updated to issued per affected
form completely. Operations. • Recommendation is reflect revision. schedule. management.
• Global Asset developed: • Revision date is • Previous version • Site
Operations sends – Accept or reject? updated. is archived. management
– Basis for decision • Audit questions communicates to
acknowledgeme – Recommended
nt with probable are revised (if own personnel.
wording/ change
timeframe for • Recommendation is necessary). • Revision noted
evaluation. reviewed by field on website.
reviewers and/or
appropriate mgrs.
(incl. submitter).
• Recommendation is
approved or rejected.
H:\slgarcia\99-10-29_Revision Process
A six-step process for submitting, evaluating, and issuing revisions
to the Management Standards and Guidelines will be followed.
Management Standards/Guidelines
Revision Request
Global Operations Date:
Submitter Name: Phone #:

Information
Location: E-Mail Address:
Revision Management Standard Standard/Guideline Name:

Information
Guideline Standard/Guideline #:
Section/Page (if pertinent):
Suggested
Revision
Justification/
Benefits
Basis Attach pertinent documents/edits/etc

or
References
Application Does revision apply to other asset types?
Gas Pipeline Electric LDC Gas Processing
Liquid Pipeline LNG Power
Gas LDC LPG All Asset Types
Comments
Submission Submit to: Don Hawkins E-mail: dhawkin@ei.enron.com FAX:

Information
Phone: (713) 646-7XXX
H:\slgarcia\99-10-29_Revision Process

Gas LDC

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Gas LDC

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Revision: 0

Gas LDC Operating Guidelines

Global Asset Operations Page 1 of 6

Global Asset Operations Page 2 of 6

Administrative Guidelines (Continued)

Global Asset Operations Page 3 of 6

Global Asset Operations Page 4 of 6

Operations Guidelines (Continued)

Global Asset Operations Page 5 of 6

Operations Guidelines (Continued)

Global Asset Operations Page 6 of 6

3. Corporate Resource Commitment

4.1 Enron Corp Environmental, Health and Safety Management Procedures,

4.2 Enron Global Asset Operations Safety and Health Guidelines

4.3 Enron Global Asset Operations Environmental Guidelines

Global Asset Operations Page 1 of 3

Global Asset Operations Page 2 of 3

Global Asset Operations Page 3 of 3

• Employee Participation • Mechanical Integrity

3. Corporate Resource Commitment

4.1 U.S. OSHA PSM Web Sites

• PSM Resources – www.osha-slc.gov/SLTC/processsafetymanagement/index.html

4.2 AICHE/CCPS, Guidelines for Implementing Process Safety Management

4.3 Appropriate European Standards

Global Asset Operations Page 1 of 1

3. Corporate Resource Commitment

4.1 Enron Global Asset Operations Crisis Response Planning Manual

4.2 Enron Global Asset Operations Crisis Management Guidelines

Global Asset Operations Page 1 of 1

The minimum security measures to be provided include:

3. Corporate Resource Commitment

4.1 Enron Security Guidelines

4.2 Enron Global Asset Operations Crisis Management Guidelines

Global Asset Operations Page 1 of 2

Protection of Assets (Merritt Publishing)

Vol. Topic Vol. Topic

Global Asset Operations Page 2 of 2

• Management Responsibility • Process Control

3. Corporate Resource Commitment

4.1 Enron Global Asset Operation Quality Management Guidelines

4.2 International Organization for Standardization (ISO)

Global Asset Operations Page 1 of 1

• Equal Employment Philosophy • Overtime Pay and Expense Reimbursement

3. Corporate Resource Commitment

4.1 Enron Human Resources Guidelines

4.2 Enron Corp Code of Conduct

4.3 United States Foreign Corrupt Practices Act

Global Asset Operations Page 1 of 1

• Facility Organization Structure and Contact List

Administrative guidelines are available for each of the above areas.

3. Corporate Resource Commitment

4.1 Enron Global Asset Operations Administrative Guidelines

Global Asset Operations Page 1 of 1

3. Corporate Resource Commitment

4.1 Enron Global Asset Operations Management Standards

4.2 Enron Global Asset Operations Operating Guidelines

4.3 Enron Corp Code of Conduct

4.4 United States Foreign Corrupt Practices Act

Global Asset Operations Page 1 of 1

3. Corporate Resource Commitment

4.1 Enron Global Asset Operations Maintenance Guidelines

Global Asset Operations Page 1 of 1